CONFIGURATION MANUAL

Version 16.6 - June 2021

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Disclaimer
This manual and the information contained herein are the sole property of EVS
Broadcast Equipment SA and/or its affiliates (EVS) and are provided “as is” without any
expressed or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In particular, EVS makes no
warranty regarding the use or the consequences of use of this manual and the
information contained herein. Furthermore, EVS may not be held liable for any direct or
indirect, incidental, punitive or consequential loss, damage, cost or expense of any kind
whatsoever and howsoever resulting from the normal or abnormal use of this manual
and the information contained herein, even if advised of the possibility of such loss,
damage, cost or expense.
While every effort has been made to ensure that the information contained in this
manual is accurate, up-to-date and reliable, EVS cannot be held liable for inaccuracies
or errors that may appear in this publication. The information in this manual is furnished
for informational purpose and use only and subject to change without notice.
This manual cancels and replaces any previous versions thereof.

Copyright
Copyright © 2011-2021 EVS Broadcast Equipment SA. All rights reserved.
This manual may not be reproduced, transcribed, stored (in a database or an retrieval
system), translated into any language, computer language, transmitted in any form or by
any means – electronically, mechanically, printed, photocopied, optically, manually or
otherwise – in whole or in part without the prior written consent of EVS.

Trademarks
All product and brand names are registered trademarks and trademarks of EVS or of
their respective owners.

Improvement Requests
Your comments will help us improve the quality of the user documentation. Please send
improvement requests, or report any error or inaccuracy on this user manual by e-mail to
doc@[Link].

Regional Contacts
You will find the full list of addresses and phone numbers on the following webpage:
[Link]

I
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

User Manuals on EVS Website

The latest version of the user manual, if any, and other user manuals on EVS products
can be found on the EVS download center, on the following webpage:
[Link]

II
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS III

WHAT'S NEW? VII

1. INTRODUCTION 1
1.1. Introduction to the Configuration of EVS Servers 1
1.2. Introduction to the Manual 4
1.3. Starting the EVS Server 4
1.4. Accessing the Web-Based Interface 5

2. MULTICAM SETUP 6
2.1. Overview of User Interfaces 6
2.1.1. Overview of the Setup Areas 6
2.1.2. Navigability and Commands 10
2.2. Configuration Lines 12
2.2.1. Chapter Contents 12
2.2.2. Launching a Configuration 13
2.2.3. Editing a Configuration 14
2.2.4. Renaming Configuration Lines 16
2.2.5. Importing and Exporting Configuration Lines 17
2.2.6. Changing the Position of Configuration Lines 22
2.2.7. Copying, Pasting and Deleting Configuration Lines 23
2.3. Server Parameters 24
2.3.1. Chapter Contents 24
2.3.2. Assigning a Server Facility Name 25
2.3.3. Activating and Deactivating the Password Protection 26
2.3.4. Setting the Server PC LAN Connection 28
2.3.5. Configuring a DNS Server Connection 30
2.3.6. Setting the Server Date and Time 31
2.3.7. Configuring Server RAIDs 32
2.4. Licenses and Maintenance 35
2.4.1. Overview on Options Codes Management 35
2.4.2. Options Codes Management Window 36
2.4.3. Entering and Removing License Codes 38
2.5. Server Maintenance 40
2.5.1. Chapter Contents 40
2.5.2. Rebooting the EVS Server 40
2.5.3. Hardware Check 41
2.5.4. Upgrading the Disk Firmware 43

Table of Contents III

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.5.5. Clearing Video Disks 44

2.5.6. Overview on the Hardware Check 45
2.5.7. Record Train Maintenance 46
2.5.8. Importing and Exporting Keyword Files 49
2.5.9. Exporting Log Files 51

3. SUPPORTED CONFIGURATIONS 52
3.1. General Principles 52
3.1.1. About Supported Configurations 52
3.1.2. About Record and Play Channels 53
3.1.3. About Extended Configurations 54
3.1.4. Channel Assignment Principles 55
3.2. SD and HD Standard Configurations 58
3.2.1. SD/HD Configurations (4U) 58
3.2.2. SD/HD Configurations (6U) 62
3.3. SLSM Configurations 66
3.3.1. General Information on Supermotion Configurations 66
3.3.2. SLSM Configurations (4U) 69
3.3.3. SLSM Configurations (6U) 83
3.4. 3D Configurations 114
3.4.1. General Information on 3D Configurations 114
3.4.2. 3D Standard Configurations (4U) 114
3.4.3. 3D Standard Configurations (6U) 116
3.4.4. Channel Assignment Principles with 3D SLSM 118
3.4.5. 3D SLSM Configurations (4U) 118
3.4.6. 3D SLSM Configurations (6U) 120
3.5. 1080p Configurations 124
3.5.1. General Information on 1080p Configurations 124
3.5.2. 1080p Standard Configurations (4U) 125
3.5.3. 1080p Standard Configurations (6U) 128
3.5.4. Channel Assignment Principles with 1080p SLSM 132
3.5.5. 1080p SLSM Configurations (4U) 133
3.5.6. 1080p SLSM Configurations (6U) 140
3.6. UHD-4K Configurations 150
3.6.1. General Information on UHD-4K Configurations 150
3.6.2. UHD-4K Configurations (4U) 152
3.6.3. UHD-4K Configurations (6U) 153
3.6.4. UHD-4K SLSM Configurations (6U) 154

4. MULTICAM CONFIGURATION 156

4.1. Overview on User Interfaces 156
4.1.1. Introduction 156
4.1.2. Overview of the Multicam Configuration Window 158
4.1.3. Navigating and Editing in the Multicam Configuration Window 162
4.1.4. Overview of the Setup Menus in the Remote Panel 164

IV Table of Contents
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.1.5. Navigating and Editing in the Setup Menus of the Remote Panel 165
4.1.6. Required Application Reboot 167
4.2. Server Tab 168
4.2.1. Overview 168
4.2.2. Video Codecs and Reference 169
4.2.3. Phase Definition Settings 188
4.2.4. Interpolation Settings 190
4.2.5. PC LAN Settings 191
4.2.6. Domain Name System Settings 192
4.3. Channels Tab 194
4.3.1. Channels 194
4.3.2. Audio 224
4.3.3. Timecode and Data Insertion 251
4.4. Network Tab 260
4.4.1. Overview 260
4.4.2. XNet Settings 261
4.4.3. Gigabit Connection 264
4.4.4. Gigabit IP Configuration 266
4.4.5. Gigabit Prioritization Settings 267
4.5. Monitoring Tab 270
4.5.1. Overview 270
4.5.2. Multiviewer Settings 271
4.5.3. OSD Settings 276
4.5.4. Monitoring Settings 278
4.5.5. Configuring OSD Display 281
4.6. Protocol Tab 283
4.6.1. Overview 283
4.6.2. RS422 Protocols Settings 285
4.6.3. Clip Identifiers 286
4.6.4. Sony BVW Settings 287
4.6.5. EditRec 288
4.6.6. Tally Feature 296
4.6.7. Tally/UMD Settings 298
4.6.8. RS422 VarID Settings 301
4.7. GPI Tab 305
4.7.1. Overview 305
4.7.2. GPI Settings 305
4.7.3. Tally Playlist Settings 310
4.8. Operation Tab 312
4.8.1. Overview 312
4.8.2. OSD Settings 317
4.8.3. Audio Meters OSD Settings 319
4.8.4. Clips Settings 320
4.8.5. Playlist Settings 326
4.8.6. Timeline Settings 333
4.8.7. Protection Settings 334

Table of Contents V
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.8.8. Keywords Settings 336

4.8.9. Push Settings 338
4.8.10. Audio Settings 341
4.8.11. EVS Controller Settings 342
4.8.12. Hypermotion Management 349
4.8.13. Hypermotion Controller Settings 350
4.8.14. Special Effects Settings 353
4.8.15. Split Screen Feature 358

5. MONITORING 359
5.1. Server Monitoring 359
5.1.1. Overview on Server Monitoring Windows 359
5.1.2. General Information Window 360
5.1.3. RAID and Disk Status Window 362
5.1.4. Timecode Status Window 365
5.1.5. Timecode Monitoring Window 368
5.1.6. Log Management 369
5.2. XNet Network Monitoring 371
5.2.1. Overview on XNet Network Monitoring Windows 371
5.2.2. XNet Network Schema 371
5.2.3. Hardware Error Counters 373
5.2.4. Disconnecting a Machine from the XNet Network 374
5.3. Protocols 375
5.3.1. Introduction 375
5.3.2. Sony BVW75 375
5.3.3. XTENDD35 378
5.3.4. Odetics 379
5.3.5. VDCP 380

6. TRUCK MANAGER PLUGIN 383

6.1. Introduction 383
6.2. Plugin Overview 384
6.3. Contextual Menu 387
6.4. Configuration Area 388
6.5. Server Area 388
6.6. Channels Area 391
6.7. Network Area 396

GLOSSARY 399

VI Table of Contents
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

What's New?
In this Multicam Configuration manual, the icon has been added on the left
margin to highlight information on new and updated features in release 16.6.
The XT3 server Configuration manual has not been subject to changes related to new
features for release 16.6.
The following changes unrelated to new features, and therefore not highlighted with the
New icon, have been brought to the configuration manual:
Rules for controller combinations has been updated: parallel control of server
channels by IPDirector and LinX is blocked.
• See section "Rules for Controller Assignment" on page 211.
Rules for controller combinations have been updated: parallel control of play
channels by LSM and LinX is blocked.
• See section "Rules for Controller Assignment" on page 211.
Audio Track Mute Threshold corrected.
• See section "Audio Settings" on page 341.

What's New? VII

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

1. Introduction

1.1. Introduction to the Configuration of

EVS Servers

Configuration Module
The Multicam Setup application is used for configuration and maintenance operations
on EVS video servers. It is also used to select which application to run, since EVS disk
recorders have the ability to run various dedicated applications (Video Server, Slow
Motion, …).
The configuration module has been developed along the lines presented in this section.

Consolidation into a Single User Interface

The server can be fully configured from a single user interface.
The user interface includes:
• a setup section presented on one page with two main areas which give access to the
configuration lines and the most used maintenance commands:

1. Introduction 1
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

• a configuration section for each configuration line. It is presented in seven tabs

which easily give access to all configuration parameters:

Simple User Interface

The user interface is simple and clear thanks to:
• the separation of basic and advanced parameters
The most commonly used parameters are displayed in a basic mode while more
specific parameters are hidden, and can be displayed when you toggle to the
advanced mode.
• the filtering of the parameters displayed
The parameters are only displayed when they are applicable to the chassis type, the
video standard and option codes.

2 1. Introduction
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Parameter Changes While Server is Running

Changes to most parameters can be performed and are taken into account while the
server is running.
Changing some parameters requires an application reboot. See section "Required
Application Reboot" on page 167 for a detailed list of these parameters.

Easy Audio Configuration

The audio configurations are open and easily configurable as it is possible to:
• modify the audio parameters while the server is running
• configure individual outputs for Embedded, Digital, and MADI audio.
• configure audio monitoring settings directly from the Remote Control panel.

Configuration Available from Server, Web and Remote

Panel
You can configure the EVS server using one of the three available tools:
• The server-based application (VGA) features all settings and commands for the
setup and configuration.
• The web-based interface is equivalent to the server-based application and enables
engineers to configure the EVS server remotely.
• The Remote Panel includes:
◦ a technical setup menu that gives access to the most commonly used technical
settings.
◦ an operational setup menu that only provides operational settings.
The following table gives an overview on the features available in each user interface:

EVS Server Configuration

Configuration Window
Setup Window
Technical Settings Operational Settings

Server-Based Yes Yes Yes

Application (tabs 1-6) (tabs 7-8)

Web-Based Yes Yes Yes

Interface (except some (tabs 1-6) (tabs 7-8)
Tools commands)

Remote Panel No Yes Yes

(Technical Setup F0) (Setup Menu SHIFT+D)

1. Introduction 3
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

1.2. Introduction to the Manual

Documented User Interfaces

The Server Configuration manual deals with all user interfaces used to configure
Multicam: server-based application, web-based interface, and Remote Panel.
• On the one hand, the information on navigability and editing commands, specific to
the user interface, is described in clearly separated sections.
• On the other hand, the reference information on and the description of configuration
parameters are described in common sections valid for all user interfaces. A clear
overview shows whether and where the parameters are available in each user
interface.

NOTE
The web-base interface has undergone small cosmetic changes. The
screenshots have not yet been updated in the configuration manual.

Configuration Manual Structure

The Server Configuration manual is organized in two sections:
• A section dedicated to the Multicam Setup window that mainly features:
◦ the configurations lines and their management
◦ the functions related to server administration and maintenance.
• A section dedicated to the Multicam Configuration window, organized in seven tabs,
which describes all server configuration parameters that can be defined for each
configuration line. The section includes:
◦ the parameter description itself
◦ other server-related information needed for the configuration

1.3. Starting the EVS Server

Introduction
When switching on the EVS server, the first step is the PC boot sequence, followed by
the boot of the video I/O boards, and finally the Multicam Setup application is started.

4 1. Introduction
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

When Starting the EVS Server for the First Time

Before you first use your EVS server, you need to perform the following tasks:
• Define the configuration lines your EVS server should run.
For more information, see section "Configuration Lines" on page 12.
• Define the configuration parameters for each configuration line you will need.
In this step, you will define, among others, the channel configuration for the selected
configuration line, as well as audio and video parameters for the EVS server.
For more information, see section "Multicam Configuration" on page 156.

When Starting the EVS Server After Initial Configuration

After the initial configuration, you will select a configuration line and press ENTER to run
the server in this configuration. See section "Launching a Configuration" on page 13. As
soon as the EVS server is launched in a configuration, it starts the loop recording
process.

1.4. Accessing the Web-Based Interface

Prerequisite
When the EVS server is started, you can access the web-based interface of the
Multicam Setup application for that EVS server from any computer on the same network
range as the EVS server. You can use any browser to open the web-based interface.

How to Access the Multicam Web Homepage

To open the homepage of the web-based interface in a browser, type the IP address of
the PC LAN of the EVS server: [Link] IP Address>, for example
[Link]
See section "Setting the Server PC LAN Connection" on page 28 for more information
on .
The Multicam Web homepage gives access to:
• the configuration and technical reference manuals
• a QR code to download the EVS Server Configuration application from the Google
Play store or the Apple store.

How to Access the Multicam Web Setup Window

To open the Multicam Setup window of the EVS server, type this URL: [Link]
IP Address>/cfgweb/.

1. Introduction 5
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2. Multicam Setup

2.1. Overview of User Interfaces

2.1.1. Overview of the Setup Areas

General Description
The Multicam Setup window is the window that opens first when the Multicam Setup
application is launched. It is displayed when the EVS server is started but does not run a
given configuration yet.
The Multicam Setup window allows users to:
• view and manage the various configuration lines.
• perform some administration and maintenance tasks on the EVS server.
• view summary information on the EVS server and the selected configuration line.
This is available in both server-based and web-based Multicam Setup applications.
Both user interfaces include the same features, except that the Tools menu offers fewer
commands in the web-based user interface.

6 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

User Interfaces
The Multicam Setup window contains six areas highlighted and described below.
These areas contain similar information in both web-based and server-based
applications.
The following screenshot presents the Multicam Setup window in the server-based
application:

2. Multicam Setup 7
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

The following screenshot presents the Multicam Setup window in the web-based
interface:

8 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Description of the Areas

The table below describes the various parts of Multicam Setup window:

# Name of area Description

1. Title bar The title bar displays the following information:

• Multicam version
• chassis type
• server serial number
• server facility name (if any)
• hardware edition

2. Configuration Lines This area shows all configurations the EVS server
can run:
• 16 configurations lines are available on an EVS
server. A default configuration is defined behind
all configuration lines, even if no name is
assigned to the configuration line.
• Each configuration line contains all configuration
parameters, which allow a very flexible
configuration of the EVS server.
See section "Configuration Lines" on page 12 for
more information.

3. Tools This area provides the main commands for server

administration and maintenance.
For more information, click the Tools command
below to go to the dedicated sections in the Multicam
Setup chapter:
• Import/export configuration lines
• Assign server facility name
• Import/export keyword files
• Export log files
• Options code management
• Hardware check
• RAID Configuration
• Upgrade disk firmware
• Set LAN PC address
• Set date and time
• Clear video disks
• Reboot
• Enable password for technical settings

4. Configuration This area shows a summary of the server parameters

Summary for the configuration line selected in the Configuration
Lines area.
The summary displays the following information:
1. codec type - bitrate - video standard
(for each active codec)
2. based config - INs/OUTs - No. audios
3. XNet No. - server name - XNet server (Preferred,
Allowed, Forbidden)

2. Multicam Setup 9
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

# Name of area Description

5. Task bar The Task bar (Server-based application) displays

commands for the main actions in the window.
See section "Navigability and Commands" on page
10 for more information.

5'. Status bar The Status bar (web-based interface) displays:

• the Multicam process status
• the Multicam software version
• the Hardware Edition

6. Server Information This area displays the following information on the

EVS server:
• genlock status (OK or bad)
• timecode and timecode status (OK or bad)
• IP address of the PC LAN (if DHCP off) or DHCP
(if DHCP on)
• Status of the PC LAN connection(s): Up or Down

2.1.2. Navigability and Commands

In the Server-Based Application

General Navigability
The following table presents the general commands to navigate in the Multicam Setup
window:

Command description Command key

Moving the cursor to the first item of the Tools menu F9

Moving the cursor to the first configuration line ESC

Moving down in the list of editable items TAB

(configuration lines and Tools commands)

Moving up in the list of editable items SHIFT+TAB

Displaying a Help window that gives a summary of F1

the commands

10 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Configuration Lines
In the Configuration Lines area, a configuration line is highlighted when it is selected.
The main commands for configuration line management are presented below:

Command description Command key

Moving up in the list of configuration lines UP ARROW

Moving down in the list of configuration lines DOWN ARROW

Starting the server with a given configuration line ENTER on selected line.

Entering the Configuration window to edit the F8

settings related to a selected line

Renaming a configuration line CTRL + F1

Deleting a configuration line CTRL + DELETE

See section "Configuration Lines" on page 12 for more commands on configuration

lines.

Tools Menu

Command description Command key

Selecting a tool command Pressing the shortcut key

(between brackets in the
command name)

Calling a tool command ENTER on the selected

command

In the Web-Based Interface

NOTE
To be sure that changes have been taken into account in the web-based
interface, refresh regularly the page by clicking the Refresh button in the
status bar.

2. Multicam Setup 11
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Configuration Lines

Command description Command icon

Renaming the configuration line

Entering the Configuration window to edit the settings related

the configuration line

Deleting the configuration line

Starting the server with the corresponding configuration line

Tools Menu
To call a Tools command, simply click on the command in the Tools menu. This will
open the corresponding window.

2.2. Configuration Lines

2.2.1. Chapter Contents

The table below presents the topics of this section and shows whether the feature
described is available from the web-based interface and/or from the server-based
interface.

Server-
Section Page Web-Based
Based

"Launching a Configuration" 2.2.2 Yes Yes

"Editing a Configuration" 2.2.3 Yes Yes

"Renaming Configuration Lines" 2.2.4 Yes Yes

"Importing and Exporting Configuration Lines" 2.2.5 Yes Yes

(one by one)

"Changing the Position of Configuration 2.2.6 Yes Yes

Lines" (indirectly)

"Copying, Pasting and Deleting Configuration 2.2.7 Yes Yes

Lines" (indirectly)

12 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.2.2. Launching a Configuration

Introduction
When the EVS server has initialized, the Multicam Setup window stays open, by default,
until the operator selects the requested configuration line and launches it.
Multicam can encode the video signal simultaneously in a low-res and hi-res essences,
and grant a seamless access to the video material in all active essences. The material
ingested on an EVS server must therefore, as much as possible, be and remain
available on this server in both active essences. For this reason, some restrictions or
checks are applied when you launch a configuration.

Compatible Multi-Essence Configurations

On the same SDTI network, it is not allowed to have:
• EVS servers with mixed multi-essence configurations;
or
• a combination of EVS servers supporting and not supporting multi-essence
configurations.
In such situations, you will get the following message when you try to launch a
configuration on the EVS server: "Incompatible multi-codec configuration
on the network".
You have the option to:
• come back to the Multicam Setup window to select a configuration compatible with
the other EVS servers;
• work in standalone mode. This mode will prevent you from browsing the content of
other EVS servers and from transferring content to other EVS servers.

Change of Multi-Essence Configuration

To make sure the video material is available in the required essences on the EVS
server, you need to perform a clear clip before launching a configuration in the following
situations:
• after upgrading from Multicam [Link] to Multicam [Link], or from [Link] to 16.X.
• in specific changes from one to another multi-essence configuration.
See section "Clearing Video Disks" on page 44 for detailed information on when a clear
clip is required.

2. Multicam Setup 13
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

How to Manually Launch a Configuration

In the Server-Based Application

To start a configuration in the server-based application, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Press ENTER to run the configuration line on the EVS server.

In the Web-Based Interface

To start a configuration in the web-based interface, click the Launch icon next to the
configuration line you want to launch.

Automatic Launch
From the server-based application, it is possible to set the server so that the last used
configuration line is automatically launched when the Multicam Setup window has
stayed open for five seconds.
To activate the automatic launch, press F7 on the requested configuration line in the
Multicam Setup menu before launching this configuration. This configuration line is then
highlighted in black (no longer in green) to indicate the automatic launch is active. The
last used configuration line will then be launched automatically after a five seconds'
delay the next time the EVS server will be restarted.
If you want to change the configuration line to be launched, you need to rapidly hit a key
on the keyboard connected to the EVS server within five seconds after the Multicam
Setup window has been displayed. Then, the Multicam Setup window will stay open and
let you select another configuration.

2.2.3. Editing a Configuration

How to Edit a Configuration

Introduction
When the operator hits a key on the keyboard connected to the EVS server (within five
seconds if the automatic launch of a configuration is active), the Multicam Setup window
stays open, and the operator can select and enter the selected configuration to edit it.
16 configurations lines are available on an EVS server. A default configuration is defined
behind all configuration lines, even if no name is assigned to the configuration line.
Each configuration line contains all configuration parameters, which allow a very flexible
configuration of the EVS server.

14 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

In the Server-Based Application

To edit a configuration line in the server-based application, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Press F8.
The Configuration window opens. See section "Multicam Configuration" on page
156 to edit the configuration parameters.
3. When the configuration is defined for a given line, press ALT+A in the Configuration
window to validate the changes
4. Press ESC to come back to the Setup window.

In the Web-Based Interface

To edit a configuration line in the web-based interface, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Edit icon for the configuration line you want to configure.
The Configuration window opens. See section "Multicam Configuration" on page
156 to edit the configuration parameters.
2. When the configuration is defined for the given line, click Apply to validate, and then
Quit to come back to the Setup window.

Invalid Configuration
Invalid configuration lines are easily detected in the server-based application:
• When a configuration line becomes invalid, a red exclamation mark <!> is displayed
next to the configuration line in both server-based and web-based interfaces:

or
• When the operator presses F8 to edit the configuration line in the server-based
application, a popup window indicates the line is invalid. When the operator
acknowledges the message, the pages including the invalid parameters are
displayed with the invalid parameters selected.

2. Multicam Setup 15
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.2.4. Renaming Configuration Lines

Introduction
When the EVS server is delivered, default names are assigned to the configuration
lines. You can change them as explained below.

In the Server-Based Application

To rename the configuration line in the server-based application, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Press CTRL+F1.
The line if highlighted in pink and the cursor blinks on the first character.
3. Type the new name for the configuration line taking the following into account:
◦ The space bar allows you to delete the selected character.
◦ The LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys allow you to move the cursor
position on the line.
4. Press ENTER to validate the new name.
The new name is assigned to the configuration line and reflected in all user interfaces.

In the Web-Based Interface

To rename the configuration line in the web-based interface, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Rename button next to the configuration line you want to rename.
2. In the Rename dialog box, type the new configuration name.
3. Click OK.
The new name is assigned to the configuration line and reflected in all user interfaces.

16 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.2.5. Importing and Exporting Configuration Lines

How to Export Configuration Lines

NOTE
The screenshots in this section features configuration names which are
examples, and may not reflect configurations supported on your EVS server.

In the Server-Based Application

To export configuration lines from an EVS server in the server-based application,
proceed as follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, press P to call the Export Configuration Lines
command. The Export Configuration Lines window opens:
◦ The left pane allows the selection of the configuration lines to be exported
◦ The right pane allows the selection of the location where the export folder will be
created on the USB key, or on the local drive folder
/mnt/apps/data/setup/user (/setup/user via FTP) or on a subfolder.

2. If requested, change the name of the folder the configuration lines will be exported
to:
◦ By default, the folder name, displayed in the upper right corner, follows the
pattern: <server facility name_current date> where the date has the YYMMDD
format.
◦ To change the export folder name, type the requested name. You can do this
any time in the procedure.

2. Multicam Setup 17
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3. If requested, change the selection of configuration lines selected for export on the
left pane:
◦ By default, a cross is displayed in front of all configuration lines, which means
they are all selected for export.
◦ To deselect a line, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to highlight the
requested line, and press SPACEBAR. The cross is removed, and the
deselected lines turn light gray.
4. Press TAB to shift the focus to the right pane.
5. If requested, change the location where the export folder will be created:
◦ By default, the export folder is created on the USB key root or on the local drive
folder the local drive folder /mnt/apps/data/setup/user.
◦ To change the folder where the export folder will be created, highlight the
requested folder. The last highlighted folder will be considered as the requested
location.
6. To start the export process, press ENTER.
7. When the selected lines are exported (as a .lin file), a message opens to confirm the
export. Click OK to acknowledge the message.

In the Web-Based Interface

NOTE
In the web-based interface, it is only possible to export configuration lines one
by one.

To export configuration lines from an EVS server in the web-based interface, proceed as
follows:
1. From the Multicam Setup window, click Export configuration lines in the Tools
menu.
The Export configuration lines window opens.

18 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2. Click Export next to the configuration line you want to export.

3. In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
4. Select the location where you will save the export configuration file (.lin file) and, if
requested, change the file name.
5. Click Save.
The export file is saved at the requested location.
If you want to export several configuration lines, repeat this operation for all requested
configuration lines.

How to Import Configuration Lines

In the Server-Based Application

WARNING
If the EVS server is password-protected, you should deactivate the password
protection. Otherwise, you will only be able to import the operational settings
of the configuration lines selected for import.

1. In the Multicam Setup window, press M to call the Import Configuration Lines
command.
2. The Import Configuration Files window opens:
◦ The left pane allows the selection of the folder containing the configuration files
to be imported.
◦ The right pane allows the selection of the configuration lines to be imported onto
the EVS server.

2. Multicam Setup 19
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3. On the left pane, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to highlight the folder
that contains the configuration file you want to import.
When the folder is selected, the right pane shows:
◦ a cross in front of the configuration lines that will be imported.
The lines are imported onto the same position and with the same name as in the
export file.
4. Press TAB to shift the focus to the right pane.
5. If requested, deselect lines you do not want to import:
◦ By default, all configuration lines present in the .lin file will be imported onto the
EVS server.
◦ To deselect a line, use the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to highlight the
requested line, and press SPACEBAR. The deselected lines turn light gray and
the cross is removed.
6. Press ENTER to validate the selection of configuration lines to import.
A warning message informs you about which configuration lines will be imported,
and tells the next screen will allow you to select which settings to replace.
7. Select 'Yes' using the RIGHT ARROW, and press ENTER.
8. In the Select settings to replace window, select the type of settings you want to
import for the selected configuration lines:
a. Press SPACEBAR to select or deselect a settings type.
b. Press TAB to move to the next settings type.
c. Repeat these steps for all settings types you want to import.
9. Press ENTER to start the import process.

20 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

In the Web-Based Interface

NOTE
In the web-based interface, it is only possible to import configuration lines one
by one.

To import configuration lines onto an EVS server in the web-based interface, proceed as
follows:
1. From the Multicam Setup window, click Import configuration lines in the Tools menu.
The Import configuration line window opens.

2. Click Select next to the top field and select the configuration file you want to import.
3. Tick the configuration line to be replaced on the EVS server.
4. Click Import.
The configuration line is imported with its original name onto the selected configuration
line on the EVS server.

2. Multicam Setup 21
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.2.6. Changing the Position of Configuration

Lines
In the Server-Based Application
To move a configuration line up in the list in the server-based application, proceed as
follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Do one of the following:
◦ To move the selected line up, press CTRL + UP ARROW.
◦ To move the selected line down, press CTRL + DOWN ARROW.

In the Web-Based Interface

The feature to move configuration lines up and down in the list of configuration lines is
not available as such in the web-based interface.
You can however use the import and export feature to change the position of lines in the
list of configuration lines.

22 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.2.7. Copying, Pasting and Deleting Configuration

Lines

How to Copy/Paste Configuration Lines

In the Server-Based Application

WARNING
Note that copying a line onto another position will overwrite the configuration
on the selected position.

To copy and paste a configuration line in the server-based application, proceed as

follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Press CTRL+C to copy the line to the clipboard.
3. With the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys, move to the position where you
want to copy the line.
4. Press CTRL + V to paste the line to the selected position.
5. Press ENTER to confirm that you agree to replace the former configuration line by
the one copied on the selected position.

In the Web-Based Interface

The feature to copy and paste configuration lines is not available as such in the web-
based interface.
You can however use the import and export feature to change the position of lines in the
list of configuration lines.

2. Multicam Setup 23
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

How to Delete Configuration Lines

WARNING
When you delete a configuration line, the line will automatically be deleted,
without prior warning message.

In the Server-Based Application

To delete a configuration line in the server-based application, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Press CTRL+DEL to delete the line.
The line is directly deleted.

In the Web-Based Interface

To delete a configuration line in the web-based interface, click the Delete icon next
to the configuration line you want to delete.
The configuration line is directly deleted.

2.3. Server Parameters

2.3.1. Chapter Contents

The table below presents the topics of this section and shows whether the described
features are available from the web-based interface and/or from the server-based
interface.

Server- Web-
Commands Page
Based Based

"Assigning a Server Facility Name" 2.3.2 Yes Yes

"Activating and Deactivating the Password 2.3.3 Yes No

Protection"

"Setting the Server PC LAN Connection" 2.3.4 Yes No

"Configuring a DNS Server Connection" 1 Yes No

"Setting the Server Date and Time" 2.3.6 Yes No

"Configuring Server RAIDs" 2.3.7 Yes No

24 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.3.2. Assigning a Server Facility Name

Introduction
You can assign a facility name to the EVS server. It allows the identification of the EVS
server with a dedicated name, besides the server's serial number. This name is
independent from any configuration.
The server facility name differs from the server net name, which can vary from a
configuration to the other as it is defined in the configuration parameters.
The server facility name is displayed in the title bar of the Multicam setup and
configuration windows, as well as on the OSD (on-screen display).

NOTE
Modifying the facility name requires the network service to be restarted. You
will have to wait some seconds to be able to connect again to the EVS server.

Naming Rules
The server facility name is also used as the hostname in the PC LAN settings. For this
reason, it has to comply with the following rules for hostname format:
• Characters should belong to the following character ranges: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, -
• Hostnames cannot start by a number or an hyphen <->
• Hostnames cannot finish by an hyphen <->
• Hostnames can be segmented with a full stop <.>

In the Server-Based Application

To assign a server facility name in the server-based application, proceed as follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, press F to call the Assign server facility name
command. A dialog box opens:

2. Type the server facility name and press ENTER.

If the server facility name, also used as hostname for the PC LAN connections, does not
comply with naming rules for hostnames, a warning will be displayed.
The facility name is directly assigned and displayed in the Title bar, as well as on the
OSD.

2. Multicam Setup 25
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

In the Web-Based Interface

To assign a server facility name in the web-based interface, proceed as follows:
1. From the Multicam Setup window, click Assign server facility name in the Tools
menu. A dialog box opens:

2. Type the server facility name and press OK.

If the server facility name, also used as hostname for the PC LAN connections, does not
comply with naming rules for hostnames, a warning will be displayed.
The facility name is directly assigned and displayed in the Title bar, as well as on the
OSD.

2.3.3. Activating and Deactivating the Password

Protection

Activating the Password on the EVS Server

Introduction
The administrator can protect the EVS server with a password. This password
protection prevents unauthorized users from changing configuration settings. It does not
prevent from using operational commands.
The password protection can only be activated and deactivated from the server-based
application.
The password protection has the following impact on the various user interfaces:
• The password is required to apply changes to configuration parameters in the
server-based application and in the web-based interface.
• On the Remote Panel, the Technical Setup menu is not available.

26 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

How to Activate the Password on the EVS Server

To activate a password on the EVS server, proceed as follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, press W to call the Enable password command. A
warning message opens.
2. Read the warning message carefully. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to select 'Yes'
and press ENTER to activate the password protection.
The password protection is directly active in all user interfaces, for all configuration
parameters on all configuration lines.

Enabling Changes to Configuration Parameters

In the Server-Based Application

When the password protection is active, the following message is displayed in red at the
top of each configuration tab in the Multicam Configuration window:

To enable changes in the configuration parameters during the session, you will be
prompted for the password the first time you save changes to configuration parameters
in a session.

In the Web-Based Interface

When the password protection is active, the Multicam Configuration window is
completely dimmed and a closed lock icon is displayed at the top of the window:
To enable changes in configuration parameters during the browser session, proceed as
follows:

1. Click the Lock icon .

2. Enter the password on the dialog box that is displayed.
3. Press OK.

The close lock icon changes to an open lock icon , and the parameters can be
modified and saved for the browser session.

2. Multicam Setup 27
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Deactivating the Password on the EVS Server

Once the password protection is active, it can only be deactivated from the server-based
application as follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, press W to call the Enable password command.
A message opens to warn you that you are about to remove the password
protection:

2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key to select 'Yes' and press ENTER
3. Type the password in the dialog box that opens, and press ENTER to validate:

The password protection is directly removed from all user interfaces.

2.3.4. Setting the Server PC LAN Connection

Introduction
The internal switch module of the H3XP board of an EVS server provides more features
on the PC LAN network. Thanks to the switch, the server can offer a redundancy on the
PC LAN and supports now the DHCP protocol.
You can define the Server PC LAN connection from the server-based application, in the
Tools area, via the Set LAN PC address and DNS option.
The following window shows the Set LAN PC address and DNS dialog box with the
redundancy set to ON and the DHCP to OFF:

28 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

NOTE
You can achieve PC LAN redundancy by configuring the switch with static
aggregation.

How to Set the PC LAN Connection

1. In the Multicam Setup window, press L to call the Set LAN PC address and DNS
command. A window such as the following one opens:

2. In this window, click TAB to select the Redundancy field, and press the Space bar
to enable or disable the redundancy.
When the redundancy is enabled, the PC LAN #2 will automatically take over in case
the PC LAN #1 fails.
3. Click TAB to select the DHCP field, and press the Space bar to enable the DHCP.
If the DHCP is enabled, a DCHP server installed on your setup will automatically
assign an IP address, subnet mask and default gateway to the PC LAN #1. Go to
step 5.
If the DHCP is disabled, you need to assign an IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway for the PC LAN #1. Go to step 4.
4. Click TAB to select the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway fields, and
type the requested values.
When the combination of IP address and subnet mask does not allow to reach the
default gateway, the following error message will be displayed:
'Default Gateway address not valid. It must be in the same subnet as the PC LAN.'
5. Press ENTER to apply the PC LAN configuration.
The PC LAN settings will automatically be applied to all configuration lines by default,
and they will be available as read-only fields in the definition of the configuration lines.
This is only configurable from the Multicam Setup module.

NOTE
The Hostname is not editable. As it needs to be the same as the facility
name, you can change it by editing the facility name via the Assign server
facility name option, also available in the Multicam Setup module. It has to
comply with the hostname format.

2. Multicam Setup 29
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.3.5. Configuring a DNS Server Connection

Introduction
A connection with a DNS server in the same PC LAN network can be configured.
You can define the DNS server connection from the server-based application, in the
Tools area, via the Set LAN PC address and DNS option.
The following window shows the Set LAN PC address and DNS dialog box:

How to Set the DNS Server Connection

1. In the Multicam Setup window, press L to call the Set LAN PC address and DNS
command. A window such as the following one opens:

2. Click TAB to select the Primary, Secondary and Domain fields, and type the
requested values.

NOTE
• If you leave the Primary or Domain field empty, and you press ENTER to
apply your changes, an error message will appear.
• You cannot enter a secondary DNS server IP address without entering a
primary one.
• For the search domain, you can use up to 24 characters.

30 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

3. Press ENTER to apply the DNS server configuration.

You can now switch to NMOS Unicast Mode. See section "Domain Name System
Settings" on page 192 for more information.

2.3.6. Setting the Server Date and Time

Introduction
The Set Date and Time command allows you to adjust the system time & date from the
Multicam Setup window in the server-based application. This is not available in the web-
based interface.

NOTE
When you have just launched a configuration, a window displaying the system
date and time gives you another opportunity to modify these parameters.

Supported Formats
The supported date format is DD-MM-YYYY, as shown in the example below:
• 15-03-2011 for March 15, 2011
The supported time format is hh:mm:ss, as shown in the example below
• 22:58:00 for 22 h 58 min 00 sec (24-hour display)
A warning message will inform you if the format you try to use is not valid.

How to Set the System Date and Time

To set up the system date and time from the Multicam Setup window, proceed as
follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, press T to call the System date and time command.
The following window opens:

2. In this window, type:

◦ the date in the DD/MM/YYYY format
◦ the time in the hh:mm:ss format (24-hour display)
using TAB to move from one field to the other.

2. Multicam Setup 31
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3. Press ENTER to apply the changes to the system date and time.
The date and time you have entered here will automatically be taken into account when
you launch a configuration.

2.3.7. Configuring Server RAIDs

Introduction
When the EVS server is started, the server raids are automatically detected, and built
based on the default settings described in the 'Default RAID Configuration' section
below.
You can view the default raid configuration and modify it from the RAID Configuration
window. This window is only available in the server-based application.

NOTE
Only hard disk drives from EVS can be used as they are specifically
configured to work with EVS video servers.

Overview on the RAID Configuration Window

The RAID Configuration window is available from the Multicam Setup window, when
pressing R to call the RAID Configuration command in the Tools menu.

The Requested Configuration area, in the upper part of the window, displays the default
raid configuration. You can modify the default raid configuration in this area. You will find
more information on editable parameters below.
The Current Configuration area, in the lower part of the RAID Configuration window,
provides raid and disk status information. This is dealt with in the section "RAID and Disk
Status Window" on page 362.

32 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Default RAID Configuration

At the first start, the software builds the raids using the following settings:
• If internal and external storage are detected, both are used.
• (5+1) RAID configuration is used (with a maximum of 5 spares) .
• First, all RAIDs are built. The remaining disks are used as spare disks. The
construction of RAIDs starts with internal arrays and carries on with external arrays.
A RAID can be created across several hardware arrays.

Requested RAID Configuration

Overview
In the Requested RAID Configuration, you can modify the following parameters in the
default raid configuration:
• Use of internal and/or external storage.
• Use of spare disks.
• Number of RAIDs to be used.
To modify one of these parameters, press TAB to select the requested field, and
SPACE BAR to select the requested value, or type the requested value.

Field Description
The following table describes the fields editable in the Requested Configuration area in
the RAID Configuration window. The fields are described in the sequence they appear.
You can select them using the TAB key.

Field Name Description

Storage type Specifies which storage type you will use. When both
storage types are available, the following values are
possible:
• Internal only
• External + Internal
• External only

Number of RAIDs Specifies the number of raids you want to use.

Type the number of raids you want to use.

RAID configuration Specifies the RAID configuration type.

type The software is able to handle two RAID organizations:
• (4+1): RAID of 6 disks with 1 spare disk
• (5+1): RAID of 6 disks without spare disk

2. Multicam Setup 33
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Current RAID Configuration

This area is used to display the raid status for the selected configuration when the EVS
server is running a configuration. See section "RAID and Disk Status Window" on page
362 for more information.

34 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.4. Licenses and Maintenance

2.4.1. Overview on Options Codes Management

Introduction
To run a software application and/or specific software options, not only the software
itself is required but also a license key (called 'license code' in Multicam), which is
unique for every option on every system.
This license keys can be temporary, be valid only until a defined deadline for
demonstration purposes, or be permanent with no time limit.
The license keys are managed from the Options codes management window. This
window is available in both the server-based application and the web-based interface.

NOTE
When a temporary license code will expire within the next two weeks or is
expired, the system warns the operator when the Multicam Setup window
opens.

Accessing the Options Codes Management Window

To open the Options codes management window in the server-based application, press
O from the Multicam Setup window.
To open the Option codes management window in the web-based interface, click
Options code management in the Tools menu from the Multicam Setup window.

2. Multicam Setup 35
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.4.2. Options Codes Management Window

In the Server-Based Application
The window features three areas which contain the information mentioned below:

Area Description

Upper area List of key settings related to the EVS server:

• System ID: ID code of the hardware key, necessary for license
code calculation.
• Serial number: Serial number of the mainframe, also written
on the back plate of the mainframe.
• User: The user name is a label for information's sake only.
• Chassis type: Type of mainframe. If this value is wrong, audio
and video routing inside the system will not work properly.
• PSU type: Type of PSU installed on the chassis: standard or
hot swap.
• Key date and time: Expiration date & time for temporary
license codes. Not available when the permanent codes are
installed.

Central area All codes available for the given server chassis.
Next to each code name, the code number, the type of license
(permanent, temporary, demo, or 'not granted'), as well as the
expiration date are mentioned.

Lower area Area where you can enter new license codes manually.
The commands on how to import new license code from files are
specified.

36 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

In the Web-Based Interface

The window features two areas which contain the information mentioned below:

Area Description

Central area All codes available for the given server chassis for which a
license key has been granted and is still valid.
Next to each code name, the code number is mentioned.

Lower area Area where you can enter new license codes manually or upload a
license code file.

2. Multicam Setup 37
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.4.3. Entering and Removing License Codes

Introduction
When you request new license codes to activate one or more features, you can receive
the license keys from EVS in the form of:
• a [Link] file (xxxxx = serial number of the server for which this file has been
calculated). You need to apply this file to the EVS server from the Option codes
management window.
• a license code that you can type in the Option codes management window.
Once the license codes have been entered, the corresponding options or features are
automatically active when you launch a configuration, without having to reboot the
server.

How to Enter License Codes from a COD File

In the Server-Based Application

To enter a new license code delivered via a COD file, proceed in one of the following
ways:
1. Copy the .COD file on a USB key that you connect to the USB port of the EVS
server.
2. From the Multicam Setup window, press O to open the Options codes management
window.
3. Press simultaneously ALT+ U keys.
OR
1. Copy manually the .COD file to the /mnt/apps/data/setup folder of the EVS
server (/setup folder when you connect to the EVS server using an FTP client).
2. In the Multicam Setup menu, press O to open the Options codes management
window.
3. Press simultaneously ALT+ F keys.
The license codes will be read from the .COD file and updated into the system. Next to
the line corresponding to the code, the license type, and the expiration date, if any, are
displayed.

38 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

In the Web-Based Interface

To enter a new license code delivered via a COD file, proceed as follows:
1. Copy the .COD file onto a drive available from your PC.
2. From the Multicam Setup window, click Options code management in the Tools
menu to open the Options code management window.
3. Click the Browse button, select the .COD file and click Open.
4. Click Submit.
The license codes will be read from the local file and updated into the system.
The lines corresponding to the new codes area added to the code list.

How to Enter License Codes with a Key Number

In the Server-Based Application

To enter a new license code delivered via a key number, proceed as follows:
1. From the Multicam Setup window, press O to open the Options codes management
window.
2. Type the code you have received. It will automatically be typed in the Validation
Code field:

3. Press ENTER.
Next to the line corresponding to the activated codes, the license type and the expiration
date (if any) are displayed.

In the Web-Based Interface

To enter a new license code delivered via a key number, proceed as follows:
1. From the Multicam Setup window, click Options code management in the Tools
menu to open the Options code management window.
2. Type the code number in the first field of the Add new code group box:

3. Click Submit.
The lines corresponding to the new codes are added to the code list.

2. Multicam Setup 39
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

How to Remove a License Code

You can remove a license code from the server-based application. Proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys to move inside the options list and
select the option to be removed.
2. When the option is selected (highlighted in white), press simultaneously CTRL+
DELETE on the keyboard.
3. Confirm the deletion of the option with ENTER.

2.5. Server Maintenance

2.5.1. Chapter Contents

The table below presents the topics of this section and shows whether the described
features are available from the web-based interface and/or from the server-based
interface.

Commands Page Server-Based Web-Based

"Rebooting the EVS Server" 40 Yes No

"Hardware Check" 41 Yes No

"Upgrading the Disk Firmware" 1 Yes No

"Clearing Video Disks" 44 Yes Yes

"Record Train Maintenance" 46 Yes No

"Importing and Exporting Keyword Files" 49 Yes No

"Exporting Log Files" 51 Yes No

2.5.2. Rebooting the EVS Server

To reboot the EVS server when it is not running in a given configuration, press B from
the Multicam Setup window, then RIGHT ARROW and ENTER to validate the action.
To reboot the EVS server when it is running in a given configuration, press ALT+Q when
you are in the Clip or Playlist page, then press ENTER to confirm the action.

40 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.5.3. Hardware Check

Disk Errors and Disconnection

Disconnection
When one disk of the video raid array has sustained errors, Multicam automatically
disconnects that disk and uses the parity disk to rebuild the missing data and provide the
video and audio data blocks to the application. The operator can thus continue working
normally and the message “!RAID” appears on all monitoring outputs.
A message is displayed each time a disk is disconnected:
• if the faulty disk is a spare disk:
"Warning: a spare disk has been disconnected. The system will
operate normally on the remaining disks.
At the next opportunity
please consider replacing the faulty disk. It can be identified
in the Shift-F5 screen or in the EVS - RAID configuration menu.
[Enter]=Continue"

• if the faulty disk is contained in a RAID:

"Warning: a disk has been disconnected. The system will operate
normally on the remaining disks. At the next opportunity
please consider replacing the faulty disk. It can be identified
in the Shift-F5 screen or in the EVS - RAID configuration menu.
[Enter]=Continue"

Exit
When exiting Multicam, a warning will appear to remind the operator that one disk was
disconnected, and invite him to perform a hardware check to repair the video raid. This
is displayed even if a spare disk is available:
• if the faulty disk is a spare disk:
"Warning: a spare disk has been disconnected. At the next
opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk. It can
be identified in the Shift-F5 screen or in the EVS - RAID
configuration menu. [Enter]=Continue"

• if the faulty disk is contained in a RAID:

"Warning: a disk has been disconnected. At the next opportunity
please consider replacing the faulty disk. It can be identified
in the Shift-F5 screen or in the EVS - RAID configuration menu.
[Enter]=Continue"

2. Multicam Setup 41
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Restarting
If Multicam is restarted without the RAID being rebuilt, a message similar to the following
one, and adapted to the disk type, is displayed during the bootwins:
• if a spare disk is OK:
[ Bad ] SEAGATE ST900MM0168 S401JQKR NE04 900GB 00 07 512
• if no spare disk is OK and the RAID is no more complete:
[ Bad ] SEAGATE ST900MM0168 S401JQKR NE04 900GB 00 07 512
WARNING !!! Tray XX is missing 1 disk(s) to be complete

Then when entering Multicam, another message appears, even if a spare disk is
available:
• if the faulty disk is a spare disk:
"Warning: a spare disk has been disconnected. The system will
operate normally on the remaining disks. At the next
opportunity please consider replacing the faulty disk. It can
be identified in the Shift-F5 screen or in the EVS - RAID
configuration menu. [Enter]=Continue"

• if the faulty disk is contained in a RAID:

"Warning: a disk has been disconnected. The system will operate
normally on the remaining disks. At the next opportunity please
consider replacing the faulty disk. It can be identified in the
Shift-F5 screen or in the EVS - RAID configuration menu.
[Enter]=Continue"

The operator can press ENTER and operate normally on 4 disks (configuration “4+1”) or
on 5 disks (configuration “5+1”) or exit the software and return to Multicam Setup
window to run a hardware check.

Rebuild Process

Introduction
The XT3 server is capable of performing a rebuild process of the RAID. This process
can happen either while the Multicam application is not running (offline process – rebuild
is faster) or while the Multicam application is running (online process – rebuild is slower).

Disconnection Process
As explained in the section "Disk Errors and Disconnection" on page 41, the software
will disconnect a disk that does not behave as expected.
Two options are available for the operator:

42 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

• Replace the disconnected disk and restart the server

◦ Start the Multicam application. The rebuild process will start automatically.
◦ Start a hardware check from the EVS menu and launch the rebuild. The process
starts offline. The operator can wait for the rebuild to be completed or cancel it
(that is to say postpone it) and start the Multicam application, in which case the
rebuild carries on in online mode.
• The operator can also force the disk to be reconnected by starting the rebuild
process in the hardware check. The process starts offline. The operator can wait for
the rebuild to be completed or cancel it and start the Multicam application, in which
case the rebuild carries on in online mode.

NOTE
If errors are detected during the rebuild process, a message appears after the
rebuild is complete to warn the operator, and the raid is not considered as
properly rebuilt. In this state, the system will keep working on 4 disks (4+1
configuration) or on 5 disks (5+1 configuration). If you want to run on 5, or 6,
disks again, you can try replacing the disk again and perform another rebuild,
or clear all clips.

If you don’t need to retrieve the clips or the record trains, you don’t need to rebuild the
RAID. In this case, select the 'Clear All Clips' answer when the message with this option
appears in the hardware check.
If you don’t rebuild the RAID array or if you don’t clear clips, the EVS server will keep
running on 4, or 5, disks only, and you will see a warning message appearing every time
you start or close the Multicam application. Normal operation can be achieved on 4, or 5,
disks, but then, if another disk fails, the system will hang and all video and audio data will
be definitively lost.

WARNING
By default, the online rebuild process takes up 10% of the disk bandwidth. If
you want to change this, contact EVS support.

2.5.4. Upgrading the Disk Firmware

This tool will allow you to check the firmware version of the disks of the internal disk
array and to upgrade if the version is not as expected.
In the Multicam Setup window, press U to start the upgrade procedure.
Once the upgrade procedure has finished, press ALT + Q to return to the Multicam
Setup window.

2. Multicam Setup 43
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

2.5.5. Clearing Video Disks

Introduction
The function Clearing Video Disks is used to delete media from the RAID disk array.
It is accessible in the Clear Video Disks dialog box you can open from the Multicam
Setup window:

Depending on the option you select in the Clear Video Disks dialog box, you will delete:
• the clips and record trains on all video disks (Clear video disks)
• the record trains only (Clear only record trains)

When and What for is a Clear Action Required?

NOTE
When a clear action is required, the operator will get a warning in Multicam.

The table below lists when you have to perform a clear action, and which clear action
you need to perform in the given situation:

Clearing action required when: Clear Action

General Maintenance Decision On request

Record Train Maintenance Clear Record Trains

(See section "Record Train Maintenance" on page 46)

Change in the multi-essence configuration from Intra + Clear Record Trains

Proxy to Intra only

Upgrade from Multicam 14.X or 15.X Clear Video Disks

to Multicam 16.X.
This will be requested the first time the EVS server will
boot after the upgrade.

Downgrade from Multicam 16.00 to an appropriate Clear Video Disks

maintenance version of Multicam 15.X or 14.X
This will be requested the first time the EVS server will
boot after the downgrade.

44 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

How to Clear Clips and/or Trains in the Server-Based

Application
To clear video disks in the server-based application, proceed as follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, press C to call the Clear Video Disks command.
2. Select one of the available options and press ENTER.
A confirmation message is displayed.
3. Press RIGHT ARROW, and ENTER to select Yes and validate the deletion.
OR
Press ENTER to cancel the deletion.

NOTE
After a Clear Video Disks action, the command toggles to Undo Clear Video
Disks At Next Start as long as your server has not been rebooted after the
Clear Video Disks command. This allows you to cancel the Clear Video
Disks request.

How to Clear Clips/Trains in the Web-Based Interface

To clear video disks in the web-based interface, proceed as follows:
1. In the Multicam Setup window, click the Clear video disks command from the
Tools area to open the Clear Video Disks window.
2. Select one of the available options and press OK.
A confirmation message is displayed.
3. Click Yes to validate the deletion or No to cancel the deletion.

2.5.6. Overview on the Hardware Check

Purpose
During the hardware check, the following actions are performed:
• Retrieving and checking relevant information related to the various boards installed
on the EVS server
• Verifying the validity of the data recorded on the video disk array
The hardware check is only available in the server-based application.

Tip
Hardware check is also used to rebuild the video and audio information after
replacing a faulty disk.

2. Multicam Setup 45
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Process
The hardware check runs the same steps and checks as the server boot process :
• MTPC check
• H3XP check
• Video Codec check
• GbE download
• Disk check
• Data loading
After you have launched the hardware check by pressing H in the Multicam Setup
window, the system automatically starts the test process.
One after the other, the various steps are displayed in the BOOT.H3X window. The test
process is completed when the H3XP board is initialized.
At the end of the hardware check, the hardware revisions information is displayed. The
information is logged in the [Link].

2.5.7. Record Train Maintenance

Introduction
A Clear Record Train can be necessary in one of the following situations:
• To prevent the overflow of the record trains field counter.
• To align the current block size used in the internal cache for each record train with
the optimal block size calculated for a configuration.

Preventing the Overflow of the Record Trains Field

Counter

Introduction
The record train uses a counter to identify each field being encoded in the server. This
counter will overflow after 2 years and 8 months at 50 Hz or 2 years and 3 months at
59.94 Hz when the server is in continuous use.
When the field counter reaches its limit, the recorder and the player stop. It is possible to
close the current file and start a new one without the need to clear the video disks (as
required in earlier versions of Multicam), nor to exit Multicam.

46 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

How to Reset the Field Counter

You can reset the field counter from the Multicam Setup window, or from the Multicam
Configuration window:
To reset the counter from the Multicam Setup window, proceed as follows:
1. Go to the Clear video disk dialog box.
2. Select Clear only record trains.
See section "Clearing Video Disks" on page 44
To reset the counter from the Multicam Configuration window, proceed as follows:
1. In the VGA, press SHIFT+F5 to open the Server Monitoring window.
2. In the General Information page (page 1), select the Reset record train
command.
See section "General Information Window" on page 360

Impacts of the Field Counter Maintenance

During the field counter maintenance:
• The players that are using content from local clips are not be disturbed.
• The players that are using content from a remote (XNet) server are not disturbed.
• Playing out a record train of the server in field counter maintenance on a remote
server will impact the playout.
After performing the field counter maintenance:
• All the trains are erased, but neither the clips nor the playlists are erased.
• Multicam restarts the recorders that were running before the maintenance operation.
• Multicam restarts the players that were running before the maintenance operation.
The record train used by each player remains unchanged.

Automatic Advance Warning

As the recorders and the players will stop if the field counter reaches its limit, warnings
are automatically issued in advance:
• A message is displayed on the VGA 12 weeks before the counter overflow, then
weekly from 8 to 4 weeks before the counter overflow.
• From 4 weeks to the day before the counter overflow, the message on the VGA is
displayed daily, and the !Rec warning is displayed on all PGM OSD screens.
• On the last day, the OSD warning flashes.

2. Multicam Setup 47
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Field Counter Overflow

When the field counter reaches the overflow:
• Multicam stops the recorders and the players.
• Multicam issues error messages on the VGA, the OSD, and the LSM.
• The operator is still allowed to browse and make clips with all the content available
on the disks.

Align the Current Block Size with the Optimal Block Size

Introduction
The internal cache of the XT3 Server server supports different block sizes (8MB, 16MB)
for the intra codec record trains. This makes it possible to use larger block sizes when
operating with high-bitrate configurations (e.g. UHD-4K, UDH-8K, high SLSM) and
results in an improvement of the server performance.
For each configuration, the optimal block size is calculated. When starting a
configuration, the block size currently used in the internal cache for each record train is
compared with this optimal block size.
If the optimal and currently used block size are not identical, you will be alerted, and you
might have to clear all record trains.

Optimal Block Size Calculation

For each record train the optimal block size to be used in the cache is calculated based
on the following parameters:
• Bitrate of the intra codec
• Number of phases
• Framerate
• Maximum block size
See section 'Optimal Block Size' in the server's Technical Reference Manual for the
optimal block size per intra codec.

Performing a Clear Record Trains

When starting a configuration, the block size currently used in the internal cache for
each record train is compared with the calculated optimal block size for the
configuration.
If the current and optimal block size are:
• identical for all record trains, then the configuration is started without any additional
messages.
• not identical for all record trains, the following two cases can be distinguished:
◦ The current block size used for one or more record trains is 8MB. A bigger block
size, i.e. 16MB, is recommended.

48 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following message will appear:

'A block size of 16MB is recommended which requires a Clear Record Trains.
Do you want to continue anyway with a block size of 8 MB?'
You will have the choice to start the configuration with the current (non-optimal)
block size, or to perform a Clear Record Trains first and then start the
configuration with the recommended block size.
◦ The current block size is smaller than the recommended block size. A bigger
block size is mandatory.
The following message will appear:
'Clearing record trains is mandatory because this configuration requires a new
block size (16 MB -> 8 MB).'
You will have no other option but to perform a Clear Record Trains first and then
start the configuration with the recommended block size.

Example
Consider the situation where the current block size of the internal cache is 8MB.
Start the following configurations:
• DNxHD 242Mbps, 1080p @50Hz no SLMS
The current block size is big enough and can be kept. No Clear Record Trains is
required.
• DNxHD 242Mbps, 1080p @50Hz SLSM2x
The recommended block size is 16MB, but the current block size can be kept. You
will have the choice to perform a Clear Record Trains and start the configuration with
the recommended block size, or to continue with the non-optimal current block size.
• DNxHD 242Mbps, 1080p @50Hz SLSM3x
The recommended block size is 16MB. A Clear Record Trains is required. The
configuration is started with the recommended block size.

2.5.8. Importing and Exporting Keyword Files

Introduction
The keyword file is a simple text file with a name of 8 characters and a .KWD extension.
All keyword files must be stored in the /mnt/apps/data/kwd folder of the EVS server
(/kwd folder when you connect to the EVS server using an FTP client). A sample
keyword file ([Link]) is provided by EVS when Multicam is installed.
You can also import and export keyword files to and from the EVS server via a USB key.
You can only perform this action in the server-based application.

2. Multicam Setup 49
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

How to Import a Keyword File

To import a keyword file, proceed as follows:
1. Save the keyword file you want to import on a USB key, and plug it into the USB port
of the EVS server as the Multicam Setup window is open.
2. In the Multicam Setup window, press K to call the Import/export keyword file
command.
The following dialog box opens:

3. If several keyword files are stored on the USB key, press SPACEBAR until the
requested file is selected on the left field.
4. Press ENTER to import the keyword file from the USB key to the EVS server.
5. Press OK to close the message box that appears when the keyword file has been
imported.
6. Remove the USB key.

How to Export a Keyword File

To export a keyword file, proceed as follows:
1. Plug a USB key into the USB port of the EVS server as the Multicam Setup window
is open.
2. In the Multicam Setup window, press K to call the Import/export keyword file
command.
The following dialog box opens:

3. Press ENTER to export the keyword file from the EVS server to the USB key.
4. Press OK to close the message box that appears when the keyword file has been
exported.
5. Remove the USB key.

50 2. Multicam Setup
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

2.5.9. Exporting Log Files

When the EVS support team requests the log files to investigate an issue, you can
export the log files to a plugged-in USB key by pressing the X shortcut key from the
Multicam Setup window.
When you call the Export log file command, a .zip file is created on the root folder the
USB key. It contains:
• all files and folders located on /mnt/apps/data folder of the EVS server (root
folder when you connect to the EVS server using an FTP client).
• an Excel spreadsheet that contains the definition of your configuration lines
After the export action, a message box asks you whether you want to delete the logs on
the EVS server. If you answer Yes, the content of the folders /mnt/apps/data/log
(/log folder via FTP) and /mnt/apps/data/dump (/dump folder via FTP) are
deleted.
You can also export log files from XNet Monitor. For more information, refer to the XNet
Monitor user manual.

2. Multicam Setup 51
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3. Supported Configurations

3.1. General Principles

3.1.1. About Supported Configurations

Generalities
On the Multicam web homepage of the EVS server ([Link] IP Address>),
a QR code allows you to download the EVS Server Configuration application from
Google Play or the App store.
This will help you define the desired configuration and display how the video connectors
should be cabled.
The XT3 server supports the following configuration types:
• SD/HD standard and SLSM configurations
• 3D standard and SLSM configurations
• 1080p standard and SLSM configurations
• UHD-4K standard and SLSM configurations
The following configurations are available with the XT3 4U server:
• 4-Channel mode without license code
• XRec mode (7-Channel) with license code 30
• ChannelMax mode with license code 34
for 8-channel configurations (and including all less extended configurations).
The following configurations are available with the XT3 6U server:
• 6-Channel mode without license code
including 4- and 6-channel configurations
• XRec mode (8-Channel) with license code 30
• ChannelMax mode with license code 34 (or
ChannelMax Spotbox mode with license code 35)
including 10- and 12-channel configurations (and all less extended configurations)
See section "About Extended Configurations" on page 54 for more information about the
extended configurations, that means configurations using more than 6 channels on an
6U server and more than 4 channels on a 4U server.

52 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Requirements and Limitations

• The Mix on one channel for play channels is available on all SD/HD configurations,
except when the Dual Play feature is used.

3.1.2. About Record and Play Channels

Number of Record and Play Channels

The number of record and play channels for a given configuration is defined in the
Channels tab, in the Base settings. See section "Base Settings" on page 196.
The number of play and record channels available may differ depending on the chassis,
on the installed license codes, and on the configurations running on the XT3 server:
• Multicam LSM mode, when the EVS server is controlled by the Remote Panel.
• Spotbox or Server modes, when the EVS server is controlled by the industry-
standard protocols.
The following table shows the minimum and maximum number of channels that can be
operated in both modes:

6U 4U

LSM Spotbox LSM Spotbox

Max. # 12 12 8 8
channels

Min. # REC 1 0 1 0

Max. # REC 10 12 6 8

Min. # PLAY 1 0 1 0

Max. # PLAY 6 6 6 6

NOTE
Based on the above-mentioned limitations, among others, some
configurations described in the section Supported Configurations are only
available in Server/Spotbox mode or in Multicam LSM and XSense mode.

3. Supported Configurations 53
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Clip and Record Train Compatibility

• Clips are compatible across all Multicam configurations including SLSM clips.
• Record trains are also compatible as long as the number of record channels
(cameras) is not increased in LSM and XSense mode.
Example
◦ 2 REC ==> 4 REC: Record trains are lost.
◦ 6 REC ==> 4 REC: Record trains are kept.
• Record trains are always kept in Spotbox mode, even when the number of record
trains is increased.

Enhanced Playout Mode

On EVS servers running an intra-frame codec, both decoders of a V3X codec module
can be used in specific conditions to increase the decoding performances during a
replay. This enhanced playout mode can be enabled per channel.
When the enhanced playout mode is enabled, it is effectively used when the video is
played out faster than the standard speed (100% with a standard recorder, 50% in
SLSM 2x, 33% in SLSM 3x, ...).
The enhanced playout mode is automatically enabled when all conditions below are
fulfilled:
• The EVS server is running a frame-based codec (AVC-Intra, XAVC-Intra, MPEG2-
Intra or DVCPro).
• The Mix on One Channel functionality is available with the selected configuration.
• The Mix on One Channel parameter for the related play channel is disabled in the
Channels tab, Mix on One Channel settings.

NOTE
As a consequence, the enhanced playout mode is not available with Dual
Play configurations.

3.1.3. About Extended Configurations

Definition
Extended configurations are configurations included into the 8-Channel (XRec) and
ChannelMax modes (4U), or the 8-channel and ChannelMax modes (6U) which use the
secondary links of the V3X modules for independent recorders.
From Multicam 15.2, the license code corresponding to the 8-channel mode (former
XRec mode).

54 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

A server with the ChannelMax license can run all non-extended (up to 6 channels) and
the extended configurations from the 8-Channel mode.
A server with the 8-Channel mode license (former XRec) can run all non-extended
configurations.
On the XT3 servers, we will keep using the XRec name as this is closely tied to this EVS
server.

Requirements
The 8-Channel mode (former XRec mode) on an XT3 6U server 6-channel mode on an
XT3 4U server requires:
• the license code 30
The ChannelMax mode requires:
• the license code 34 in Multicam LSM mode and 35 in Spotbox mode (ChannelMax
code);
• H3XP, A3X and HS-873 board boards to be fitted on a 6U server;
• A3X to be fitted on a 4U server.

3.1.4. Channel Assignment Principles

General Principles
The following general principles apply to all configurations on the XT3 server:
• The connectors within a codec module are only able to work in play or record mode.
• The play channels (OUT connectors) are always assigned from the left to the right:

• The record channels (IN connectors) are always assigned from the right to the left.

3. Supported Configurations 55
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

1. The primary links of the V3X boards mentioned in the tables of this chapter
correspond to the upper connectors of a codec module.
◦ J8 for IN connectors
◦ J7 for OUT connectors (J6 is also equivalent to J7)

2. The secondary links of the V3X boards mentioned in the tables of this chapter
correspond to the middle connectors of a codec module:
◦ J5 for IN connectors
◦ J3 for OUT connectors

56 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Cabling Principles for 8-Channel Mode

In 8-Channel mode, the configurations should be cabled in the following sequence:
1. Cable the play channels from left to right.
2. Cable the record channels from right to left starting with the primary links, without
using the left codec modules already cabled as play channels.
3. Cable the remaining record channels starting from right to left, and using the
secondary link of the remaining codec modules.

Cabling Principles for ChannelMax Mode

In ChannelMax mode, the following principle applies in addition to the above-mentioned
principles:
• The number of codec modules used for play channels will be kept as low as possible
to allow the maximum bandwidth to the record channels.

Standard and SLSM Dual Configurations

The standard and SLSM (Dual) configurations should be cabled in the following
sequence:
1. Cable the record channels from right to left:
◦ Cable the first half of the record channels on the primary links.
◦ Cable the remaining record channels on the secondary link of the codec
modules whose primary link you have just cabled.
2. Cable the play channels from left to right:
◦ Cable the first half of the play channels on the primary links.
◦ Cable the remaining play channels on the secondary link of the codec modules
whose primary link you have just cabled.

SLSM 3G Configurations
The SLSM 3G configurations should be cabled in the following sequence:
1. Cable the 3G-SDI connectors on the IN A links of the recorder channels from right to
left.
2. Cable the record channels from right to left:
◦ Cable the first half of the remaining record channels on the primary links.
◦ Cable the remaining record channels on the secondary link of the codec
modules whose primary link you have just cabled.
3. Cable the play channels from left to right:
◦ Cable the first half of the play channels on the primary links.
◦ Cable the remaining play channels on the secondary link of the codec modules
whose primary link you have just cabled.

3. Supported Configurations 57
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.2. SD and HD Standard Configurations

3.2.1. SD/HD Configurations (4U)

Introduction
The tables below show the available SD/HD configurations with an XT3 4U server as
well as how the BNC connectors should be cabled.
The configurations in 7-channel mode make use of the secondary channel of the codec
module as an independent record channel. See section "About Extended
Configurations" on page 54.

NOTE
When the option 'mix on one channel' is activated on a play channel
(Channels tab, page 7), the secondary link of the codec module (J3 on V3X
board) of the play channel is used to play transition effects.

WARNING
The HD base configurations without any recorder or player are only supported
in Spotbox and Server modes.

58 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Configurations in 4-Channel Mode

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.

#IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

1 0 IN1

2 0 IN2 IN1

3 0 IN3 IN2 IN1

4 0 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1

1 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1

1 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN1

2 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2 IN1

2 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN2 IN1

3 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN3 IN2 IN1

0 1 OUT1 MIX1

0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2

0 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3

0 4 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4

Example in 4-Channel Mode (3REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a standard 3REC
1PLAY configuration need to be cabled as shown below:

3. Supported Configurations 59
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Configurations in XRec Mode

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.

#REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

0 6 PLAY1 PLAY5 PLAY2 PLAY6 PLAY3 PLAY4

2 3 PLAY1 MIX1 PLAY2 MIX2 PLAY3 MIX3 REC1 REC2

2 4 PLAY1 PLAY4 PLAY2 PLAY3 REC1 REC2

3 2 PLAY1 MIX1 PLAY2 MIX2 REC2 REC1 REC3

3 3 PLAY1 PLAY3 PLAY2 REC2 REC1 REC3

4 1 PLAY1 MIX1 REC3 REC2 REC1 REC4

4 2 PLAY1 MIX1 PLAY2 MIX2 REC2 REC4 REC1 REC3

4 3 PLAY1 PLAY3 PLAY2 REC2 REC4 REC1 REC3

5 1 PLAY1 MIX1 REC3 REC2 REC5 REC1 REC4

6 0 REC4 REC3 REC2 REC6 REC1 REC5

6 1 PLAY1 MIX1 REC3 REC6 REC2 REC5 REC1 REC4

Example in 6-Channel (XREC) Mode (6REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 6REC 1PLAY
configuration need to be cabled as shown below:

60 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Configurations in ChannelMax Mode

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.

#REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

8 0 REC4 REC8 REC3 REC7 REC2 REC6 REC1 REC5

6 2 PLAY1 PLAY2 REC3 REC6 REC2 REC5 REC1 REC4

4 4 PLAY1 PLAY3 PLAY2 PLAY4 REC2 REC4 REC1 REC3

2 6 PLAY1 PLAY4 PLAY2 PLAY5 PLAY3 PLAY6 REC1 REC2

NOTE
On Dual Play configurations 6 IN - 2 OUT, 4 IN - 4 OUT (two independent play
channels assigned to both links of a codec module), the standard mix feature,
via the PGM/PRV mode, is only available on the 1st link of the codec module
1 (in 6 IN - 2 OUT) and on the 1st and 2nd links of the codec module 1 (in 4 IN
-
4 OUT).

Example in ChannelMax Mode (4REC + 4PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 4REC 4PLAY
configuration need to be cabled as shown below:

3. Supported Configurations 61
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.2.2. SD/HD Configurations (6U)

Introduction
The tables below show the available SD/HD configurations with an XT3 6U server, as
well as how the BNC connectors should be cabled.
The configurations in 8-Channel or ChannelMax mode make use of the secondary
channel of the codec module on the V3X board as an independent record channel. See
section "About Extended Configurations" on page 54.

NOTE
When the option 'mix on one channel' is activated on a play channel
(Channels tab, page 7), the secondary link of the codec module (J3 on V3X
board) of the play channel is used to play transition effects.

WARNING
The HD base configurations without any recorder or player are only supported
in Spotbox and Server modes. They are preceded by Sp in the configuration
tables.

Configurations in 6-Channel Mode

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
IN OUT Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

Sp 1 0 IN1

Sp 2 0 IN2 IN1

Sp 3 0 IN3 IN2 IN1

Sp 4 0 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

Sp 5 0 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

Sp 6 0 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1

1 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1

1 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN1

1 4 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 IN1

1 5 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 PLAY5 MIX5 IN1

2 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2 IN1

62 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
IN OUT Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

2 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN2 IN1

2 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN2 IN1

2 4 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 IN2 IN1

3 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN3 IN2 IN1

3 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN3 IN2 IN1

3 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN3 IN2 IN1

4 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

4 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

5 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1

Sp 0 1 OUT1 MIX1

Sp 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2

Sp 0 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3

Sp 0 4 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4

Sp 0 5 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 OUT5 MIX5

Sp 0 6 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 OUT5 MIX5 OUT6 MIX6

The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox and Server modes.

Example in 6-Channel Mode (4IN + 2OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a standard 4IN 2OUT
configuration need to be cabled as shown below:

3. Supported Configurations 63
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Configurations in 8-Channel Mode

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
IN OUT Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

2 5 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 OUT5 MIX5 IN1 IN2

2 6 OUT1 OUT6 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 IN1 IN6

3 4 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 IN2 IN1 IN3

4 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN4

4 4 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 OUT4 MIX4 IN2 IN4 IN1 IN3

5 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN5

5 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN3 IN2 IN5 IN1 IN4

6 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN6

6 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN6 IN1 IN5

Sp 8 0 IN6 IN5 IN4 IN3 IN2 IN8 IN1 IN7

The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox and Server modes.

Example in 8-Channel Mode (4IN + 4OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 4IN
4OUT configuration need to be cabled as shown below:

64 3. Supported Configurations
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Configurations in ChannelMax Mode

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
IN OUT Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

6 3 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 OUT3 MIX3 IN3 IN6 IN2 IN5 IN1 IN4

6 4 OUT1 OUT4 OUT2 OUT3 IN3 IN4 IN2 IN5 IN1 IN4

2LSM 6 6 OUT1 OUT4 OUT2 OUT5 OUT3 OUT6 IN3 IN6 IN2 IN5 IN1 IN4

8 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN4 IN8 IN3 IN7 IN2 IN6 IN1 IN5

2LSM 8 4 OUT1 OUT3 OUT2 OUT4 IN4 IN8 IN3 IN7 IN2 IN6 IN1 IN5

10 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN5 IN10 IN4 IN9 IN3 IN8 IN2 IN7 IN1 IN6

10 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN5 IN10 IN4 IN9 IN3 IN8 IN2 IN7 IN1 IN6

Sp 12 0 IN6 IN12 IN5 IN11 IN4 IN10 IN3 IN9 IN2 IN8 IN1 IN7

The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox mode with the license
code 35 (Channels Max Spotbox).
The configurations preceded by 2LSM are also available in Dual LSM mode with the
license code 116.

NOTE
On Dual Play configurations 10 IN - 2 OUT, 8 IN - 4 OUT, 6 IN - 6 OUT (two
independent play channels assigned to both links of a codec module), the
standard mix feature, via the PGM/PRV mode, is only available on the 1st link
of the codec module 1 (in 10 IN - 2 OUT) and on the 1st and 2nd links of the
codec module 1 (in 8 IN - 4 OUT and 6 IN - 6 OUT).

Example in ChannelMax Mode (10IN + 2OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 10IN 2OUT
configuration need to be cabled as shown below:

3. Supported Configurations 65
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.3. SLSM Configurations

3.3.1. General Information on Supermotion

Configurations

Concepts
The Supermotion cameras are 2-phase to 16-phase cameras, that record the
incoming feeds at a frame rate 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 16 times higher than a standard
camera.
The Hypermotion cameras should clearly be distinguished from the supermotion
cameras in two respects:
• The A/V material from the supermotion cameras is continuously fed into the EVS
server, whereas the A/V material from the hypermotion cameras is recorded on the
camera buffer, and then ingested into the EVS server when the operator sends a
play command to the hypermotion camera.
• The A/V material from supermotion cameras is ingested into the EVS server through
one physical record channel per phase, whereas the A/V material from the
hypermotion camera is ingested into the EVS server through one physical record
channel.
See section "Hypermotion Management" on page 349 for more information on the
configuration related to hypermotion cameras.

Introduction
The feeds from supermotion cameras can directly be ingested into EVS servers.
For all supermotion cameras with even or uneven phases, you can use a standard
connection where each cable transports one phase.
For supermotion cameras with even phases (2x, 4x, 6x, etc.), you can use a 3G-SDI
connection where a single cable transports two phases.
If your configuration accounts for up to 12 phases, you use the full bandwidth of the
channels. The camera's number of phases directly determines the number of physical
record channels used on the EVS server:
• A two-phase camera will use two physical record channels (primary or secondary
channel with V3X), a three-phase camera will use three physical record channels,
and so on.
If your configuration accounts for more than 12 phases, the bandwidth of the channels is
limited. This is only possible with 3G-SDI connectors:
• The two phases transported by the 3G-SDI connector use only a single physical
record channel (primary or secondary channel).

66
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Requirements

SLSM 2x-3x-4x-6x-8x-10x Configurations

The SLSM configurations are valid when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• The license code 110 (Super Motion) is valid.
• The base configuration is Multicam LSM.

NOTE
The SLSM 6x and 10x configurations are also supported with the license code
26 (Umotion Only).

3G SLSM 2x-4x-6x-8x-16x Configurations

These configurations are valid when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• The license code 110 (Super Motion) is valid.
• The base configuration is Multicam LSM.
• The parameter Interface is set to No.

NOTE
The 3G SLSM configurations are managed via the On 3G-SDI parameter in
the SLSM settings, not via the Interface setting. As the EVS server is
operated in HD, this allows the connection of both a standard HD camera and
a 3G SLSM camera at the same time.

67
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Availability Depending on Codecs

A cross is displayed in the table below when a given SLSM configuration is available
with the specified codec in 720p or 1080i.

HD codecs

All SD AVC-
SLSM Mjpeg
codecs DVCPro Mpeg-2 Avid Apple Intra /
Standard
HD Intra DNxHD® ProRes XAVC-
/ EVS
Intra HD

2x X X X X X X X

3x X X X X X X X

6x X X X X X X X

8x X X X - X X X

10x - - X - X X -
(No 3G)

16x X - - - X - -
(3G
only)

Limitations

Limitations on Bitrates
Limitations apply on bitrates with some codecs with configurations SLSM 6x and higher.
For more details about these limitations, refer to the section "Bitrates for SLSM
Configurations in HD 720p/1080i" on page 186.

Limitations in SLSM 3G with Extended Configurations

3G configurations using 4 phases per codec module are only available with the following
limitations:
• with codec limitations (see table above)
• with a max. bitrate of 120 Mbps in 50Hz and 130 Mbps in 60 Hz in SLSM 8x.
• with a max. bitrate of 100 Mbps in 50Hz and 60 Hz in SLSM 16x.

68
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Enhanced Playout Mode

On EVS servers running an intra-frame codec, both channels of a V3X codec module
can be used in specific conditions to increase the decoding performances during a
replay. This enhanced playout mode is configurable per channel and is available in
SLSM configurations.
The way to enable and use the enhanced playout mode is described in more details in
the section "Enhanced Playout Mode" on page 54.

3.3.2. SLSM Configurations (4U)

Introduction

SLSM Principles
This section details the available multi-phase SLSM configurations on XT3 4U servers.
In SLSM configurations, a supermotion recorder of a two-, three-, four- or six-phase
camera accounts for one logical channel, but corresponds respectively to two, three,
four or six physical channels.
In 3G SLSM configurations, a supermotion recorder of a two- or six-phase camera
accounts for one logical channel. On the rear panel, it uses respectively one or three
connector(s), and is cabled on the primary connector of the codec module. On the V3X
board, it uses both primary and secondary channels of that codec module.

About Tables and Examples

This chapter presents the available SLSM configurations with an XT3 4U server, as well
as some examples of connections on the rear panel.
The tables and examples reflect how the BNC connectors should be cabled on the rear
panel for the given configuration.
The configurations in 7-channel mode make use of the secondary channel of the codec
module on the V3X board as an independent record channel. This is available in given
conditions. See also the section "About Extended Configurations" on page 54.

Note
For SLSM configurations in 1080p and 3D configurations, refer to sections
"Channel Assignment Principles with 3D SLSM" on page 118 and "Channel
Assignment Principles with 1080p SLSM" on page 132.

69
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 2-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
4U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
IN OUT Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 1 0 IN2 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 2 0 IN3 IN2 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2 IN1,2 IN1,1

2 0 0 IN2,2 IN2,1 IN1,2 IN1,1

XRec Mode
1 2 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1,2 IN3 IN1,1 IN2

2 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1,2 IN2,2 IN1,1 IN2,1

3 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2,1 IN3,2 IN1,2 IN3,1 IN1,1 IN2,2

ChannelMax Mode
1 2 4 OUT1 OUT3 OUT2 OUT4 IN1,2 IN3 IN1,1 IN2

1 4 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN2 IN5 IN1,2 IN4 IN1,1 IN3

2 0 4 OUT1 OUT3 OUT2 OUT4 IN1,2 IN2,2 IN1,1 IN2,1

2 2 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN2,1 IN4 IN1,2 IN3 IN1,1 IN2,2

3 0 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN2,1 IN3,2 IN1,2 IN3,1 IN1,1 IN2,2

70
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 4-Channel Mode (1IN SLSM 2PH + 2OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 2PH + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in XRec Mode (3IN SLSM 2PH + 1OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 3IN SLSM 2PH + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1IN SLSM 2PH + 4IN +

2OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 2PH + 4IN + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below.

71
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

72
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SLSM 2-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 4U server.
Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 IN1,
1-2

1 1 0 IN2 IN1,
1-2

1 2 0 IN3 IN2 IN1,

1-2

1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,

1-2

1 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1,

1-2

1 1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2 IN1,

1-2

2 0 0 IN2, IN1,
1-2 1-2

XRec Mode
1 1 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN2 IN1,
1-2

1 2 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN3 IN2 IN1,

1-2

2 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2

2 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2

2 1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN3 IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2

3 0 0 IN3, IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2 1-2

3 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN3, IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2 1-2

ChannelMax Mode
1 2 4 OUT1 OUT3 OUT2 OUT4 IN2 IN3 IN1,
1-2

73
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 4 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN3 IN5 IN2 IN4 IN1,

1-2

2 0 4 OUT1 OUT3 OUT2 OUT4 IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2

2 2 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN3 IN4 IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2

3 0 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN3, IN2, IN1,

1-2 1-2 1-2

Example in 4-Channel Mode (1IN 3G SLSM 2PH + 1IN +

1OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3G SLSM
configuration with 1IN 3G SLSM 2PH + 1IN + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

74
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in XRec Mode (3IN 3G SLSM 2PH + 1OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3G SLSM
configuration with 3IN 3G SLSM 2PH + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1IN SLSM 2PH + 4IN +

2OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3G SLSM
configuration with 1IN SLSM 2PH + 4IN + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below.

75
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 3-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 3 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
4U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
# Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #PLAY
OUT Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 IN1,3 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 1 0 IN2 IN1,3 IN1,2 IN1,1

1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,3 IN1,2 IN1,1

XRec Mode
1 1 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1,2 IN2 IN1,1 IN1,3

1 3 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,3 IN4 IN1,2 IN3 IN1,1 IN2

2 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,3 IN2,3 IN1,2 IN2,2 IN1,1 IN2,1

ChannelMax Mode
1 1 4 OUT1 OUT3 OUT2 OUT4 IN1,2 IN2 IN1,1 IN1,3

1 3 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN1,3 IN4 IN1,2 IN3 IN1,1 IN2

2 0 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN1,3 IN2,3 IN1,2 IN2,2 IN1,1 IN2,1

Example in XRec Mode (1IN SLSM 3PH + 3IN + 1OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 3PH + 3IN + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below:

76
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in ChannelMax Mode (2IN SLSM 3PH + 2OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 2IN SLSM 3PH + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below:

SLSM 4-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 4 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
4U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
4x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 IN1,4 IN1,3 IN1,2 IN1,1

XRec Mode
1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,3 IN1,2 IN1,1 IN1,4

1 1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,3 IN1,2 IN2 IN1,1 IN1,4

1 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1,2 IN1,4 IN1,1 IN1,3

ChannelMax Mode
1 2 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN1,3 IN3 IN1,2 IN2 IN1,1 IN1,4

77
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in XRec Mode (1IN SLSM 4PH + 1OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 4PH + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1IN SLSM 4PH + 2IN +

2OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 4PH + 2IN + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below:

78
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SLSM 4-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 4 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 4U server.
Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
4x

XRec Mode
1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1 IN1
3-4 1-2

1 1 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN2 IN1 IN1

3-4 1-2

1 0 2 OUT1 MIX1 OUT2 MIX2 IN1 IN1

3-4 1-2

ChannelMax Mode
1 2 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN2 IN3 IN1 IN1
3-4 1-2

Example in XRec Mode (1IN 3G SLSM 4PH + 1 IN +

1OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1IN 3G SLSM 4PH + 1IN + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

79
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1IN 3G SLSM 4PH + 2IN +

2OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1IN 3G SLSM 4PH + 2IN + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

SLSM 6-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
4U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

XRec Mode
1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1,3 IN1,6 IN1,2 IN1,5 IN1,1 IN1,4

ChannelMax Mode
1 0 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN1,3 IN1,6 IN1,2 IN1,5 IN1,1 IN1,4

80
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in XRec Mode (1IN SLSM 6PH + 1OUT MIX)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 6PH + 1OUT MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1IN SLSM 6PH + 2OUT

MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1IN SLSM 6PH + 2OUT MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

81
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 6-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
4U server.
Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#IN
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #IN #OUT
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

XRec Mode
1 0 1 OUT1 MIX1 IN1 IN1 IN1
5-6 3-4 1-2

ChannelMax Mode
1 0 2 OUT1 OUT2 IN1 IN1 IN1
5-6 3-4 1-2

Example in XRec Mode (1IN 3G SLSM 6PH + 1OUT)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1IN 3G SLSM 6PH + 1OUT need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

82
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1IN 3G SLSM 6PH +

2OUT)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1IN x3G SLSM 6PH + 2OUT need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

3.3.3. SLSM Configurations (6U)

Introduction

SLSM Principles
This section details the available multi-phase SLSM configurations on XT3 6U servers.
In SLSM configurations, a supermotion recorder of a 2-, 4-, 6- or 8-phase camera
accounts for one logical channel, but corresponds respectively to 2, 4, 6 or 8 physical
channels.
In 3G SLSM configurations, a supermotion recorder of a 2-, 4-, 6- or 8-phase camera
accounts for one logical channel. On the rear panel, it uses respectively 1, 2, 3 or 4
connections, each cabled onto the primary connector of the codec module. On the V3X
board, it uses both primary and secondary channels of that codec module.
In U-Motion configurations, an ultramotion recorder of a 10-phase camera accounts for
one logical channel, but corresponds respectively to 10 physical channels.

83
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Overview
The tables in this section show the available HD SLSM and U-Motion configurations with
an XT3 6U server, as well as how the BNC connectors should be cabled.
The configurations in 8-Channel and ChannelMax mode make use of the secondary
channel of the codec module on the V3X board as an independent record channel. This
is available in given conditions. See section "About Extended Configurations" on page
54.
Click the request links in the overview table to jump to the corresponding configuration
table:

• SLSM 2x • SLSM 2x 3G

• SLSM 3x

• SLSM 4x • SLSM 4x 3G

• SLSM 6x • SLSM 6x 3G

• SLSM 8x • SLSM 8x 3G

• SLSM 10x

• SLSM 16x

SLSM 2-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
6U server server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

6-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC
1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC REC REC

2 1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC

3 2 1,2 1,1

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

5 4 3 2 1,2 1,1

84
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC

1 1 1,2 1,1

1 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC

1 1 2 2 1,2 1,1

1 0 3 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC

1 1 2 2 3 3 1,2 1,1

1 0 4 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1,2 1,1

1 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC

1 1 2 1,2 1,1

1 1 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC

1 1 2 2 2 1,2 1,1

1 1 3 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC

1 1 2 2 3 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 2 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 2 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 2 2 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 3 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC

1 1 4 3 2 1,2 1,1

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC

2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC

3 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

4 3 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 2 2 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC

1 1 3 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

3 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

3,2 3,1 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

8-Channel Mode
1 2 4 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1,2 3 1,1 2

1 3 3 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 3 3 1,2 5 1,1 4

1 4 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 2 1,2 5 1,1 4

2 0 4 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1,2 2,2 1,1 2,1

85
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

2 2 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 2,2 2,1 1,2 4 1,1 3

3 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 2,2 2,1 1,2 3,2 1,1 3,1

4 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 2,2 4,2 2,1 4,1 1,2 3,2 1,1 3,1

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C # # Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS RE PLA m. m. m. m. m. m.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

ChannelMax Mode
NoS 2 4 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE
p Y 1 Y 2 2,2 6 2,1 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 5 4 3

2LS 2 4 4 PLA PLA PLA PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE
M Y Y Y Y 2,2 6 2,1 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 3 2 4 5 4 3

4 1 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y 1 3,1 2,2 5 2,1 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 4,2 4,1 3,2

Sp 4 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE

3,2 8 3,1 7 2,2 6 2,1 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
5 4,2 4,1

4 0 4 PLA PLA PLA PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y Y Y Y 2,2 4,2 2,1 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 3 2 4 4,1 3,2 3,1

The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox mode, with license
code 35 (Channels Max Spotbox).
The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.
The configurations preceded by 2LSM are also available in Dual LSM mode with the
license code 116.

86
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in XRec Mode (2xSLSM 2PH + 2 REC + 2 PLAY

MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 2xSLSM 2PH + 2REC + 2PLAY MIX in XRec mode need to be cabled as shown
below:

Example in XRec Mode (4xSLSM 2PH + 2 PLAY MIX)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 4xSLSM 2PH + 2 PLAY MIX in XRec mode need to be cabled as shown below:

87
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in ChannelMax Mode (4xSLSM 2PH + 4 REC)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 4xSLSM 2PH + 4 REC in ChannelMax mode need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in ChannelMax Mode (4xSLSM 2PH + 4 PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 4xSLSM 2PH + 4 PLAY in ChannelMax mode need to be cabled as shown below:

SLSM 2-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 2 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 6U server server.
Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.

88
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

6-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC
1
1-2

1 1 0 REC REC
2 1
1-2

1 2 0 REC REC REC

3 2 1
1-2

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1
1-2

1 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC

5 4 3 2 1
1-2

1 0 1 PLAY MIX REC

1 1 1
1-2

1 0 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC

1 1 Y 2 1
2 1-2

1 0 3 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC

1 1 Y 2 Y 3 1
2 3 1-2

1 0 4 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC

1 1 Y 2 Y 3 Y 4 1
2 3 4 1-2

1 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC

1 1 2 1
1-2

1 1 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC

1 1 Y 2 2 1
2 1-2

1 2 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC

1 1 3 2 1
1-2

1 2 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 3 2 1
2 1-2

1 3 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 4 3 2 1
1-2

2 0 0 REC REC
2 1
1-2 1-2

89
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

2 1 0 REC REC REC

3 2 1
1-2 1-2

2 2 0 REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2

2 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC

1 1 2 1
1-2 1-2

2 0 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC

1 1 Y 2 2 1
2 1-2 1-2

2 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC

1 1 3 2 1
1-2 1-2

3 0 0 REC REC REC

3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

8-Channel Mode
1 1 4 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC
1 1 Y 2 Y 3 Y 4 2 1
2 3 4 1-2

1 2 3 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 Y 3 3 2 1
2 3 1-2

1 3 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 4 3 2 1
2 1-2

2 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC

5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2

2 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

6 5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2

2 0 3 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC

1 1 Y 2 Y 3 2 1
2 3 1-2 1-2

2 0 4 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC
1 1 Y 2 Y 3 Y 4 2 1
2 3 4 1-2 1-2

2 1 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 3 2 1
2 1-2 1-2

2 1 3 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 Y 3 3 2 1
2 3 1-2 1-2

90
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

2 2 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 4 3 2, 1
2 1-2 1-2

3 1 0 REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

3 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC

5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

Sp 3 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

6 5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

3 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC

1 1 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

3 0 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 3 2 1
2 1-2 1-2 1-2

3 0 3 PLAY MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 Y3 3 3 2 1
2 1-2 1-2 1-2

3 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

3 1 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 4 3 2 1
2 1-2 1-2 1-2

3 2 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC

1 1 5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2

4 0 0 REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

Sp 4 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC

5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

4 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

Sp 4 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

6 5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

4 0 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 Y 2 4 3 2 1
2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

ChannelMax Mode

91
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

2LSMO 1 5 4 PLAY PLA PLA PLA REC REC RE REC RE REC

nly 1 Y3 Y Y 4 3 C 2 C 1
2 4 6 5 1-2

NoSp 2 4 2 PLAY MIX PLA MIX REC RE REC RE REC REC

1 1 Y 2 4 C 3 C 2, 1
2 6 5 1-2 1-2

2LSM 2 4 4 PLAY PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC REC

1 Y3 Y Y 4 C 3 C 2, 1
2 4 6 5 1-2 1-2

2LSMO 2 6 4 PLAY PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

nly 1 Y3 Y Y 5 C 4 C 3 C 1 C 2,
2 4 8 7 6 1-2 1-2

4 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC

1 1 5 4 3 2 1
1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

Sp 4 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC RE REC RE

8 7 6 5 2, C 1, C
1-2 4, 1-2 3,
1-2 1-2

4 0 4 PLAY PLA PLA PLA REC REC REC REC

1 Y3 Y Y 4 3 2 1
2 4 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

2LSMO 4 4 4 PLAY PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

nly 1 Y3 Y Y 6 C8 5 C7 2 C4 1 C3
2 4 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox mode, with license
code 35 (Channels Max Spotbox).
The configurations preceded by 2LSM are also available in Dual LSM mode with the
license code 116.
The configurations preceded by 2LSMOnly are only available in Dual LSM mode (with
the license code 116). They are not supported with any other mode of base
configurations.

92
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 8-Channel Mode (2x3G SLSM 2PH + 2 REC + 2

PLAY MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3G SLSM
configuration with 2x3G SLSM 2PH + 2REC + 2PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown
below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

Example in 8-Channel Mode (3x3G SLSM 2PH + 2 REC + 1

PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 3x3G SLSM 2PH + 2REC + 1PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

93
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 8-Channel Mode (4x3G SLSM 2PH + 2 REC)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 4x3G SLSM 2PH + 2REC need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (2x3G SLSM 2PH + 4 REC

+ 4 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 2x3G SLSM 2PH + 4 REC + 4 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

94
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SLSM 3-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 3 Phase configurations in SD/HD with an
XT3 6U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m. m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

6-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC
1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC

2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC

3 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC

Y 1 1,3 1,2 1,1
1

1 0 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

Y 1 Y 2 1,3 1,2 1,1
1 2

1 0 3 PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

Y 1 Y 2 Y 3 1,3 1,2 1,1
1 2 3

1 1 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

Y 1 2 1,3 1,2 1,1
1

1 1 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

Y 1 Y 2 2 1,3 1,2 1,1
1 2

1 2 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC REC

Y 1 3 2 1,3 1,2 1,1
1

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

2,3 2,2 2,1 1,3 1,2 1,1

8-Channel Mode
1 1 4 PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC RE REC RE
Y 1 Y 2 Y 3 Y 4 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 3 4 2 1,3

95
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m. m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

1 3 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC RE REC RE

Y 1 Y 2 2 1,3 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 4 3

1 3 3 PLA MIX PLA MIX PLA MIX REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y 1 Y 2 Y 3 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 3 4 3 2

1 4 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC RE REC RE

Y 1 3 2 1,3 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 5 4

2 0 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC RE REC RE

Y 1 Y 2 2,1 1,3 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 2,3 2,2

2 2 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y 1 Y 2 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 4 3 2,3 2,2

ChannelMax Mode
1 3 4 PLA PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE
Y Y Y Y 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 4 2 3 4 3 2

NoS 1 5 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

p Y 1 Y 2 2 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 6 5 4 3

2LS 1 5 4 PLA PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

M Y Y Y Y 2 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 3 2 4 6 5 4 3

NoS 1 7 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

p Y Y 3 8 2 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 7 6 5 4

Sp 1 9 0 REC REC REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

4 10 3 9 2 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
8 7 6 5

2LS 2 2 4 PLA PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

M Y Y Y Y 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 3 2 4 4 3 2,3 2,2

NoS 2 4 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

p Y Y 2,2 6 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 5 4 3 2,3

Sp 2 6 0 REC REC REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

2,3 8 2,2 7 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
6 5 4 3

3 0 1 PLA MIX REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y 1 2,2 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 3,3 3,2 3,1 2,3

96
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m. m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

3 1 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y Y 2,2 4 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1 2 3,3 3,2 3,1 2,3

Sp 3 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

2,3 6 2,2 5 2,1 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
4 3,3 3,2 3,1

The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox mode, with license
code 35 (Channels Max Spotbox).
The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.
The configurations preceded by 2LSM are also available in Dual LSM mode with the
license code 116.

Example in 6-Channel Mode (1xSLSM 3PH + 2REC +

1PLAY MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 3PH + 2REC + 1PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

97
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in XRec Mode (1xSLSM 3PH + 3 REC + 2 PLAY

MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 3PH + 3 REC + 2 PLAY MIX in XRec mode need to be cabled as shown
below:

Example in ChannelMax Mode (2xSLSM 3PH + 2 REC + 4

PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 2xSLSM 3PH + 2 REC + 4 PLAY (No Mix) in ChannelMax mode need to be cabled
as shown below:

98
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in ChannelMax Mode (2xSLSM 3PH + 6 REC)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 2xSLSM 3PH + 6 REC in ChannelMax mode need to be cabled as shown below:

99
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 4-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 4 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
6U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
4x

6-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC REC
1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC

2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

3 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC

1 1 2 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC

1 1 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

8-Channel Mode
1 2 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 3 1,1 2

1 3 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 1,4 1,3 4 1,2 3 1,1 2

2 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 1,4 2,4 1,3 2,3 1,2 2,2 1,1 2,1

100
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 8-Channel Mode (1xSLSM 4PH + 3REC +

2PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 4PH + 3REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in 8-Channel Mode (2xSLSM 4PH + 2PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 2xSLSM 4PH + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

101
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 4-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 4 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 6U server.
Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri
#RE #PLA Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLS m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch.
4x

6-Channel Mode
1 0 1 PLA MIX REC REC
Y 1 1 1
1 3-4 1-2

1 0 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC

Y 1 Y 2 1 1
1 2 3-4 1-2

1 1 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC

Y 1 2 1 1
1 3-4 1-2

8-Channel Mode
1 2 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC
Y 1 Y 2 3 2 1 1
1 2 3-4 1-2

ChannelMax Mode
1 4 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC
Y 1 Y 2 3 5 2 4 1 1
1 2 3-4 1-2

1 6 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Y Y 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 1
1 2 3-4 1-2

2 0 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

Y 1 Y 2 2 2 1 1
1 2 3-4 1-2 3-4 1-2

2 2 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC

Y Y 3 4 2 2 1 1
1 2 3-4 1-2 3-4 1-2

2 4 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Y 1 Y 2 4 6 3 5 1 2 1 2
1 2 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

2 6 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Y Y 5 8 4 7 3 6 1 2 1 2
1 2 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

102
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 8-Channel mode (1x3G SLSM 4PH + 2REC + 2

PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1x3G SLSM 4PH + 2REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown
below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

Example in ChannelMax mode (2x3G SLSM 4PH + 6REC +

2 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 2x3G SLSM 4PH + 6REC + 2PLAY in ChannelMax mode need to be
cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

103
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 6-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
6U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m. m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

8-Channel Mode
1 0 1 PLA PLA REC REC RE REC RE REC RE
Y1 Y2 1,4 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1,6 1,5 1,4

1 0 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE

Y1 Y2 1,4 1,3 1,2 C 1,1 C
1,6 1,5

1 1 1 PLA REC REC REC REC RE REC RE

Y1 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 C2 1,1 C
1,6

1 1 2 PLA PLA REC REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y1 Y2 1,4 1,3 C2 1,2 C 1,1 C
1,6 1,5

1 2 1 PLA REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE

Y1 1,5 1,4 1,3 C3 1,2 C2 1,1 C
1,6

ChannelMax Mode
NoS 1 2 3 PLA PLA PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE
p Y1 Y3 Y2 1,4 C 1,3 C2 1,2 C 1,1 C
3 1,6 1,5

NoS 1 3 2 PLA PLA REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

p Y1 Y2 1,5 1,4 C 1,3 C3 1,2 C2 1,1 C
4 1,6

Sp 1 6 0 REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

1,6 7 1,5 C6 1,4 C5 1,3 C4 1,2 C3 1,1 C
2

Sp 2 0 0 REC REC REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE

1,6 2,6 1,5 C 1,4 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
2,5 2,4 2,3 2,2 2,1

The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.
The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox mode, with license
code 35 (Channels Max Spotbox).

104
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 8-Channel Mode (1xSLSM 6PH + 1REC + 2

PLAY MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 6PH +1 REC + 2 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1xSLSM 6PH + 3REC + 2

PLAY MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 6PH +3 REC + 2 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

SLSM 6-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 6 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 6U server.
Two situations can occur depending on the mode and configuration:
• Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.
• Each single 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary
connector of the codec module on the rear panel, but uses only one channel on the
V3X board.

105
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

6-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC
1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

8-Channel Mode
1 0 1 PLA MIX1 REC REC REC
Y1 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

1 0 2 PLA MIX1 PLA MIX REC REC REC

Y1 Y2 2 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

1 0 3 PLA MIX1 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC

Y1 Y2 2 Y3 3 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

1 1 1 PLA MIX1 REC REC REC REC

Y1 2 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

1 1 2 PLA MIX1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

Y1 Y2 2 2 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

1 2 1 PLA MIX1 REC REC REC REC REC

Y1 3 2 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

ChannelMax Mode
No 1 2 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC
Sp 1 3 2 2 3 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

No 1 3 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC

Sp Y1 Y2 3 2 4 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

Sp 1 6 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

4 7 3 6 2 5 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2

Sp 2 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

2 2 2 1 1 1
5-6 3-4 1-2 5-6 3-4 1-2

2 0 1 PLA MIX1 REC REC REC REC REC REC

Y1 1 2 1 2 1 2
5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

2 0 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

106
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

2 1 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

2 2 2 PLAY MIX PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1 2 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1 2
5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.
The configurations preceded by Sp are only available in Spotbox mode, with license
code 35 (Channels Max Spotbox).

Example in 8-Channel Mode (1x3G SLSM 6PH + 1REC + 1

PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1x3G SLSM 6PH + 1REC + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown
below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

107
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1x3G SLSM 6PH + 3REC +

2 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1x3G SLSM 6PH + 3REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown
below.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (2x3G SLSM 6PH + 2REC +

2 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 2x3G SLSM 6PH + 2REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown
below.

108
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SLSM 8-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 8 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
6U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
SLS #RE #PLA Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
m. m. m. m. m. m.
M C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
8x

ChannelMax Mode
No 1 0 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Sp Y1 1 Y 2 1,4 1,8 1,3 1,7 1,2 1,6 1,1 1,5
2

No 1 1 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Sp Y1 Y 1,5 1,4 2 1,3 1,8 1,2 1,7 1,1 1,6
2

No 1 2 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Sp Y1 Y 1,5 3 1,4 2 1,3 1,8 1,2 1,7 1,1 1,6
2

The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1x SLSM 8PH + 2REC + 2

PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a SLSM configuration
with 1 SLSM 8PH + 2REC + 2PLAY in ChannelMax mode need to be cabled as shown
below.

109
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 8-Phase Configurations on 3G

The table below shows the available 3G SLSM 8 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 6U server.
Two situations can occur depending on the mode and configuration:
• Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but accounts for two channels on the V3X board.
• Each 3G cable transports two phases. It is connected to the primary connector of the
codec module on the rear panel, but uses only one channel on the V3X board. This
implies a limited bandwidth.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Se Pri Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. c. m. m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
8x

ChannelMax Mode
No 1 0 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC
Sp Y 1 1 1 1 1
1 7-8 5-6 3-4 1-2

No 1 0 2 PLA MIX PLA MIX REC REC REC REC

Sp Y 1 Y 2 1 1 1 1
1 2 7-8 5-6 3-4 1-2

No 1 1 2 PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC

Sp Y Y 2 1 1 1 1
1 2 7-8 5-6 3-4 1-2

No 1 2 2 PLA PLA REC RE REC REC REC REC

Sp Y Y 2 C 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 7-8 5-6 3-4 1-2

No 2 0 1 PLA MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Sp Y 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 7-8 7-8 5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

No 2 2 1 PLA MIX REC RE REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Sp Y 1 3 C4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 7-8 7-8 5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2

The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.

110
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1x3G SLSM 8PH + 2REC +

2 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 1x3G SLSM 8PH + 2REC + 2PLAY in ChannelMax mode need to be
cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, both primary and
secondary channels are used on the codec module of the V3X board.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (2x3G SLSM 8PH + 2REC +

1 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an 3G SLSM
configuration with 2x3G SLSM 8PH + 2REC + 1PLAY in ChannelMax mode need to be
cabled as shown below.
For a 3G cable connected to a primary connector on the rear panel, only the primary
channel is used on the codec module of the V3X board. The secondary channel is used
independently.

111
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 10-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available U-Motion 10 Phase configurations in HD with an
XT3 6U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se Pri Se
#RE #PLA
SLS m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c. m. c.
C Y
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
10x

XRec Mode
1 0 1 PLA REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE REC RE
Y1 1,5 C 1,4 C 1,3 C 1,2 C 1,1 C
1,10 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6

Example in XRec Mode (1xSLSM 10PH + 1 PLAY MIX)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 10PH + 1 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

112
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SLSM 16-Phase Configurations

The table below shows the available SLSM 16 Phase configurations in HD with an XT3
6U server.
A separate channel is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC connectors
should be assigned on the rear panel, which corresponds to the channel assignment at
the level of the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#RE
C Pri Pri Pri Pri Pri
#RE #PLA Prim. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec. Sec.
SLS m. m. m. m. m.
C Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
M Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
16x

ChannelMax Mode
No 1 0 1 PLAY MIX REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Sp 1 1 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
7-8 15- 5-6 13- 3-4 11- 1-2 9-10
16 14 12

The configurations preceded by NoSp are not available in Spotbox and Server modes.

Example in ChannelMax Mode (1xSLSM 16PH + 1 PLAY

MIX)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in an SLSM configuration
with 1xSLSM 16PH + 1 PLAY MIX need to be cabled as shown below:

113
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.4. 3D Configurations

3.4.1. General Information on 3D Configurations

Requirements
The 3D is available when the following software requirements are met:
• The license code 23 or 24 is activated on the EVS server.
• The 3D parameter is set to Yes.
• The Interface parameter is set to a proper value.
See section "Base Settings" on page 196.

Connectivity
On the rear panel, a 3D feed is cabled with one of the following interfaces:
• Dual Link interface:
Two cables, seen as one logical channel (record or play channel) by the EVS server,
are connected to both connectors of a codec module, for example IN1 and IN1B in
REC.
• 3G interface:
A single cable, corresponding to a logical channel, is connected to the primary
connector of a codec module.
On the V3X board, a 3D connection is connected as follows:
• Both primary and secondary channels of the codec module (COD A or COD B) on
the V3X board are used whatever the connection interface to the rear panel (Dual
Link or 3G).

3.4.2. 3D Standard Configurations (4U)

Available Configurations
The tables below show the available 3D configurations with standard cameras on an
XT3 4U server.
They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board.
This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel (Dual Link or 3G).

114
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan.

1 0 REC1A REC1B

2 0 REC2A REC2B REC1A REC1B

3 0 REC3A REC3B REC2A REC2B REC1A REC1B

4 0 REC4A REC4B REC3A REC3B REC2A REC2B REC1A REC1B

1 1 PLAY1A PLAY1B REC1A REC1B

1 2 PLAY1A PLAY1B PLAY2A PLAY2B REC1A REC1B

1 3 PLAY1A PLAY1B PLAY2A PLAY2B PLAY3A PLAY3B REC1A REC1B

2 1 PLAY1A PLAY1B REC2A REC2B REC1A REC1B

2 2 PLAY1A PLAY1B PLAY2A PLAY2B REC2A REC2B REC1A REC1B

3 1 PLAY1A PLAY1B REC3A REC3B REC2A REC2B REC1A REC1B

0 1 PLAY1A PLAY1B

0 2 PLAY1A PLAY1B PLAY2A PLAY2B

0 3 PLAY1A PLAY1B PLAY2A PLAY2B PLAY3A PLAY3B

0 4 PLAY1A PLAY1B PLAY2A PLAY2B PLAY3A PLAY3B PLAY4 PLAY4B

Example in 3D Dual Link (2REC + 2PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 3D Dual Link
configuration 2REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

115
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.4.3. 3D Standard Configurations (6U)

Available Configurations
The tables below show the available 3D configurations with standard cameras on a XT3
6U server. They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X
board. This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel (Dual Link or
3G).

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

1 0 REC REC
1A 1B

2 0 REC REC REC REC

2A 2B 1A 1B

3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

4 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

5 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
5A 5B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

6 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
6A 6B 5A 5B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

1 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC

1A 1B 1A 1B

1 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 1A 1B

1 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 1A 1B

1 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 1A 1B

1 5 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 1A 1B

2 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 1A 1B

2 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 2A 2B 1A 1B

2 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

2 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 2A 2B 1A 1B

3 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

116
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

3 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

3 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

4 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

4 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

5 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 5A 5B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1A 1B

0 1 PLAY PLAY
1A 1B

0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1A 1B 2A 2B

0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B

0 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B

0 5 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B

0 6 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 5A 5B 6A 6B

Example in 3D Dual Link (3REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 3D Dual Link
configuration 3REC + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

NOTE
In an equivalent configuration with a single link 3G interface, only the J8
connectors are cabled. However the primary and secondary channels on the
codec module of the V3X board are both used.

117
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.4.4. Channel Assignment Principles with 3D

SLSM
The combination of 3D standards and SLSM configurations associates the following
individual rules for connector assignments on the rear panel:
• For 3D in Dual Link, the first cable arrives into the primary connector of a codec
module, and the second cable arrives into the secondary connector of the same
codec module.
• For 3D in 3G (single link), the single cable arrives into the primary connector of the
codec module.
Whatever the type of connection to the rear pane, both primary and secondary
channels of the corresponding codec module on the V3X board are used.
• For the SLSM 2 Phase configurations, one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical
channel, but corresponds to two physical channels.
• For the SLSM 3 Phase configurations, one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical
channel, but corresponds to three physical channels.
• For the SLSM 4, 6 or 8 Phase configurations, one SLSM recorder accounts for one
logical channel, but corresponds respectively to four, sic or eight physical channels.

3.4.5. 3D SLSM Configurations (4U)

SLSM 2x Configurations
The table below shows the available 3D configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras on
an XT3 4U server. The table shows the channel assignment at the level of the codec
module of a V3X board. This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear
panel (Dual Link or 3G).

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 0 0 REC REC REC REC

1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

118
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 1 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

Example in 3D Dual Link (1SLSM 2x + 1REC+ 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3D Dual Link
configuration 1SLSM 2PH + 1REC + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

NOTE
In an equivalent configuration with a 3G interface, only the J8 connectors are
cabled. However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of
the V3X board are both used.

SLSM 3x Configurations
The tables below show the available 3D configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras on
a XT3 4U server. They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of
a V3X board. This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel (Dual
Link or 3G).

119
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

1 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

3.4.6. 3D SLSM Configurations (6U)

SLSM 2x Configurations
The tables below show the available 3D configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras on
a XT3 6U server. They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of
a V3X board. This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel (Dual
Link or 3G).

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
SLS #PLA Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
#REC
M Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 0 0 REC REC REC REC

1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
5A 5B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 4A 4B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

120
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
SLS #PLA Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
#REC
M Y Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 1 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 2 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 2 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 3 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
3A 3B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
4A 4B 3A 3B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 0 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 1 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 3A 3B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

3 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
3,2A 3,2B 3,1A 3,1B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

121
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 3D Dual Link (1SLSM 2x + 1REC+ 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3D Dual Link
configuration 1SLSM 2PH + 1REC + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

NOTE
In an equivalent configuration with a 3G interface, only the J8 connectors are
cabled. However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of
the V3X board are both used.

SLSM 3x Configurations
The tables below show the available 3D configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras on
a XT3 6U server. They show the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of
a V3X board. This is valid whatever the type of cable connected to the rear panel (Dual
Link or 3G).

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

1 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
3A 3B 2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
4A 4B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1A 1B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

122
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

1 0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 1 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 2A 2B 2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

1 2 1 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1A 1B 3A 3B 2A 2B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
2,3A 2,3B 2,2A 2,2B 2,1A 2,1B 1,3A 1,3B 1,2A 1,2B 1,1A 1,1B

Example in 3D Dual Link (1SLSM 3x + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 3D Dual Link
configuration 1SLSM 3PH + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

NOTE
In an equivalent configuration with a 3G interface, only the J8 connectors are
cabled. However the primary and secondary channels on the codec module of
the V3X board are both used.

123
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.5. 1080p Configurations

3.5.1. General Information on 1080p

Configurations

Introduction
The EVS video server working in 1080p encodes or decodes natively the full 1080p
video on the EVS server. This provides file interoperability, without requiring
transcoding.

Requirements
The 1080p is available when the following software requirements are met:
• The license code 21 or 22 is activated on the EVS server.
• The Interface parameter is set to a proper value.
See section "Base Settings" on page 196.

Limitations

Codec Limitations
1080p supports AVC-Intra, XAVC-Intra, Avid DNxHD, and Apple ProRes 422 codecs.

Configuration Limitations
1080p configurations with more than 6 channels are only available with the following
general limitations:
• in DNxHD codec;
• with a max. bitrate of 242 Mbps in 50Hz (PAL) and 260 Mbps in 60 Hz (NTSC) in
XRec configurations (8-Channel mode on XT3 4U).
• with a max. bitrate of 200 Mbps in 50Hz (PAL) and 60 Hz (NTSC) in
ChannelMax configurations.
Stricter bitrate limitations are recommended for specific SLSM configurations:
• max. bitrate of 200 Mbps in XRec configurations (8-Channel mode) in SLSM 6x.
• max. bitrate of 180 Mbps in ChannelMax configurations in SLSM 8x.
1080p configurations with Dual-REC or Dual-Play (more than 6 phases on a XT3 6U
server or more than 4 phases on a XT3 4U server), shall only be supported in 3G mode,
not in Dual Link mode.

124
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Feature Limitations
• 1080p does not support the Mix on one channel feature.
• 1080p does not support the timeline feature when the configuration requires Dual-
Play.
• 1080p is not compatible with the Dual LSM feature.

Connectivity
On the rear panel, a 1080p feed is cabled with one of the following interfaces:
• Dual Link interface:
Two cables, seen by the EVS server as one logical channel (record or play channel),
are connected to both connectors of a codec module, for example IN1 and IN1B in
REC. This interface is not supported with extended configurations.
• 3G interface:
A single cable, corresponding to a logical channel, is connected to the primary
connector of a codec module.
On the V3X board, a 1080p connection is connected as follows:
• On 4 or 6-channel configurations, only the primary channel of the codec module
(COD A) on the V3X board is used.
The connection to the secondary channel is no longer necessary since the full 1080p
video is included in a single file on the EVS server.
In this case, the decoding/encoding capability of both channels of the V3X codec
module is used without bandwidth restriction.
• On extended configurations, the secondary channel of the codec module (COD A)
on the V3X board can be used as an independent recorder, with the above-
mentioned codec and bandwidth limitations.

3.5.2. 1080p Standard Configurations (4U)

Available Configurations
The tables below show the 1080p configurations with standard cameras on an XT3 4U
server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan.

4-Channel Mode
1 0 REC1

125
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan. Chan.

2 0 REC2 REC1

3 0 REC3 REC2 REC1

4 0 REC4 REC3 REC2 REC1

1 1 PLAY1 REC1

1 2 PLAY1 PLAY2 REC1

1 3 PLAY1 PLAY2 PLAY3 REC1

2 1 PLAY1 REC2 REC1

2 2 PLAY1 PLAY2 REC2 REC1

3 1 PLAY1 REC3 REC2 REC1

0 1 PLAY1

0 2 PLAY1 PLAY2

0 3 PLAY1 PLAY2 PLAY3

0 4 PLAY1 PLAY2 PLAY3 PLAY4

ChannelMax Mode
2 3 PLAY1 PLAY2 PLAY3 REC1 REC2

2 4 PLAY1 PLAY3 PLAY2 PLAY4 REC2 REC1

3 3 PLAY1 PLAY3 PLAY2 REC2 REC1 REC3

4 2 PLAY1 PLAY2 REC2 REC4 REC1 REC3

4 4 PLAY1 PLAY3 PLAY2 PLAY4 REC2 REC4 REC1 REC3

5 1 PLAY1 REC3 REC2 REC5 REC1 REC4

6 0 REC3 REC6 REC2 REC5 REC1 REC4

0 6 PLAY1 PLAY5 PLAY2 PLAY6 PLAY3 PLAY4

6 2 PLAY1 PLAY2 REC3 REC5 REC2 REC5 REC1 REC4

8 0 REC4 REC8 REC3 REC7 REC2 REC6 REC1 REC5

NOTE
On Dual Play configurations in ChannelMax mode (two independent play
channels assigned to both links of a codec module), the standard mix feature,
via the PGM/PRV mode, is only available on the 1st link of the codec module
1 in the 6 IN - 2 OUT configuration.

126
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 1080p 3G in 4-Channel Mode (2REC + 2PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 2REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 4-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

127
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (4REC +

4PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 4REC + 4PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

3.5.3. 1080p Standard Configurations (6U)

Available Configurations
The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with standard cameras on a
XT3 6U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

6-channel mode
1 0 REC
1

2 0 REC 2 REC
1

3 0 REC REC 2 REC

3 1

4 0 REC REC REC2 REC

4 3 1

128
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

5 0 REC REC REC REC 2 REC

5 4 3 1

6 0 REC REC REC REC REC 2 REC

6 5 4 3 1

1 1 PLAY REC
1 1

1 2 PLAY PLAY REC

1 2 1

1 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC

1 2 3 1

1 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC

1 2 3 4 1

1 5 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC

1 2 3 4 5 1

2 1 PLAY REC 2 REC

1 1

2 2 PLAY PLAY REC 2 REC

1 2 1

2 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC 2 REC

1 2 3 1

2 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC 2 REC

1 2 3 4 1

3 1 PLAY REC REC 2 REC

1 3 1

3 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC 2 REC

1 2 3 1

3 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC 2 REC

1 2 3 3 1

4 1 PLAY REC REC REC 2 REC

1 4 3 1

4 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC 2 REC

1 2 4 3 1

5 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC 2 REC

1 5 4 3 1

0 1 PLAY
1

0 2 PLAY PLAY
1 2

0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY

1 2 3

0 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1 2 3 4

0 5 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1 2 3 4 5

129
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

0 6 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1 2 3 4 5 6

8-Channel mode
4 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1 2 3 4 2 4 1 3

5 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 3 3 2 5 1 4

6 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 4 3 2 6 1 5

8 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

6 5 4 3 2 8 1 7

ChannelMax mode
6 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 3 3 6 2 5 1 4

6 6 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 4 2 5 3 6 3 6 2 5 1 4

8 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 4 8 3 7 2 6 1 5

8 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 3 2 4 4 8 3 7 2 6 1 5

10 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 5 10 4 9 3 8 2 7 1 6

NOTE
On Dual Play configurations in ChannelMax mode (two independent play
channels assigned to both links of a codec module), the standard mix feature,
via the PGM/PRV mode, is only available on the 1st link of the codec module
1 in the 10 IN - 2 OUT configuration.

130
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 1080p 3G in 6-Channel Mode (3REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 3REC + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 6-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

Example in 1080p 3G in 8-Channel Mode (6REC + 2PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 6REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

131
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (8REC +

4PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 8REC + 4PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

3.5.4. Channel Assignment Principles with 1080p

SLSM
The combination of 1080p standards and SLSM configurations associates the following
individual rules for connector assignments on the rear panel:
• For 1080p in Dual Link, the first cable arrives into the primary connector of a codec
module, and the second cable arrives into the secondary connector of the same
codec module.
• For 1080p in 3G (single link), the single cable arrives into the primary connector of
the codec module.
Whatever the type of connection to the rear panel, only the primary channel of the
corresponding codec module on the V3X board is used in 1080p in 4-channel
configuration for 4U servers, or 6-channel configurations for 6U servers. However
the decoding/encoding capability of both channels of the V3X codec module is used.
• For the SLSM 2 Phase configurations, one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical
channel, but corresponds to two physical channels.
• For the SLSM 3 Phase configurations, one SLSM recorder accounts for one logical
channel, but corresponds to three physical channels.
• For the SLSM 4, 6 or 8 Phase configurations, one SLSM recorder accounts for one
logical channel, but corresponds respectively to four, six or eight physical channels.
See all bitrate data with SLSM configurations in the section "Bitrates for SLSM
Configurations in HD 1080p" on page 187.

132
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

3.5.5. 1080p SLSM Configurations (4U)

SLSM 2x Configurations
The table below shows the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 2 Phase cameras
on a XT3 4U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC
1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC 2 REC REC

1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC 3 REC 2 REC REC

1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLAY 1 REC REC

1,2 1,1

1 0 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC

1,2 1,1

1 1 1 PLAY 1 REC 2 REC REC

1,2 1,1

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC

2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

ChannelMax Mode
1 2 4 PLAY 1 PLAY 3 PLAY 2 PLAY 4 REC REC 3 REC REC 2
1,2 1,1

1 4 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC 2 REC 5 REC REC 4 REC REC 3

1,2 1,1

2 0 4 PLAY 1 PLAY 3 PLAY 2 PLAY 4 REC REC REC REC

1,2 2,2 1,1 2,1

2 2 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC 4 REC REC 3 REC REC

2,1 1,2 1,1 2,2

3 0 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC REC REC REC REC

2,1 3,2 1,2 3,1 1,1 2,2

133
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 1080p 3G in 4-Channel Mode (1SLSM 2x +

1REC+ 1PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 2PH + 1REC + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 4-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

134
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (2SLSM 2x +

2REC+ 2PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 2SLSM 2PH + 2 REC + 2 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

135
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 3x Configurations
The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 3 Phase cameras
on a XT3 4U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC
1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC 2 REC REC REC

1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLAY 1 REC REC REC

1,3 1,2 1,1

ChannelMax Mode
1 1 4 PLAY 1 PLAY 3 PLAY 2 PLAY 4 REC REC 2 REC REC
1,2 1,1 1,3

1 3 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC 4 REC REC 3 REC REC 2

1,3 1,2 1,1

2 0 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC REC REC REC REC

1,3 2,3 1,2 2,2 1,1 2,1

Example in 1080p 3G in 4-Channel Mode (1SLSM 3x +

1PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 3PH + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 4-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

136
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (1SLSM 3x +

1REC+ 4PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1 SLSM 3PH + 1 REC + 4 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

137
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SLSM 4x Configurations in 1080p

The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 4 Phase cameras
on a XT3 4U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
4x

4-Channel Mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC REC
1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

ChannelMax Mode
1 2 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC 3 REC REC 2 REC REC
1,3 1,2 1,1 1,4

Example in 1080p 3G in 4-Channel Mode (1SLSM 4x)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 4PH need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 4-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

138
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (1SLSM 4x + 2

REC + 2 PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1 SLSM 4PH + 2 REC + 2 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

SLSM 6x Configurations in 1080p

The tables below show the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 6 Phase cameras
on a XT3 4U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

ChannelMax Mode
1 0 2 PLAY 1 PLAY 2 REC REC REC REC REC REC
1,3 1,6 1,2 1,5 1,1 1,4

139
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (1SLSM 6x + 2

PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1 SLSM 6PH + 2 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

3.5.6. 1080p SLSM Configurations (6U)

SLSM 2x Configurations
The table below shows the available 1080p configurations in 6-channel mode with
SLSM 2 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be
plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

6-channel mode
1 0 0 REC REC
1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC REC REC

2 1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC

3 2 1,2 1,1

140
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 4 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

5 4 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLAY REC REC

1 1,2 1,1

1 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC

1 2 1,2 1,1

1 0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC

1 2 3 1,2 1,1

1 0 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC

1 2 3 4 1,2 1,1

1 1 1 PLAY REC REC REC

1 2 1,2 1,1

1 1 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC

1 2 2 1,2 1,1

1 1 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC

1 2 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 2 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 2 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2 3 2 1,2 1,1

1 3 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC

1 4 3 2 1,2 1,1

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC

2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC

3 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

4 3 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 0 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

2 1 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC

1 3 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

3 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

3,2 3,1 2,2 2,1 1,2 1,1

ChannelMax mode
1 2 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1 2 3 4 1,2 3 1,1 2

1 4 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 3 2 1,2 5 1,1 4

141
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM #REC #PLAY
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x

2 2 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 2,2 2,1 1,2 4 1,1 3

2 0 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2 3 4 1,2 2,2 1,1 2,1

3 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 2,2 2,1 1,2 3,2 1,1 3,1

Example in 1080p 3G (1SLSM 2x + 1REC+ 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 2PH + 1REC + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 6-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

SLSM 3x Configurations
The table below shows the available 1080p configurations in 6 channel-mode with
SLSM 3 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be
plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

142
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#
REC # # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
3x

6-channel mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC
1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC

2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC

3 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

4 3 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLAY REC REC REC

1 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC

1 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC

1 2 3 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 2 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC

1 3 2 1,3 1,2 1,1

2 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

2,3 2,2 2,1 1,3 1,2 1,1

8-Channel mode
2 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 2,1 1,3 1,2 2,3 1,1 2,2

ChannelMax mode
1 1 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1 2 3 4 1,2 2 1,1 1,3

1 2 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 3 1,3 1,2 3 1,1 2

1 3 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 2 1,3 1,2 4 1,1 3

2 1 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 2,1 1,3 3 1,2 2,3 1,1 2,2

2 2 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 2,1 4 1,3 3 1,2 2,3 1,1 2,2

2 2 4 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 3 2 4 2,1 4 1,3 3 1,2 2,3 1,1 2,2

143
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 1080p 3G in 6-Channel Mode (1SLSM 3x +

1PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 3PH + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 6-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

144
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 1080p 3G in 8-Channel Mode (2SLSM 3x +

2PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 2SLSM 3PH + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

SLSM 4x Configurations
The table below shows the available 1080p configurations in 6-channel mode with
SLSM 4 Phase cameras on a XT3 6U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be
plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#
REC # # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
4x

6-channel mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC REC
1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 0 REC REC REC REC REC

2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 2 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC

3 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 0 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

145
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#
REC # # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
4x

1 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

1 1 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC

1 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

8-Channel mode
1 2 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 1,4 1,3 1,2 3 1,1 2

ChannelMax mode
2 0 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 1,4 2,4 1,3 2,3 1,2 2,2 1,1 2,1

Example in 1080p 3G in 6-Channel Mode (1SLSM 4x +

1PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 4PH + 1 PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 6-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

146
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example in 1080p 3G in ChannelMax Mode (2SLSM 4x +

2PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 2SLSM 4PH + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

SLSM 6x Configurations
The table below shows the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 6 Phase cameras
on a XT3 6U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC
# # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM
REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

6-channel mode
1 0 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC
1,6 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1

8-Channel mode
1 0 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,1 1,6

ChannelMax mode
1 1 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 1,4 1,3 2 1,2 1,6 1,1 1,5

1 2 2 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 2 1,4 3 1,3 2 1,2 1,6 1,1 1,5

147
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in 6-Channel Mode in 1080p 3G (1SLSM 6x)

The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 6PH need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 6-channel mode, only the primary channel of a codec module on the V3X
board is used, but the full capability of both channels of the V3X codec is used.

Note
In an equivalent configuration with a Dual Link connection interface, both
primary and secondary connectors on the rear panel are cabled. However,
only the primary channel on the codec module of the V3X board is used in full
1080p configurations.

Example in ChannelMax Mode in 1080p 3G (1SLSM 6x +

1REC + 2PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 6PH need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

148
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SLSM 8x Configurations
The table below shows the available 1080p configurations with SLSM 8 Phase cameras
on a XT3 6U server. It shows how 3G cables need to be plugged in onto the rear panel.
See section "Connectivity" on page 125 for more details about connectivity on the rear
panel and to the codec module of the V3X board.

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#
REC # # Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
SLSM REC PLAY Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
6x

ChannelMax mode
1 0 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1,5 1,4 1,3 1,8 1,2 1,7 1,1 1,6

1 2 1 PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1 1,5 3 1,4 2 1,3 1,8 1,2 1,7 1,1 1,6

Example in ChannelMax Mode in 1080p 3G (1SLSM 8x +

2REC + 1PLAY)
The BNC connectors to be used as record and play channels in a 1080p 3G
configuration 1SLSM 8PH need to be cabled as shown below.
In 1080p in 8-Channel or ChannelMax modes, both primary and secondary channels of
a codec module may be used independently with bandwidth restrictions. See the section
"Limitations" on page 124.

149
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.6. UHD-4K Configurations

3.6.1. General Information on UHD-4K

Configurations

Description
The UHD-4K format available on the EVS server is called UHDTV (Ultra-High Definition
TV). It is activated by setting the UHDTV-4K value for the Resolution parameter.
In UHD-4K, the image resolution is 3840 x 2160. An UHD-4K image can consist of four
1080p frames transported via four 3G-SDI links. Such an UHD-4K image therefore
requires 4 3G-SDI (BNC) connectorson the XT3 Server.

Requirements
The UHD-4K is available when, at least, the following hardware requirements are met:
• The V3X boards have V3X modules with a serial number ≥ 1300.
• The V3X base is a A4 revision, with a serial number ≥ 4130.
• The EVS server is equipped with SAS HDD disks, with at least revision 10K.5.
The UHD-4K is available when the following software requirements are met:
• The license code 27 is active on the EVS server, in combination with the code for the
configuration mode.
• The Resolution parameter is set to UHDTV-4K.
See section "Video and Reference Settings" on page 169.
• The Intra Codec parameter is set to DNxHD (forced value).
See section "Codec Settings" on page 174.
• The Interface parameter is set to a 3G value.
See section "Base Settings" on page 196.

150
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Limitations
Codec Limitations
• UHD-4K can only be used with the DNxHD Intra codecs.
Feature Limitations
• UHD-4K does not support 3D configurations.
• UHD-4K does not support the Mix on one channel feature.
• UHD-4K supports up to 16 embedded audio tracks.
Bitrate-Related Limitations
• UHD-4K Configurations with 2 channels are available with a max. bitrate of 242
Mbps in 50Hz (PAL) and 260 Mbps in 60 Hz (NTSC).
• UHD-4K Configurations with 3 channels are available with a max. bitrate of 200
Mbps in 50Hz (PAL) and 60 Hz (NTSC).
Operational Limitations
The following features are not available with UHD-4K:
• Timelines
• Graphics: Paint target, Split screen, Offside line (internal or external)
• Replace external Loop

Assignment Principles
An UHD-4K image consists of four 1080p frames which are transported via four 3G-SDI
links.
Each 1080p frame of an UHD-4K image is called an image quadrant.
Each image quadrant is assigned to its corresponding 3G-SDI link in the following
sequence:

TL= TR=
Top Left Top Right

BL= BR=
Bottom Left Bottom Right

151
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

3.6.2. UHD-4K Configurations (4U)

Available Configurations
The tables below show the available 4K configurations on a XT3 4U server. They show
the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board:

IN4/OUT1 IN3/OUT2 IN2/OUT3 IN1/OUT4

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Prim. Ch.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

2 0 REC REC REC 1BL REC REC REC REC REC

1BR 2BR 2BL 1TR 2TR 1TL 2TL

1 1 PLAY PLAY PLAY 1TR PLAY REC REC REC REC

1TL 1BL 1BR 1TR 1BR 1TL 1BL

0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY1TR PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1TL 2TL 2TR 1BL 2BL 1BR 2BR

Example in UHD-4K (1REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in an UHD-4K
configuration 1REC + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

152
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

3.6.3. UHD-4K Configurations (6U)

Available Configurations
The tables below show the available 4K configurations on a XT3 6U server. They show
the channel assignment at the level of the codec module of a V3X board:

IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

#REC #PLAY Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.

1 1 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC

1TL 1TR 1BL 1BR 1TR 1BR 1TL 1BL

1 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC
1TL 2TL 1TR 2TR 1BL 2BL 1BR 2BR 1TR 1BR 1TL 1BL

2 0 PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC

2TR 2TL 1BR 1BL 1TR 2BR 1TL 2BL

2 1 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
1TL 1BL 1TR 1BR 1BR 2BR 1BL 2BL 1TR 2TR 1TL 2TL

3 0 REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
2TR 3BR 2TL 3BL 1BR 3TR 1BL 3TL 1TR 2BR 1TL 2BL

0 2 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY

1TL 2BL 1TR 2BR 1BL 1BR 2TL 2TR

0 3 PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY PLAY
1TL 2BL 1TR 2BR 1BL 3TL 1BR 3TR 2TL 3BL 2TR 3BR

Example in UHD-4K (1REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in an UHD-4K
configuration 1REC + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

153
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example in UHD-4K (2REC + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a UHD-4K
configuration 2REC + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

Example in UHD-4K (1REC + 2PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in an UHD-4K
configuration 1REC + 2PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

3.6.4. UHD-4K SLSM Configurations (6U)

SLSM Principles
This section details the available multi-phase SLSM configurations on XT3 servers.
In SLSM configurations, a supermotion recorder of a two-phase camera accounts for
one logical channel, but corresponds to two physical channels.
In UHD-4K SLSM configurations, a supermotion recorder of a two-phase camera
corresponds to one logical channel, and is cabled on the primary link of a codec module.
It however uses both primary and secondary links of that codec module on the V3X
board.

154
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

About Tables and Examples

The tables in this section show the available SLSM configurations with an XT3 6U
server:
• The table shows the connector assignment at the level of the V3X when there is a
difference between the connection to the rear panel and to the V3X board. In all
cases, this is specified in the introduction.
• The examples show how the BNC connectors should be cabled for a selected
configuration.

XT3 6U Servers

Available Configurations
The table below shows the available 4K SLSM 2 Phase configurations with an XT3 4U
server.
A separate physical connector is used for each phase. The table shows how the BNC
connectors should be assigned on the rear panel. This corresponds to the channel
assignment at the level of the codec module of the V3X board:

#RE IN6/OUT1 IN5/OUT2 IN4/OUT3 IN3/OUT4 IN2/OUT5 IN1/OUT6

C
#RE #PLA
SLS Pri Pri Pri
C Y Sec. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec. Sec.
M m. m. m.
Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch. Ch.
2x Ch. Ch. Ch.

1 0 1 PLA PLA PLA PLA REC REC REC REC REC REC REC REC
Y Y Y Y 1,1B 1,2B 1,1B 1,2B 1,1T 1,2T 1,1T 1,2T
1TL 1BL 1TR 1BR R R L L R R L L

Example in UHD-4K SLSM (2xSLSM 2PH + 1PLAY)

The BNC connectors to be used as recorder and play channels in a UHD-4K
configuration with 2xSLSM 2PH + 1PLAY need to be cabled as shown below:

155
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4. Multicam Configuration

4.1. Overview on User Interfaces

4.1.1. Introduction

Preliminary Remarks

Configuration as Initial Step

Prior to using Multicam, the operator should set all necessary parameters in the
Multicam Configuration window. If clips are stored with certain parameters and the
operator wishes to change the parameter values afterwards, those clips and playlists will
not change.

Configuration with Caution

Most parameters are factory preset, and should not be modified without advice of
qualified EVS staff. Improper values for some parameters will prevent the proper
operation of the system.

Parameter Availability
Only the parameters or parameter values valid for the given server type, server chassis,
and active license codes are available for defining the various configurations.

General Comparison Between User Interfaces

You can configure the EVS server using one of the three available user interfaces:
• Multicam Configuration window in the server-based application
• Multicam Configuration window in the web-based interface
• Technical and Operational Setup menus in an EVS Remote Panel (if any)
The Multicam Configuration windows in the server-based and web-based interface are
almost identical.
In the Remote Panel, however, only the most used technical settings are available in the
Technical Setup menu, and all operational settings are available in the Operational
Setup menu.

156 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following table provides an overview on the features available in each user
interface:

Configuration Window

Technical Settings Operational Settings

Server-Based Yes Yes

Application (tabs 1-6) (tab 7-8)

Web-Based Yes Yes

Interface (tabs 1-6) (tab 7-8)

Remote Panel Yes (partly) Yes

(Technical Setup: F0) (Setup Menu: SHIFT+D)

Overview on Configuration Parameters

The first topic of each section in the Multicam Configuration chapter gives you an
overview on the parameters available in this section, and specifies whether you will find
the parameter:
• in the basic or advanced view in the server-based application and the web-based
interface
• in the Technical Setup, Operational Setup, or not at all on the Remote Control panel
The following list provides a hyperlink to all overview topics in the various sections:
• Server settings
• Channels settings
• Network settings
• Monitoring settings
• Protocol settings
• GPI settings
• Operations settings

4. Multicam Configuration 157

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Concurrent Modifications in the Remote Panel and the

Server-Based Application
When a parameter is modified with the Remote Panel, and that parameter is not in
conflict with the parameter modified in the Configuration page of the server-based
application, the following message will be displayed on the VGA.
'The configuration has been modified by another user without any
conflict. Your copy has been updated with these modifications.'
When a parameter is modified with the Remote Panel, and the parameter is in conflict
with the parameter modified in the Configuration page of the server-based application,
the following message will be displayed on the VGA or on the LCD display of the
Remote Panel. The configuration will be updated if the user agrees.
'The configuration has been modified by another user.
Do you want to load it and lose your modification?'

WARNING
When this message is displayed on the Remote Panel and the user answers
'No' to the message (Clear button), the modifications performed on the
Remote Panel will be preserved. The changes applied on the VGA will
however be loaded after the user leaves the operational setup menu, except if
the specific fields modified on the VGA have been modified and validated on
the Remote Panel after the message display.

4.1.2. Overview of the Multicam Configuration

Window

Introduction
In the server-based and web-based interfaces, all server settings related to each
configuration file are grouped in a single window: the Multicam Configuration window.
When the server is not running a given configuration, the Multicam Configuration
window allows you to define any of the configurations available in the Multicam Setup
window.
When the server is running a given configuration, the Multicam Configuration window
allows you to modify the settings of the running configuration.
The Multicam Configuration window is organized in a similar way in both user interfaces:
• It consists of seven tabs.
• Each tab contains one or more pages in the server-based application.
• Each tab displays all settings on a single page in the web-based interface.
• The settings on page/tab are organized in field groups having a dedicated name.

158 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Accessing the Multicam Configuration Window

In the Server-Based Application

To access the Multicam Configuration window from the Multicam Setup window when
the server is not running, proceed as follows:
1. Press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW key to respectively move up and down in
the list of configuration lines until the requested line is highlighted.
2. Press F8.
The Multicam Configuration window opens.
To access the Multicam Configuration window from the Clips or Playlist window when
the server is running, press SHIFT+F2.

In the Web-Based Interface

To access the Multicam Configuration window from the Multicam Setup window when
the server is not running, click the Edit icon for the configuration line you want to
configure. The Multicam Configuration window opens.
The Multicam Configuration window will directly be displayed on the web-based
interface when the server is running a given configuration. You will directly be able to
edit the settings for the running configuration.

Display Mode
The settings in the Multicam Configuration window have been categorized as basic or
advanced settings depending on whether they are commonly used or not.
Two display modes are consequently available:
• Basic mode
• Advanced mode
Selecting the basic mode will hide settings on some pages, or completely hide other
pages.
To change the display mode in the server-based application, press F3.
To change the display mode in the web-based interface, click on the display mode label

or .

4. Multicam Configuration 159

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

User Interfaces

Server-Based User Interface

The following screenshot presents the 1st tab, and 1st page of the Multicam
Configuration window in the server-based application, shown in advanced mode:
• The title bar displays the selected configuration, and specifies whether the
configuration has been launched (running) or not (not running).
• The selected tab is highlighted in pink.
• The current page and number of pages in the tab are specified in the top right
corner.
• The display mode (basic or advanced) is specified in the top right corner.

Web-Based User Interface

The following screenshot presents the 1st tab of the Multicam Configuration window of
an XT3 server in the web-based interface, shown in advanced mode:
• The top line displays the name of the selected configuration, and specifies whether
the configuration has been launched (running) or not (not running).
• The selected tab is displayed in a lighter gray color.
• The Display mode (basic or advanced) is specified on the top line.

160 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4. Multicam Configuration 161

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.1.3. Navigating and Editing in the Multicam

Configuration Window

In the Server-Based Application

Navigation Commands
The following table presents the commands to navigate in the Multicam Configuration
window:

Command description Command key

Selecting a given tab CTRL + tab number

Moving from one tab to the other LEFT ARROW / RIGHT

(when the tab is selected, i.e. rose highlighted) ARROW

Moving down/up in the pages of the active tab PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP

Moving down in the list of editable settings TAB

Moving up in the list of editable settings SHIFT + TAB

Toggling between Basic and Advanced display F3

mode

Editing Commands
The following table presents the commands to edit the configuration settings in the
Multicam Configuration window when the field has been selected (using the TAB key).
In text fields, you can directly type the requested value for a selected field.

Command description Command key

Increasing the value SPACEBAR

(or displaying the next value in the list)

Decreasing the value SHIFT+SPACEBAR

(or displaying the previous value in the list)

Moving the cursor position within a text field SHIFT+ RIGHT ARROW /
LEFT ARROW

Resetting the value of the selected setting F5

Resetting all values of all settings in the current tab CTRL+F5

for the selected configuration

Resetting all values of all settings in all tabs for the CTRL+SHIFT+F5
selected configuration

Applying changes ALT+A

Leaving without applying changes ESC, ENTER

162 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Enabling Values in a List

For some settings, you need to enable values in a list of displayed values. This is, for
example, the case with the selection of pages (receive pages, protect pages) in the
Operation tab.
The enabled pages are highlighted in blue, and the disabled pages are not highlighted.
To enable a list of values for a given setting, proceed as follows:
1. Select the list of values with the TAB key.
Once the list of values is selected, the enabled values stay highlighted in blue, and
the disabled values are highlighted in pink.
2. On the keyboard, type the digit (numbers/letter) you want to enable. They become
highlighted in blue.
3. Apply the changes with ALT+A, and confirm the action.

In the Web-Based Interface

Navigation and Editing Commands

The navigation and editing commands in the web-based interface are the commonly
used commands in a web-based interface. The command buttons available are the
following ones:

Command description Command key

Activating the Advanced display mode

Coming back to the Basic display mode

Applying changes

Canceling changes

Quit and return to the Setup module

(when no configuration is running)

4. Multicam Configuration 163

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

In Server- and Web-Based Interfaces

Display and Checks of Modified Values

Once modified, the field values are displayed in blue color as long as the changes have
not been applied. No check on inconsistent or incompatible field values are performed at
that stage.
When you apply the changes, the following occurs:
• The values you have modified are checked. If setting values are inconsistent, you
will get an error message at that stage.
• The validated values return to the standard color.
• The inconsistencies are displayed as follows:
◦ Inconsistent values are displayed in red.
◦ A warning message tells you which field value is problematic.
◦ The page containing the inconsistent field value is then displayed when you use
the server-based application.

4.1.4. Overview of the Setup Menus in the Remote

Panel

Introduction
When you work in LSM or XSense mode, the Technical and Operational Setup menus
available on the Remote Panel allow you to define:
• the commonly used technical settings in the Technical Setup menu
• all operational settings in the Operational Setup menu.
The values assigned to the settings are saved as soon as they are modified.

Accessing the Technical Setup Menu

To access the Technical Setup menu, press F0 from the Main Setup page.
The Technical Setup menu opens on the 1st page.
The Technical Setup menu is divided in sections and subsections, named by Tx.y where
x is the section number, and y the subsection number.
In all sections dedicated to a tab of the Multicam Configuration window in this manual,
you will find an overview table that lists the settings available in the Technical Setup
menu, as well as the sections where you will find them.

164 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Note
The Setup menu of the Remote Panel is dynamically adapted based on the
EVS server configuration and valid license codes. Consequently, the settings
available on the Remote Panel do not have a fixed position in the Setup
menu.

Accessing the Operational Setup Menu

To access the Operational Setup menu, proceed as follows:
1. If you are in Playlist mode, press RECORD first to exit this mode.
2. Press SHIFT + MENU to go to the Main menu:

3. Select Setup by pressing SHIFT + D to enter the Operational Setup menu.

The Operational Setup menu is divided in sections and subsections, named by x.y
where x is the section number, and y the subsection number.

4.1.5. Navigating and Editing in the Setup Menus

of the Remote Panel

Introduction
The way you navigate and edit settings is identical in the Technical Setup menu and
Operational Setup menu. The navigation and editing commands are explained below.

4. Multicam Configuration 165

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Navigation Commands
The following table presents the commands to navigate in the Setup menus of the
Remote Panel:

Command description Command key

Moving to another section when you are inside a section SHIFT+F_ key
corresponding to the
section

Moving to the next page inside a section F10

When you are on the last page of a section, you will go to
the 1st page of the next section.

Moving to the previous page inside a section F9

When you are on the first page of a section, you will go to
the last page of the previous section.

Exiting the Setup menu Menu

Scrolling through section pages with the jog wheel ENTER (when no
setting is selected) + jog

Editing Commands
The following table presents the commands to edit a setting in the Setup menus of the
Remote Panel:

Command description Command key

Selecting a setting in a section F_ key corresponding to

the requested setting

Modifying the setting value Turn the jog wheel

Validating the modification to a setting value ENTER

Restoring the default value for the selected setting CLEAR + F_ key
corresponding to the
requested setting

Restoring the default values on the entire Setup menu CLEAR + F0

Validating the changes in the Setup menu MENU

(to answer to the message when you try to leave the menu)

Canceling the changes in the Setup menu CLEAR

(to answer to the message when you try to leave the menu)

Staying in the Setup menu ENTER

(to answer to the message when you try to leave the menu)

166 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.1.6. Required Application Reboot

Introduction
Modifications to some parameters will only be applied after rebooting the application.
When you change one of the following parameters, a message will inform you that you
need to reboot Multicam.
Such parameters are summarized below, but the parameter description also specifies
when a reboot is required:

Tab Name Setting Name

Server tab Some video and reference settings:

• Field rate
• Resolution
• Timecode

Server tab All codec settings

Server tab All PC LAN settings (only editable from the Multicam Setup window)

Channels tab Some base settings:

• Inputs
• Outputs
• Base config

Channels tab One audio setting:

• Number of tracks

Channels tab One recorder setting:

• SD Autosense
• REC capacity

Network tab All XNet settings:

• Operation Mode
• Net name
• Net number
• Visibility
• XNet server

Network tab All Gigabit settings:

• Gigabit connection
• Gigabit IP configuration
• Gigabit prioritization

4. Multicam Configuration 167

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.2. Server Tab

4.2.1. Overview
The Server tab covers the settings related to video codecs and standards, time
reference, phase definition, interpolation activation, and PC LAN.
The table below presents the settings of the Server tab. A cross is displayed in the
corresponding column when the setting is available:
• in the basic or advanced display mode in the server-based and web-based
interfaces
• in the Technical Setup menu (T1.X) of the Remote Panel

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

Video and reference settings

Field rate X X –

Aspect ratio X X –

Resolution X X –

HDR Profile – X –

Color Gamut – X –

Timecode X X –

Sync PC Time to TC – X –

Genlock X X –

Codec Settings
(Intra / Proxy)

Codec X X –

Bitrate X X –

Horizontal Res./Recorded Lines – X –

Phase definition settings

SD output phase – X X

HD offset phase – X X

HD output phase – X X

SD offset phase – X X

Interpolation settings

Vertical interp. – X X

168 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

Four Lines – X X

PC LAN settings

IP Address X X –

Subnet Mask X X –

Default Gateway X X –

4.2.2. Video Codecs and Reference

Video and Reference Settings

User Interface
The Video and Reference settings are available on the Server tab in the server-based
application (1st page) and web-based interface. These settings are not available in the
Technical Setup menu of the Remote Panel.

WARNING
Most Video and Reference settings (all except Sync PC time and Genlock)
require an application reboot (ALT+Q from the operational windows) for
changes to be taken into account.

The following screenshot displays the Video and Reference settings defined on the
Server tab in the web-based interface:

Field Rate

Description Field frequency used (Hz).

Both field rate and resolution give the video standard.

Values 50.00 Hz (PAL) - default

59.94 Hz (NTSC)
59.94 Hz(J) (NTSC-J)

4. Multicam Configuration 169

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Aspect Ratio

Description Specifies the aspect ratio of the content provided on the input
video signal.

Values The following values are available:

In SD:
• 16:9
• 4:3
• 4:3 Letterbox: Black stripes are placed above and below
the active video to compensate for the full width.
• 16.9 Pillarbox: Black stripes are placed left and right of
the active video to fill in the missing pixels.
In HD:
• 16:9
• 16.9 Pillarbox

Default value 16:9

Resolution

Description Vertical resolution used (number of white-to-black and black-

to-white transitions that can be seen from the top to the
bottom of the picture) (pixel + type).
Both field rate and resolution correspond to the video
standard.
With an XT3 server, SD and HD video standards can be
available if the relevant license codes are activated.

Values In SD:
• 525i
• 625i
In HD:
• 720p
• 1080i
• 1080p (available with code 21 or 22)
In UHD-4K:
• UHDTV-4K (available with code 27)

170 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

HDR Profile

Availability The parameter is only available in advanced mode.

Description Specifies the OETF function (opto-electric transfer function)

used for High Dynamic Profile (HDR). HDR is a digital
technique of compositing and tone-mapping of images that
aims at extending the dynamic range of an image beyond the
native capability of the capturing device, in order to increase
the luminosity contrasts in a picture.

Values • None (SDR = Standard Dynamic Range)

• HLG (= Hybrid Log-Gamma, developed by BBC and NHK)
• PQ (= Perceptual Quantizer, developed by Dolby Lab.
Inc.)
• S-Log3 (developed by Sony)
• V-Log (developed by Panasonic)

Default value None (SDR)

NOTE
HDR is supported with 10-bit codecs in HD with the following bitrate
limitations:
With XT3 6U:
• 12 channels up to 200 Mbps
• 8 channels between 200 Mbps and 242 Mbps
• 6 channels above 242 Mbps
With XT3 4U:
• 8 channels up to 242 Mbps
• 4 channels above 242 Mbps

4. Multicam Configuration 171

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Color Gamut

Availability The parameter is only available in advanced mode.

Description Specifies the standard corresponding to the color space of the

incoming feeds. This metadata, to be set manually, does not
have a functional impact on the EVS server.

Values • Unknown: no color space is specified.

• rec. 601: corresponds to the color space used in SD
resolutions.
• rec. 709: corresponds to the color space usually used
with HDTV. Only available in HD and UHD-4K.
• rec. 2020: corresponds to the Wide Gamut color space
that offers a larger color range, usually used with UHDTV.
Only available in HD and UHD-4K.

Default value • rec. 601 (in SD)

• rec. 709 (in HD)

NOTE
Wide Color Gamut (rec. 2020) is supported with 10-bit codecs in HD with the
following bitrate limitations:
With XT3 6U:
• 12 channels up to 200 Mbps
• 8 channels between 200 Mbps and 242 Mbps
• 6 channels above 242 Mbps
With XT3 4U:
• 8 channels up to 242 Mbps
• 4 channels above 242 Mbps

Timecode

Description Status of the timecode signal delivered to the EVS server.

The timecode information is stored on a separate track from
the video.
It comes from the following source:
• LTC (Longitudinal Timecode) provided via the Timecode
IN connector on the EVS server rear panel

Values The timecode status can be: OK or Valid, BAD, LOST or

DRIFT (defined by the EVS server).
The timecode is given as hh:mm:ss:fr.

172 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Sync PC Time to TC

Description Specifies whether the PC time is synchronized with the

timecode, and how often the synchronization takes place.

Values Synchronization: Yes/No

Frequency: every 00h15 (not editable)

Genlock

Description Specifies the type and the status of the genlock signal, as well
as the frame synchronizer mode.

Values Type:
• Blackburst (always in SD)
• Tri-Sync
Status: (read-only - defined by the EVS server)
• Valid
• Bad
Mode:
• Studio: no correction of a shifted video signal
• Resync (default): resynchronization of a shifted video
signal

About Multi-Essence

Introduction
The XT3 server can encode, at a time, a record train in two different codec types, which
are called essences. The following essences are available: Intra and Proxy (Lo-Res) .
This process is seamless to the user, who will go on working as before with the EVS
server.
This section provides an overview of the multi-essence feature, and mainly specifies the
rules and restrictions you should take into account when you configure an XT3 server in
multi-essence.

NOTE
The LongGOP (XDCAM) essence is no longer supported from Multicam
16.00.

4. Multicam Configuration 173

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Essence Combinations
The essences can be combined as follows:
• Intra only
• Intra + Proxy

General Rules
• You will only see one record train per record channel and one clip per LSMID even if
the record trains and clips exist in several essences on the EVS server.
• A single clip is identical in all available essences.
• The Proxy essence cannot be used as a single essence on an EVS server.

Recording and Editing Rules

• When the server is configured in multi-essence mode, the clips are created in each
active essence.
• In general, all editing actions on clips are applied seamlessly on all active essences
of the clip.

Playout Rules
• The Intra essence is always played out.
• The Proxy essence is never played out.

Limitations With Proxy Codecs

Dolby E is not supported in Proxy essence. If audio channels are configured in Dolby E
in a multi-essence configuration with Proxy, the Proxy output will have no associated
audio.

NOTE
The Lo-Res audio is Mpeg-1 Layer II at 48 kHz sampling frequency.

Codec Settings

Introduction
The XT3 server can encode, at a time, a record train in an Intra codec and in the Proxy
codec.

174 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Possible Codec Sections

The codec settings are organized in two codec sections, which correspond to the
essences you can activate on the XT3 server.
Only the codec sections corresponding to the essences available on the EVS server will
be displayed. See section "Codec Availability" on page 178 for more information on the
availability of a given codec and/or codec section.
The following codec sections can be available:
• Codec Intra: It is always displayed as at least an Intra codec is available.
• Proxy: It is displayed when the Proxy essence is available. This essence is always
used together with a Hi-Res Intra codec.

User Interface
The Codec settings are available on the Server tab in the server-based application (1st
page) and web-based interface. These settings are not available in the Technical Setup
menu of the Remote Panel.

WARNING
The Codec settings require an application reboot (ALT+Q from the
operational windows) for changes to be taken into account.

The following screenshot displays the Codec settings defined on the Server tab in the
web-based interface:

4. Multicam Configuration 175

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

In Use

Description Specifies, in each essence section, whether the given

essence is encoded or not on the EVS server.

Values • Yes
• No

Default value Yes in Intra Codec section

No in Proxy section

Codec (Codec Intra)

Description Algorithm used to compress the video signal.

With Intra codecs, the compression techniques are performed
exclusiverly relative to information contained within the
current frame.

Values In SD:
• Mjpeg (SD)
• IMX
• DVCPro 50
In HD:
• Mjpeg EVS (HD)
• Mjpeg Standard (HD)
• Mpeg2-Intra (HD)
• DVCPro HD
• Avid DNxHD 120,185 or 185x (only in 50 Hz)
• Avid DNxHD 145, 220 or 220x (only in 59.94 Hz)
• Apple ProRes 422, 422 LT, 422 HQ
• AVC-Intra 100
• XAVC-Intra 100
See section "Codec Availability" on page 178 for detailed
information on codec availability.

Default values • IMX in SD

• Avid DNxHD 120 in HD 50Hz
• Avid DNxHD 145 in HD 59.94 Hz

NOTE
When the EVS server is configured to work in AVC-Intra codec, the XAVC-
Intra HD codec is also available in playout. The opposite is also applicable.

176 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Proxy

Description Algorithm used to compress the video signal in low resolution.

It is used for remote browsing purposes.
It is not possible to run an EVS server with the Proxy essence
only.

Values • Mjpeg

Bitrate

Description Number of megabits processed per second (Mbps).

The bitrate depends on the codec.

Values See section "Codec-Related Information" on page 179 for

detailed information on bitrates per codec.

Horizontal Res. (HD)

Description Number of white-to-black and black-to-white transitions that

can be seen from the left to the right of the picture (pixels).
The setting value depends on the selected video standard
and on the codec.

Values See section "Codec-Related Information" on page 179 for

detailed information on horizontal resolution for each video
standard and codec.

Recorded Lines (SD)

Description Number of lines recorded from the top to the bottom of the
picture.
The setting value depends on the selected video standard
and on the codec.

Values See section "Codec-Related Information" on page 179 for

detailed information on recorded lines for each video standard
and codec.

4. Multicam Configuration 177

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Codec Availability

Introduction
The codec availability mainly depends on whether the license code required for a given
codec is active or not.
The codec availability of the Proxy essence depends on additional hardware and
software requirements detailed below.

Requirement Overview

Codec Intra
The Intra codecs are available when the respective license code is active.
On an XT3 server, several license codes are available as standard codecs on the base
server hardware.

Codec Proxy
The Proxy settings, and the Mjpeg Proxy codec, are available when the license code 32
(Proxy) is granted on the server.

License Codes
The following table presents the codec availability for an XT3 server depending on the
license code.
The codecs corresponding to license codes 10 to 12 are installed by default on the XT3
server.

V3X Codec
SD codecs
Board

DVCPro 50 code 9

Mjpeg (SD) code 10

IMX code 11

Mjpeg (Proxy codec) code 32

V3X Codec
HD codecs
Board

Avid DNxHD® code 5

Apple ProRes code 6

(422, 422 LT, 422 HQ)

178 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

V3X Codec
HD codecs
Board

DVCPro HD code 8

Mjpeg Standard (HD) code 10

Mjpeg EVS (HD)

Mpeg-2 Intra (HD) code 12

AVC-Intra code 13
XAVC-Intra HD

Codec-Related Information

Bitrates and Recorded Lines in SD 525i

SD Mjpeg
Codec Type SD IMX (D10) DVCPro 50
Standard

Bitrate 20-100 Mbps 30; 40; 50 Mbps 50 Mbps

Default bitrate 30 Mbps 30 Mbps 50 Mbps

Recorded video 496 lines 512 lines 480 lines

lines (L16-23; L278-525) (L7-262; L270- (L23-262; L285-
default 525) 524)

480 lines
(L23-262; L286-525)

512 lines
(L7-262; L270-525)

Bitrates and Recorded Lines in SD 625i

SD Mjpeg
Codec Type SD IMX (D10) DVCPro 50
Standard

Bitrate 20-100 Mbps 30;40;50 Mbps 50 Mbps

Default bitrate 30 Mbps 30 Mbps 50 Mbps

Recorded video 576 lines 608 lines 576 lines

lines (L23-310; L336-623) (L7-310; L320- (L23-310; L335-
default 623) 622)

592 lines
(L15-310; L328-623)

608 lines
(L7-310; L320-623)

4. Multicam Configuration 179

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 720p (50 Hz)

HD AVC-Intra 100
HD Mjpeg HD Mpeg-2
Codec Mjpeg XAVC-Intra DVCPro HD
EVS Intra
Standard 100

Bitrate 20-320 20-320 20-260 111 100

(Mbps)

Default 100 100 100 111 100

bitrate

Horizontal 640 640 640 1280 960

Resolution

768 768 768

960 960 960

1024 1024 1024

1280 1280 1280 (default)

(default) (default)

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes 422 ProRes
115 175 175x (10b) 422 LT SQ 422 HQ

Bitrate (Mbps) 1-115 116-175 116-175 85 120 185

Default bitrate 115 175 175 85 120 185

Horizontal 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280

Resolution

180 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 720p (59.94 Hz)

HD AVC-Intra 100
HD HD Mpeg-2
Codec Mjpeg XAVC-Intra DVCPro HD
Mjpeg EVS Intra
Standard 100

Bitrate 20-260 20-260 20-260 111 100

(Mbps)

Default 100 100 100 111 100

bitrate

Horizontal 640 640 640 1280 960

Resolution

768 768 768

960 960 960

1024 1024 1024

1280 1280 (default) 1280 (default)

(default)

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
145 220 220x (10b) 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ

Bitrate 1-145 146-220 146-220 102 145 220

(Mbps)

Default 145 220 220 102 145 220

bitrate

Horizontal 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280 1280

Resolution

NOTE
The dynamic bitrate management system modifies compression tables for
each recorded field to keep the bitrate of the encoded stream as close as
possible to the target. A higher bitrate means better picture quality and less
storage capacity but a higher bandwidth is required. Improper values can
exceed disks performance, causing frozen pictures during playback.

WARNING
Some video formats allowed on an XT3 server create clips that are not
compatible with previous hardware revisions. When an incompatible format is
selected, a warning will be issued at application startup. In addition, the video
format information displayed on the Server tab of the Multicam Configuration
window indicates any incompatible information.

4. Multicam Configuration 181

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080i (50 Hz)

HD
HD HD AVC-Intra 100
Codec Mjpeg DVCPro HD
Mjpeg EVS Mpeg-2 Intra XAVC-Intra 100
Standard

Bitrate 20-260 20-260 20-260 111 100

(Mbps)

Default 100 100 100 111 100

bitrate

Horizontal 960 960 960 1920 1440

Resolution
1152 1152 1152

1280 1280 1280

1372 1372 1372

1440 1440 1440

1536 1536 1536

1600 1600 1600

1920 1920 1920

(default) (default) (default)

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
120 185 185x (10b) 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ

Bitrate 1-121 122-185 122-185 85 120 185

(Mbps)

Default 121 184 184 85 120 185

bitrate

Horizontal 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920

Resolution

182 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080i (59.94

Hz)

HD
HD HD Mpeg-2 AVC-Intra 100
Codec Mjpeg DVCPro HD
Mjpeg EVS Intra XAVC-Intra 100
Standard

Bitrate 20-260 20-260 20-260 111 100

(Mbps)

Default 100 100 100 111 100

bitrate

Horizontal 960 960 960 1920 1280

Resolution
1152 1152 1152

1280 1280 1280

1372 1372 1372

1440 1440 1440

1536 1536 1536

1600 1600 1600

1920 1920 1920

(default) (default) (default)

AVID
AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple
DNxHD
Codec DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
220x
145 220 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ
(10b)

Bitrate 1-145 146-220 146-220 102 145 220

(Mbps)

Default 145 220 220 102 145 220

bitrate

Horizontal 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920

Resolution

4. Multicam Configuration 183

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080p (50 Hz)

The values in the tables below are valid with maximum six 1080p channels.
Specific limitations are applicable with configurations having more than six channels in
1080p. See section "Limitations" on page 124.

AVC-Intra
AVID
AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple 100
DNxHD
Codec DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes XAVC-
365x
240 365 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ Intra
(10b)
100

Bitrate 1-242 243-367 243-367 170 245 367 222

(Mbps)

Default 242 367 367 170 245 367 222

bitrate

Horizontal 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920

Resolution

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in HD 1080p (59.94

Hz)

AVC-Intra
AVID
AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple 100
DNxHD
Codec DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes XAVC-
440x
290 440 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ Intra
(10b)
100

Bitrate 1-291 292-440 292-440 204 293 440 222

(Mbps)

Default 291 440 440 204 293 440 222

bitrate

Horizontal 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920 1920

Resolution

184 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Bitrates and Horizontal Resolutions in UHD-4K (50 and

59.94 Hz)
The following table presents the bitrate per quadrant. The total bitrate for one channel
therefore corresponds to four times the values specified in this table.

Field rate 50 Hz 59.94 Hz

AVID AVID
Codec
DNxHD DNxHD

Bitrate (Mbps) 100-242 (x4) 100-260 (x4)

Default bitrate 242 (x4) 260 (x4)

Horizontal Resolution 3840 3840

4. Multicam Configuration 185

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Bitrates for SLSM Configurations in HD 720p/1080i

The following table presents the available codecs in HD 720p/1080i and the
corresponding maximum bitrates (Mbps) per SLSM phase for SLSM configurations.
The total record bitrate is the configured bitrate multiplied by the number of phases.
The values in the tables below are valid with maximum 12 physical channels in SLSM
configurations. Specific limitations are applicable with SLSM configurations having more
than 12 physical channels. See section "Limitations" on page 68.

AVC-Intra
HD HD
HD Mpeg- 100 DVCPro
Codec Mjpeg Mjpeg
2 Intra XAVC-Intra HD
EVS Standard
100

SLSM 4x 185 185 185 111 100

50/59.94 Hz

SLSM 6x - 120 120 120 111 100

50/59.94 Hz

SLSM 8x - 120 120 — 111 100

50/59.94 Hz

SLSM 10x - 100 100 — — —

50/59.94 Hz

SLSM 16x - — — — — —
50/59.94 Hz

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
120 185 185x 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ

SLSM 4x - 120 185 185 85 120 185

10x - 50 Hz

SLSM 16x - 100 — — — — —

50 Hz

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
145 220 220x 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ

SLSM 4x - 10x 145 220 220 102 145 220

- 59.94 Hz

SLSM 16x - 100 — — — — —

59.94 Hz

186 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Bitrates for SLSM Configurations in HD 1080p

The following table presents the available codecs in HD 1080p, and the corresponding
maximum bitrates (Mbps) per SLSM phase for SLSM configurations.
The total record bitrate is the configured bitrate multiplied by the number of phases.
The values in the tables below are valid with maximum 6 physical channels in SLSM
configurations. Specific limitations are applicable with SLSM configurations having more
than 6 physical channels. See section "General Information on 1080p Configurations"
on page 124.

AVC-Intra 100
Codec
XAVC-Intra 100

SLSM 4x - 50 or 59.94 Hz 222

SLSM 6x - 50 or 59.94 Hz

SLSM 8x - 50 or 59.94 Hz

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
240 365 365x 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ

SLSM 4x - 242 367 367 170 245 367

50Hz

SLSM 6x - 50 200 — — — — —
Hz

SLSM 8x - 50 180 — — — — —
Hz

AVID AVID AVID Apple Apple Apple

Codec DNxHD DNxHD DNxHD ProRes ProRes ProRes
290 440 440x 422 LT 422 SQ 422 HQ

SLSM 4x - 291 440 440 204 293 440

59.94 Hz

SLSM 6x - 200 — — — — —
59.94 Hz

SLSM 8x - 180 — — — — —
59.94 Hz

4. Multicam Configuration 187

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Properties of the Proxy Codecs

Property Mjpeg

Bitrate (Mbps) 3 or 5

Default bitrate 3

Resolution SD NTSC 352 x 240 pixels

CIF 352 x 288 pixels
CIF is used in all modes other than SD NTSC

4.2.3. Phase Definition Settings

User Interface
The Phase Definition settings are available on the Server tab in the server-based
application (2nd page) and web-based interface in the advanced mode.
The following screenshot displays the Phase Definition settings with a Blackburst
genlock:

The following screenshot displays the Phase Definition settings with a Tri-Sync
genlock:

SD Output Phase

Availability The parameter is only available with a Blackburst genlock.

Description Allows you to define a phase correction for the SD output.

The value is adjusted by steps of 37 ns, which corresponds to
1/2 pixel of SD.

Values Steps of half pixels (37 ns) from - 12000 to 15000.

Default 0

188 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

HD Offset Phase

Availability The parameter is only available when a Blackburst genlock

and an HD video standard are used.

Description Allows you to define a shift of phase of the HD output

compared to the SD output.
The value is adjusted by steps of 13.5 ns, which corresponds
to 1/2 pixel of HD.

Values Steps of half pixels (13.5 ns) from - 1000 to 1000.

Default value 0

HD Output Phase

Availability The parameter is only available with a Tri-Sync genlock.

Description Allows you to define a phase correction for the HD output.

The value is adjusted by steps of 13.5 ns , which corresponds
to 1/2 pixel of HD.

Values Steps of half pixels (13.5 ns) from - 30000 to 32000

Default value 0

SD Offset Phase

Availability The parameter is only available when a Tri-Sync genlock is

used.

Description Allows you to define a shift of phase of the SD output

compared to the HD output.
The value is adjusted by steps of 37 ns, which corresponds to
1/2 pixel of HD.

Values Steps of half pixels (13.5 ns) from - 400 to 400.

Default value 0

WARNING
• The SD phase is always adjusted according to the SDI outputs. Internal
CVBS outputs have a delay of 48 x 37 ns compared to the corresponding
SDI outputs.
• The internal CVBS outputs cannot be used to feed directly a vision mixer
or any equipment performing video effects, since the phase of the chroma
subcarrier is not adjustable internally.

4. Multicam Configuration 189

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.2.4. Interpolation Settings

User Interface
The Interpolation settings are available on the Server tab in the server-based application
(2nd page) and web-based interface in the advanced mode.
The following screenshot displays the Interpolation settings defined on the Server tab in
the web-based interface:

General Description
The interpolation process aims at reducing the vertical jitter of the pictures that is
present during slow-motion replays. This vertical jitter is actually caused by a violation of
the frame parity when playing back the pictures at less than 100 % speed.
The process consists in re-building new frames to produce a more transparent result.
These frames have to be interpolated, that is calculated by making suitably weighted
averages of adjacent lines.
There are two interpolation modes: the two-line interpolator and the four-line
interpolator. They are not mutually exclusive:
• The two-line interpolator reduces the vertical jitter, but also the vertical bandwidth.
• The four-line interpolator makes it possible to have perfectly steady pictures, but
reduces even more the vertical bandwidth.

NOTE
All VTRs use interpolation in PLAY VAR mode.

Vertical Interp. (Vertical Interpolation)

Description Enables or disables the two-line interpolation process.

Values • No (default)
• Yes

190 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Four Lines

Description Enables or disables the four-line interpolation process.

Values • No (default)
• Yes

4.2.5. PC LAN Settings

User Interface
The PC LAN settings allow the H3XP board of an EVS server to communicate and
exchange information with other EVS hardware on a setup.
The PC LAN settings are displayed on the Server tab in the server-based application
(2nd page) and web-based interface in the advanced mode.
The following screenshot displays the PC LAN settings defined on the Server tab in the
web-based interface:

NOTE
The PC LAN settings are read-only in the Multicam Configuration window.
You can modify them in the Multicam Setup window, using the Set LAN PC
address command. See section "Setting the Server PC LAN Connection" on
page 28 for more information.

IP Address

Description IP address to connect to the port #1 of the internal switch

module on the H3XP board on the server.
The status of the PC LAN connection(s) is specified next to
the IP address on the web-based interface, and in a separate
parameter on the server-based interface.
When the redundancy is enabled, the status of both PC LAN
connections is specified.

Values The IP addresses [Link] and [Link] are not

allowed.
The connection status can be Up or Down.

4. Multicam Configuration 191

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Subnet Mask

Description Range of logical addresses within the address space

assigned to port #4 of the internal switch module.

Default Gateway

Description IP address of the router on the network that the port #4 of the
internal switch module can use as an access point to external
networks.

4.2.6. Domain Name System Settings

User Interface
The Domain Name System settings allow an EVS server to retrieve from a DNS server
in the same PC LAN network the address of the available NMOS Registry and Discovery
Instances. The EVS server will register itself to one of these instances using unicast
messages and will retrieve information about other NMOS Nodes.
The Domain Name System settings are displayed on the Server tab in the server-based
application (2nd page) and web-based interface in the advanced mode.
The following screenshot displays the Domain Name System settings defined on the
Server tab in the web-based interface:

NOTE
Apart from the NMOS Unicast parameter, the Domain Name System settings
are read-only in the Multicam Configuration window. You can modify them in
the Multicam Setup window, by pressing L. See section "Configuring a DNS
Server Connection" on page 30 for more information.

192 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

NMOS Unicast

Description Allows to enable or disable NMOS Unicast Mode.

Values • Disabled (Default): The EVS server sends multicast

messages to make itself known to other NMOS Nodes in
the network.
• Enabled: The EVS server retrieves the IP address of the
Registry and Discovery Service from the DNS-SD service.
The registry and discovery is based on unicast messages.

If no DNS server IP address (primary or secondary) or DNS

server search domain has been defined, you cannot enable
Unicast Mode.

When you change the NMOS Unicast parameter, a message

will inform you that you need to reboot Multicam.

Primary

Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

Values Default value: [Link].

Secondary

Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Values Default value: [Link].

Search Domain

Description Specifies the search domain of the DNS server.

4. Multicam Configuration 193

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.3. Channels Tab

4.3.1. Channels

Overview
The table below presents the settings of the Channels tab. A cross is displayed in the
corresponding column when the setting is available:
• in the basic or advanced display mode in the server-based and web-based
interfaces. In the web-based interface, the settings are all displayed on one page.
• in the Technical Setup menu (T2.X) of the Remote Panel.
The Channels tab includes the settings related to video and audio channels, type and
configuration of recorders, audio format and audio-video synchronization parameters.

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

Base settings

Inputs X X X

Outputs X X X

Base config X X X

3D X X X

TwinRec X X X

Interface X X X

Dual LSM Mode X X X

Available Inputs Op 1 X X X

SLSM settings

Number of cameras X X X

SLSM speed X X X

on 3G-SDI X X X

Parity X X X

Port settings

RS422 #1-#6 X X X

VIA Controller Settings

IPD-VIA X X

Channels and control settings

OUT1-6 / IN1-12 X X X

194 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

Name X X X

Main ctrl X X X

Sec. ctrl – X X

Mode – X X

OSD – X –

Audio I/Os settings

MADI X X X

Analog X X X

Digital X X X

Audio settings

Number of tracks X X X

Audio full scale – X X

Ancillary mode – X X

Sample rate conv. – X X

Audio monitoring settings X X X

Mon #1-#4 X X X

Advanced audio settings (Inputs) – X –

Advanced audio settings – X –

(Embedded outputs)

Advanced audio settings (Digital – X –

AES/EBU outputs)

Advanced audio settings (Analog – X –

outputs)

Advanced audio settings (MADI – X –

outputs)

Recorder settings

Loop recording – X X

Clip Capacity – X X

Rec auto start – X X

SD Autosense – X –

4:3 conversion – X –

Rec capacity – X X

SD –> HD conversion – X –

4. Multicam Configuration 195

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

Mix on one channel setting

OUT1-6 – X X

Timecode settings

LTC – X –

User – X X

Primary TC – X X

SMPTE 334M packets

management settings

Decoding – X X

Encoding – X X

Custom 1 / 2 – X –

SD OUT Encoding – X –

Timecode insertion settings

IN Loop settings – X –

HD OUT settings – X –

SD OUT settings – X –

Base Settings

User Interface
The base settings allow defining the main characteristics of a configuration as regards
play and record channels.

WARNING
Some base settings (Inputs, Outputs Base config.) require an application
reboot (ALT+Q from the operational windows) for changes to be taken into
account.

These fields are available in the following interfaces:

• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the basic and advanced
display mode on the server- and web-based interfaces
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X)

196 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following screenshot displays the Base settings defined on the Channels tab in the
web-based interface:

Inputs (1 SLSM = 1 Input)

Description Number of logical record channels in the given configuration,

including the SLSM recorders.
The partition of the disk storage between these channels, and
the advanced audio settings are automatically adapted to the
number of record channels.
One SLSM recorder accounts for one input whatever the
number of phases.

Values The number of supported channels depends on the chassis,

and the mode:
• on XT3 6U: 0-12 (Spotbox), 1-12 (LSM)
• on XT3 4U: 0-8 (Spotbox), 1-8 (LSM)
See section "About Supported Configurations" on page 52 for
more information on number of record channels and on
supported configurations.

Outputs

Description Number of logical play channels in the given configuration.

Values The number of supported channels depends on the chassis,

and the mode:
• on XT3 6U and XT3 4U: 0-6 (Spotbox), 1-6 (LSM/XSense)
See section "About Supported Configurations" on page 52 for
more information on number of record channels and on
supported configurations.

4. Multicam Configuration 197

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Base Config.

Description Mode the EVS server is working in.

The base configurations available depend on the server type,
and on the valid license codes.

Values • Multicam LSM:

mode where the EVS server is controlled by the Remote
Control Panel or from the Multicam production screens.
License codes: 103 ...109 + 111 and/or 112

• Replay-Only LSM:
restricted Multicam LSM mode without playlist
management, split audio, nor support of hypermotion
cameras.
License codes: 103 ...109

• Video Delay:
mode where the server is used to play out the input with a
video delay.
License codes: 101 + 127

• Spotbox:
mode where the EVS server can be controlled by industry-
standard protocols: Sony BVW75, VDCP, Odetics, DD35,
EVS’ AVSP, IPDP, EditRec or LinX API, or from the
Multicam production screens.
License codes: 101 + 127

• XSense:
mode where the EVS server can be controlled by the
XSense Remote Panel or from the Multicam production
screens.
License codes: 96 + 101 and/or 103 ... 109 + 111 and/or
112

• Server:
mode where the EVS server can only be controlled by the
supported industry-standard protocols, but not from the
Multicam production screens.
License codes: 101 (without 127)

• F&K Dual Spotbox:

Specific mode in which the EVS server can be used as a
Fill & Key server. It requires the license code 97 (F&K
Dual) and the Dual (3D) value to be selected in the
Interface field in the Base settings.
In this base configuration, the EVS server can be
controlled by industry-standard protocols: Sony BVW75,
VDCP, Odetics, DD35, EVS’ AVSP, IPDP, EditRec or
LinX API, or from the Multicam production screens.
License codes: 97

198 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

• F&K Dual XSense:

Specific mode in which the EVS server can be used as a
Fill & Key server. It requires the license code 97 (F&K
Dual) and the Dual (3D) value to be selected in the
Interface field in the Base settings.
In this base configuration, the EVS server can be
controlled by the XSense Remote Panel or from the
Multicam production screens.
License codes: 97

Default value Multicam LSM

TwinRec

NOTE
See section "TwinRec Feature" on page 202 for full information on this
feature, and the availability of the associated parameter.

Availability The parameter is only available in specific conditions, and

with the license code 33 (TwinRec option).

Description Activates the TwinRec feature. This feature makes it possible

to ingest two record channels per codec module, and
therefore allows 12 record channels on a 6U EVS server.

Values Yes / No (default).

3D

Availability The parameter is only with the license code 23 for 3D Dual
Link, and license code 24 for 3D 3G.

Description Activates the 3D option, using the Dual Link or the 3G-SDI
standard. This option makes it possible to use the server to
record and play back 3D video.

Values Yes / No (default).

4. Multicam Configuration 199

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Interface

Availability The parameter is only available with one of the following

license code active:
• code 21 (Dual Link interface in 1080p)
• code 22 (3G-SDI interface in 1080p)
• code 23 (Dual Link interface in 3D)
• code 24 (3G-SDI interface in 3D)
• code 27 (UHD-4K resolution)
• code 97 (Dual Link interface in Fill&Key)

Description Defines the interface the EVS server will use in 3D, 1080p, or
with UHD-4K resolutions :
• The HD-SDI interface consists of a HD-SDI serial link
and provides a bitrate of 1.485 Gbit/s.
• The Dual Link interface consists of a pair of HD-SDI
serial links and provides a bitrate of 2.970 Gbit/s.
• The 3G-SDI interface consists of a single serial link that
provides 2.970 Gbit/s.

Values The following values are possible, but their availability

depends on several conditions:
• HD-SDI: HD-SDI connection for 720p/1080i.
• Dual: Dual Link for 1080p
• Dual (3D): Dual Link for 3D
◦ available with code 23 or 97 + 3D setting to Yes
• 3G Level-A: 3G-SDI for 1080p in one 3G stream (native
file interoperability)
◦ available with code 22 or 27 + 1080p resolution
• 3G Level-B: 3G-SDI for 1080p in two HD streams (native
file interoperability)
◦ available with code 22 or 27 + 1080p resolution
• 3G (3D): 3G-SDI for 3D
◦ available with code 24 + 3D setting to Yes

Default value HD-SDI

WARNING
Only the configurations explicitly allowed by the license codes can be started.
For instance, if a user has code 22 (1080p 3G) and 23 (3D Dual-Link), he
cannot start the server in 3D 3G although he can select 3G and 3D Dual-Link
in the Multicam Configuration window. To enable 3D 3G configurations to be
started, code 24 must be active.

NOTE
Clips recorded with the Interface parameter in one mode (Level-A, Level-B, or
Dual) are playable in another mode (Level-A, Level-B, or Dual).

200 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Dual LSM Mode

NOTE
See section "Dual LSM Feature" on page 203 for full information on this
feature, and the availability of this parameter.

Availability The parameter is only available in specific conditions, with the

license code 116 (Dual LSM option).

Description Activates the Dual LSM feature. This feature makes it

possible for two LSM operators to work independently on the
same server on their LSM Remote Panel(s).

Values Yes / No (default).

Available Inputs Op 1

Availability The parameter is only available in specific conditions, in

advanced mode, and with the license code 116 (Dual
LSM option).

Description Assigns a number of recorders to the Operator #1 when

working in Dual LSM mode. The remaining recorders are
automatically assigned to the Operator #2.

Values 1 to 7 (depending on the number of inputs defined)

Default value Half of the total inputs (rounded up in case of uneven number
of inputs). For example:
• In case of 4 inputs: Op.1 is assigned 2 inputs by default.
• In case of 5 inputs: Op.1 is assigned 3 inputs by default.

4. Multicam Configuration 201

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

TwinRec Feature

Introduction
The TwinRec feature allows the use of both record channels of each codec module.
Therefore, you can ingest two record channels per codec module, which means 12
record channels on a 6U EVS server fitted with 3 codec boards. This feature is mainly
applicable to entertainment shows.
When you use the TwinRec feature, you will wire all main (J8) and secondary (J5) record
channels, but set the number of inputs to 6 (not to 12) as only the main channels are
displayed in the Multicam Configuration window. Consequently, the configuration of the
main channels are automatically applied to the corresponding secondary channels.
The 12 recorded channels could then be streamed through a 10 GbE connection directly
to an external storage or nearline, using Xsquare.
The TwinRec feature can be activated via the TwinRec parameter available in the
Channels tab, Base Settings section. See section "Base Settings" on page 196.

Availability
The TwinRec feature, and its associated parameter, are available and displayed in the
following conditions:
• on the XT3 6U and XT3 4U servers.
• with valid license codes 33 (TwinRec) and 23 (3D Dual)
• with a Spotbox base configuration (Base Settings section)
The TwinRec parameter can only be activated when all the following conditions are met:
• The Resolution parameter is set to 720p or 1080i (Server tab, Video and Reference
section).
• The Intra only or Intra + Proxy mode is active (Server tab, Codec section).
• The EVS server runs a 6 IN-0 OUT or 4 IN-0 OUT channel configuration (Base
Settings section).
• The 3D parameter is set to No (Base Settings section).
• The Interface parameter is set to Dual (Base Settings section).
• In the SLSM settings, the Number of cameras parameter is set to 0 (Base Settings
section).
A message will warn the user if one of the above-mentioned conditions is not fulfilled.

202 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Limitations
The following limitations are applicable to the TwinRec feature as the configuration of
the main channels is applied to the corresponding secondary channels:
• The TwinRec function is only available in HD only, in intra-frame codecs.
• The audio is only recorded on the main channels, not on the secondary channels.
When the feeds are exported to an external storage, Xsquare will however duplicate
the audio of the main channel to the secondary channel.
• The embedded audio is mapped to the main channel.
• The audio monitoring is performed on the main channels only.
• Only the main channels can be seen in the internal multiviewer.
• In the Clip screen, the clips of the secondary channels are hidden behind the clips of
the main channels.
• When GPIs are used, the behavior of the secondary channel will be exactly the
same as that of the associated main channel.

Dual LSM Feature

Introduction
The Dual LSM feature allows two LSM operators to work independently with their own
LSM Remote Panel on the same EVS server, defining some operational settings
independently from each other.
The Dual LSM mode can be used in specific conditions, with specific configurations in
Multicam LSM or Replay-Only LSM, as detailed below.
You can activate the Dual LSM mode via the Dual LSM mode parameter available in
the Base Settings section in the conditions specified below.

Availability
The Dual LSM feature, and the corresponding parameter, are available in the following
conditions:
• on the XT3 6U servers with the license code 34 for ChannelMax configurations in
Multicam LSM mode or Replay-Only LSM mode.
• with a valid license code 116 (Dual LSM).
• with a limited number of configurations, as listed in "Supported Configurations".
• with SD/HD configurations.

4. Multicam Configuration 203

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Supported Configurations
The Dual LSM feature is supported in Multicam LSM and Replay-Only LSM mode
(Base settings, Base Config parameter) with the configurations identified with 2LSM in
the relevant configuration tables:
• Standard configurations in 720p/1080i
• SLSM 2x configurations in 720p/1080i
• SLSM 2x 3G configurations in 720p/1080i
• SLSM 3x configurations in 720p/1080i
The parameter Available Inputs Op1 (Base settings) allows you to define the number
of recorders assigned to Operator 1. The remaining recorders are automatically
allocated to Operator 2. See section "Available Inputs Op 1" on page 201.

LSM Remote Panel Association

The association of LSM Remote Panels is fixed and defined as follows:

Hypermotion
LSM Operator #1 LSM Operator #2
(LSM Op #2)

2 LSM Remote 1 1 -

3 LSM Remote 2 1 -

3 LSM Remote 1 1 1

4 LSM Remote 2 2 -

5 LSM Remote 2 2 1

When an operator has access to two LSM Remote Panels, they can turn the second
Remote to idle or back to active on the spot by changing the remote allocation in the
main menu (F1 or F2 keys). When a Remote Panel is idle, all buttons are off and a
message is displayed on LCD screen.

Main Characteristics
The Dual LSM mode has following main characteristics:
• Both operators share the clips and playlist pages.
• A set of operational parameters is duplicated. Each operator can therefore define
the duplicated parameters for their own needs without interfering with the second
operator.
The duplicated parameters are added in a separate page (page 8) in the Multicam
Configuration window. See section "Op-Shared Tab versus Op-1/2 Tab" on page
312.

204 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

• On the LSM Remote Panel, the operators work by default with a predefined set of
camera angles, or can also decide to work with a custom set of camera angles.
However, he cannot work with more camera angles than initially assigned to him.
Refer to the Multicam Operation manual.

Limitations in Multicam LSM Configurations

The following limitations are applicable to the Dual LSM feature used with Multicam LSM
configurations:
• The Mix on one channel feature is not supported with the configurations available
for Dual LSM.
• The standard mix function using the PGM/PRV channel is available on the first two
PGMs of each operator.
• The Playlist function is available simultaneously for both operators, with the
following limitations for the LSM operator #2:
◦ No Clear Unavailable feature which affects all playlists
◦ No Replace feature which uses PGM1 and Loop IN.
• The Timeline feature is available only in Multicam LSM mode, and solely to one
operator. You can define which operator has access to the timeline feature with the
TL Operator parameter in the Operation page, Timeline Settings (See section "TL
Operator" on page 334).
• The Paint and Target features are only available on LSM operator #1.
• The control of Hypermotion Cameras is only available on the LSM operator #2.

Limitations in Replay-Only LSM Configurations

The following limitations are applicable to the Dual LSM feature used with Replay-Only
LSM configurations:
• The Mix on one channel feature is not supported with the configurations available
for Dual LSM.
• The standard mix function using the PGM/PRV channel is available on the first two
PGMs of each operator.
• The Paint and Target features are only available on LSM operator #1.
• The Playlist and Timeline functions are not available.
• The control of Hypermotion Cameras is not supported.

SLSM Settings

User Interface
The SLSM settings allow you to define the parameters specific to SLSM recorders.

4. Multicam Configuration 205

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

These fields are available in the following interfaces:

• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the basic and advanced
display mode on the server- and web-based interfaces
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X)

WARNING
The SLSM settings are only available if the license code 110 (Supermotion) or
26 (U-Motion) is valid.

The following screenshot displays the SLSM settings defined on the Channels tab in the
web-based interface:

Number of Cameras

Description Number of SLSM cameras in the given configuration.

An SLSM camera corresponds to one logical record channel.

Values The maximum number of cameras depends on the SLSM

speed, and on the total number of record channels.
Range of values: 0-4

Default value 0

SLSM Speed

Description Field rate at which the SLSM camera records the incoming
feeds, expressed in multiples of the standard field rate of 50
fields/sec (50Hz) or 60 fields/sec (59.95 Hz).

Values 2x, 3x, 4x,6x, 8x, 10x, 16x

Default value 2x

206 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

On 3G-SDI

Availability This setting is only available with a 720p or 1080i resolution.

Description Specifies whether two SLSM phases are connected to the

EVS server using a 3G-SDI interface consisting of a single
serial link.

Values Yes / No (default)

Parity

Availability This setting is displayed in SD configurations.

Description Specifies whether the identical or alternate parity is applied.

Values • Identical
• Alternate

Default value Alternate

Port Settings

User Interface
The port settings allow assigning the RS422 ports to the various external controllers
(EVS or third-party) that will communicate with the EVS server.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the basic and advanced
display mode of the server- and web-based interfaces
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X)
The following screenshot displays the Port settings defined on Channels tab in the web-
based interface:

4. Multicam Configuration 207

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

RS422 #1 - #6

Description Specifies what type of device/controller is connected to each

RS422 port of the EVS server.

Values The following values can be available if the required license

codes are active:
• EVS Remote for LSM Remote Panel (code between 103
and 109).
• EVS Remote for XSense Remote Panel (code between
103 and 109 or code 96)
• EVS IPDP (code 120 or 121)
• Sony BVW75 (code 118)
• XtenDD35 (code 118)
• Odetics (and 'Odetics FK') (code 119)
• VDCP (and 'VDCP FK') (code 119)
• EVS AVSP (code 120 or 121)
• Edit Rec (code 122)
• LinX (code 123)

NOTE
Odetics FK and VDCP FK are not available directly from the Port setting, but
when the Odetics or VDCP protocols are assigned to an RS422 port, the Fill
and Key modes are available on the Main Ctrl field in the Channels and
Control settings.

Channels and Control Settings

User Interface
The Channel and Control settings mainly allow specifying which controllers (main and
possibly secondary) have the hand on which play or record channels.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the basic and advanced
display mode of the server- and web-based interfaces.
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X)

208 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following screenshot displays the Channel and Control settings defined on the
Channels tab in the web-based interface:

Name

Description User-defined name for play or record channel. This name will
be used for the OSD, and in the IPDirector application suite.
The name can contain maximum 24 characters.

Main ctrl (Main Controller)

Description Name of the main device/controller allowed to control the

given play or record channel.

Values For a controller to be available in the list of values, it must first

be assigned to an RS422 port in the port settings.
In addition, rules specific to each controller apply to the
assignment of the controller (used alone or in combination
with other controllers) to play or/and record channels. See
section "Rules for Controller Assignment" on page 211 for
more information.
An error message will be displayed to warn you in case of a
wrong protocol selection or protocol combination, and the
fields that contain errors will be highlighted in red.

4. Multicam Configuration 209

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Sec. ctrl (Secondary Controller)

Description Name of the secondary device/controller allowed to control

the given play or record channel.

Values For a controller to be available in the list of values, it must first

be assigned to an RS422 port in the port settings.
In addition, rules specific to each controller apply to the
assignment of the controller (used alone or in combination
with other controllers) to play or/and record channels. See
section "Rules for Controller Assignment" on page 211 for
more information.
An error message will be displayed to warn you in case of a
wrong protocol selection or protocol combination, and the
fields that contain errors will be highlighted in red.

Mode

Description Specifies how the control on the given play or record channel
is managed between the main and secondary controllers,
when it is possible to define main and secondary controllers.

Values Two control modes are possible:

• Exclusive mode:
The main controller can decide at any time to pass the
control to, or to retrieve the control from the secondary
controller.
• Parallel mode:
Any of both controllers can take the control as long as the
other controller is not executing a command. The control
can thus be freely passed on from one controller to the
other.

OSD

Description Specifies which device (main or secondary controller) will

manage the OSD display characters in parallel mode.

Values Two values are possible:

• Main: The OSD display is managed by the main
controller.
• Sec.: The OSD display is managed by the secondary
controller.

210 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

VIA Controller Settings

Introduction
The VIA Controller settings allow you to activate the control of the server's record and
play channels by IPD-VIA.
This field is available in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the basic
and advanced display mode of the server- and web-based interfaces.

IPD-VIA

Availability The parameter is only available with the license code 99 and with
all base configs.

Description This option makes it possible to let IPD-VIA control all the server's
channels.
The control by IPD-VIA comes in addition to the already
configured serial controllers.

Values Yes / No (default).

Rules for Controller Assignment

Main Rules for XT3 server

On an XT3 server, the following main rules are applicable:
• In a Multicam LSM base configuration:
◦ All Remote Panels must be the first in the list of main controllers, without gap. It
is not allowed to have another controller preceding a Remote Panel in this list.
◦ A Remote Panel has to be assigned as main controller of the record channels.
However, an even number of protocol primary controllers is allowed for play
channels in Dual-LSM configurations.
◦ Other controllers can be assigned as secondary controllers to PGMs taking into
account the protocol-specific rules.
◦ A record channel cannot have a secondary controller.
◦ No more than 4 play channels on an EVS server can be assigned to Remote
Panels.
◦ No more than 3 play channels can be assigned to one Remote Panel.

4. Multicam Configuration 211

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

• In a Spotbox or Server base configuration:

◦ A Remote Panel is not allowed.
◦ Controllers other than a LSM Remote Panel can be assigned to play or record
channels, taking into account the protocol-specific rules on controller use and
combinations.

Protocol-Specific Assignment Rules

Standalone Protocol
The table shows whether or not the given protocol, used as a standalone (as main
controller, without secondary controller) can be assigned to the specified number of play
channels, record channels or play and record channel combinations.
The green cells refer to allowed assignments, the red ones to banned assignments.
Numbers in the cells refer to the notes mentioned below the table.

VDCP VDCP Odetics

Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX
Mix F&K F&K

1 PGM 2

2 PGM 3

>2
PGM

1 REC 1

>1
REC

1 PGM
+1
REC

Several
PGM
+1
REC

Several
PGM
+
Several
REC

1. Every recorder
2. Only if Mix on one channel is enabled.
3. Only consecutive PGMs

212 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Protocol Used in Exclusive Mode

The table shows whether or not the given protocol, used in exclusive mode (as a main
controller or secondary controller) can be assigned to the specified number of play
channels, record channels or play and record channel combinations.
The green cells refer to allowed assignments, the red ones to banned assignments.
Numbers in the cells refer to the notes mentioned below the table.

VDCP VDCP Odetics

Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX
Mix F&K F&K

Main Controller
1 PGM

2 PGM

>2
PGM

1 PGM
+1
REC1

1 REC

>1
REC

Several
PGM
+1
REC1

Several
PGM
+
Several
REC1

Secondary Controller
1 PGM 2

2 PGM

>2
PGM

1 PGM
+1
REC1

1 REC 3

Several
PGM
+1
REC1

Several
PGM
+
Several
REC1

4. Multicam Configuration 213

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

1. The recorder cannot be controlled by a secondary controller in exclusive mode. In

these cases, the recorder must be standalone or in parallel mode.
2. Only if Mix on one channel is enabled.
3. The recorder cannot be controlled by LinX as secondary controller in Multicam LSM
and XSense configurations.

Protocol Used in Parallel Mode

The table shows whether or not the given protocol, used in parallel mode (as a main,
secondary or mix controller) can be assigned to the specified number of play channels,
record channels or play and record channel combinations.
The green cells refer to allowed assignments, the red ones to banned assignments.
Numbers in the cells refer to the notes mentioned below the table.

VDCP VDCP Odetics

Remote IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony EditRec Odetics DD35 LinX
Mix F&K F&K

1 PGM 2
2 PGM

>2
PGM

1 REC 1 3

>1 3
REC

1 PGM 3
+1
REC

Several 3
PGM
+1
REC

Several 3
PGM
+
Several
REC

1. Only with EditRec.

2. Only if Mix on one channel is enabled.
3. The recorders cannot be controlled by LinX in Multicam LSM and XSense
configurations.

214 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Rules for Controller Combinations

Exclusive Mode - Play Channels

Secondar Odetic
Remot Odetic EditRe VDCP VDCP
y> IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony DD35 LinX s
e s c F&K Mix
Primary v F&K

Remote -
IPDP - -
AVSP - -
VDCP - -
Sony - -
Odetics - -
DD35 - -
EditRec - -
LinX - -
Odetics - -
F&K

VDCP - -
F&K

VDCP Mix - -

Exclusive Mode - Record Channels

The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in exclusive mode on
record channels.

Secondar
Remot Odetic EditRe Odetic VDCP VDCP
y> IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony DD35 LinX
e s c s F&K F&K Mix
Primary v

Remote

IPDP -
AVSP -
VDCP -
Sony -
Odetics -
DD35 -
EditRec -
LinX -

4. Multicam Configuration 215

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Secondar
Remot Odetic EditRe Odetic VDCP VDCP
y> IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony DD35 LinX
e s c s F&K F&K Mix
Primary v

Odetics -
F&K

VDCP -
F&K

VDCP Mix -

Parallel Mode - Play Channels

The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in parallel mode on play
channels.

Secondar
Remot Odetic EditRe Odetic VDCP VDCP
y> IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony DD35 LinX
e s c s F&K F&K Mix
Primary v

Remote - * * *
IPDP - - * * *
AVSP - -
VDCP - * - -
Sony - -
Odetics - * -
DD35 - * -
EditRec - -
LinX - -
Odetics - -
F&K

VDCP - -
F&K

VDCP Mix - - -

* These protocol combinations in parallel mode have operational limitations.

216 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Parallel Mode - Record Channels

The following table shows the supported protocol combinations in parallel mode on
record channels.

Secondar
Remot Odetic EditRe Odetic VDCP VDCP
y> IPDP AVSP VDCP Sony DD35 LinX
e s c s F&K F&K Mix
Primary v

Remote - - - - - - - - - - -
IPDP - -
AVSP - -
VDCP - - -
Sony - -
Odetics - -
DD35 - -
EditRec - -
LinX - -
Odetics - -
F&K

VDCP - -
F&K

VDCP Mix - - -

4. Multicam Configuration 217

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Recorder Settings

User Interface
The Recorder settings allow specifying configuration settings associated to the record
channels.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode
of the server- and web-based interfaces;
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X).
The following screenshot shows the Recorder settings defined on the Channels tab in
the web-based application:

Loop Recording

Description The Loop recording setting enables/disables the endless loop

recording of all record channels of the EVS server.

Values Yes (default) / No

The value is forced to Yes in all configurations, except Spotbox and
Server configurations.

218 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Clip Capacity

Description The Clip capacity setting specifies the recording mode on the
record channels.

Values The following values are available: Global / Per channel

• Global:
In this mode, the clip capacity is shared between the different
record trains.
Example: When 3 record trains are used, creating a clip of 30
min on REC1 will take 10 min of recording capacity equally from
each record train.
• Per channel:
In this mode, the clip capacity is only relevant to the individual
record train.
Example: When 3 record trains are used, creating a clip of 30
min on REC1 will take 30 min of recording capacity from the 1st
record train, but will not affect the recording capacity of the
other two record trains.

Default value The default value depends on the base configuration:

• Global:
◦ in LSM configurations (locked value)
◦ in XSense configurations (locked value)
◦ in Video delay configurations (locked value)
◦ in Spotbox configurations
• Per channel:
◦ with 2-ch VTR
◦ in Server configurations

Rec Auto Start

Availability This setting is displayed when a Spotbox or Server configuration is

running.

Description Automatic start of the record channels after the EVS server has
initialized.
In a Multicam LSM or an XSense configuration, the setting is not
displayed and the Rec Auto Start is automatically activated in the
background.

Values Yes (default) / No

4. Multicam Configuration 219

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SD Autosense

WARNING
A change to this parameter requires an application reboot (ALT+Q from the
operational windows) to be taken into account.

Availability This setting is available in the following conditions:

• with all HD codecs, in all multi-essence configurations, with the
720p or 1080i resolution.
• when the 720p or 1080i resolution is selected in the open
configuration.

Description The SD Autosense setting allows Multicam to automatically detect

and upscale an SD feed and record it in the HD codec selected in
the open configuration.

Values Yes / No (default)

Limitations When the SD Autosense setting is enabled, the following features

are not supported on the EVS server:
• Replace function (with internal loop in playlist)
• SHIFT + LOOP on the LSM Remote Panel
• Paint function
• Target Track function
• Internal offside line

4:3 Conversion

Availability This setting is only available when the SD Autosense setting is

enabled.

Description The 4:3 conversion setting allows users to specify how Multicam
will convert the source aspect ratio when:
• Multicam detects the source aspect ratio is 4:3 full frame.
and
• Multicam is configured to manage the conversion automatically
(SD->HD conversion setting is set to Auto).

Values The following values are possible:

• Pillarbox: Left and right stripes are added to the source video
to display it in a 16:9 pillar box aspect ratio.
• Crop: Top and bottom ends of the source video are cropped to
display it in a 16:9 full frame aspect ratio.

Default value Pillarbox

220 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

REC Capacity

WARNING
A change to this parameter requires an application reboot (ALT+Q from the
operational windows) to be taken into account.

Description This parameter contains two types of information on the specified

recorder:
Recording Capacity: XX% percentage of the disk space allocated
to each channel.
Loop / No Loop: indicates whether the Loop Recording parameter
is enabled or not.

Values The following values are possible:

• Recording Capacity: The value is defined by the user.
The total of all values must not exceed 100%.
By default, the recording capacity is evenly distributed among
all recorders.
Example: In a 4 REC 4 PLAY configuration, the recording
capacity will be 25% for each recorder by default.
• Loop / No Loop:
• The value directly depends on the Loop Recording setting:
◦ If the Loop Recoding is enabled, the value will be 'Loop'.
◦ If the Loop Recording is disabled, the value will be 'No
Loop'.

4. Multicam Configuration 221

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

SD => HD Conversion

Availability This setting is only available when the SD Autosense setting is

enabled.

Description The SD–>HD conversion setting makes it possible to specify how

Multicam converts the aspect ratio of a SD source video to an HD
video format.

Values With this parameter, you specify the conversion mode and type:
• Conversion mode:
◦ Auto: Multicam automatically converts the aspect ratio
based on the source aspect ratio detected in AFD or WSS.
◦ Forced: Multicam applies the aspect ratio conversion
specified in the Conversion type.
• Conversion type:
The conversion type specified is always used in Forced mode,
and can be used in Auto mode when the source aspect ratio
cannot be detected in AFD or WSS.
◦ Anamorphic: The source video is converted to a 16:9
aspect ratio.
◦ Pillarbox: Left and right stripes are added to the source
video to display it in a 16:9 pillar box aspect ratio.
◦ Crop: Top and bottom ends of the source video are
cropped to display it in a 16:9 full frame aspect ratio.

Default values Conversion mode: Auto

Conversion type: Anamorphic

Mix on One Channel Feature

Introduction
The Mix on one channel feature allows the use of the second channel of a codec
module (J3) to provide mixing with a single codec module. This function can be enabled
for each individual play channel.

Availability
The Mix on one channel feature is available for playlists only, in Spotbox and Multicam
LSM configurations and with all controllers.
The feature is available, in addition, in the following conditions:
• with a valid license code 31
• with a sufficient bandwidth (275 MBytes/sec with XT3 6U, and 110 MBytes/sec with
XT3 4U.

222 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Supported Modes

1 PGM Mode
In a single PGM mode, users working in a Spotbox configuration with IPDirector no
longer need to use two channels in PGM/PRV mode to play back a playlist with effects.
When they activate the mix on one channel feature, they can play back a playlist with
effects using only 1 PGM.

Multi-PGM Mode
In a multi PGM mode, the Load PL setting interacts with the use of the Mix on one
channel setting as shown in the table below. The table summarizes how the play
channels are used when you load a playlist in 2 PGM mode, depending on the defined
settings:

V3X Mod 1 V3X Mod 2

Mix on one OUT1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT2
Mode Load Playlist?
channel? Prim. Sec. Prim. Sec.
link link link link

2 PGM No Conditional Cut Cut

2 PGM Yes Conditional Mix Mix

2 PGM No Always Mix PRV

2 PGM Yes Always Mix PRV

When users set the Load PL parameter to 'Conditional', and enable the Mix on one
channel setting, they can use load playlists on both play channels, and play them with
effects, or only play back a playlist with effects on PGM1, while using PGM2 to play back
something else.

Mix on One Channel Settings

User Interface
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode
of the server- and web-based interfaces;
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X).

WARNING
The Mix on one channel settings are only available if the license code 31 is
valid.

4. Multicam Configuration 223

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

The following screenshot displays the Mix on One Channel settings defined on the
Channels tab in the web-based interface:

Mix on one Channel

Description Enables/disables mixing on a single codec module, by means

of the secondary link of the codec module (J3) of a play
channel. This function applies to mixes in playlists, not in
timelines.
The license code 31 is required for the Mix on One Channel
feature to be available.
Mix on One Channel is available for all controllers (Remote
Panel or protocol), with all supported codecs and resolutions,
except in 1080p.

Values Yes (default) / No

4.3.2. Audio

Audio I/Os Settings

User Interface
The Audio I/Os settings allow users to specify the audio connectors (analog, digital or
MADI) that correspond to the physical connectors available on the rear panel of the EVS
server.
The hardware configuration defined in the audio I/O settings is used, among others, to
provide a default audio channel association in the advanced audio settings.

NOTE
The settings available and the setting values defined for these parameters are
not automatically validated against the real hardware configuration. Therefore
you have to make sure the settings you define reflect accurately the available
physical connectors you want to use.

224 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

These fields are available in the following interfaces:

• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the basic and advanced
display mode.
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X).
The following screenshot displays the Audio I/Os settings defined on the Channels tab in
the web-based interface:

MADI

Availability This parameter is available only with EVS servers equipped

at least with A3X boards.
This parameter is available even if the connectors are not
fitted on the EVS server.

Description Number of IN and OUT MADI audio mono channels

available on the EVS server rear panel.

Values • None
• 128/128
◦ 128 IN mono audio channels
◦ 128 OUT mono audio channels
Refer to the technical reference manual for more information
about the number of mono channels provided with each
physical connector.

Default value None

4. Multicam Configuration 225

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Analog

Availability This parameter is available even if the connectors are not

fitted on the EVS server.

Description Number of IN and OUT analog audio mono channels

available on the EVS server rear panel.

Values • None
• 4/4
◦ 4 IN mono audio channels
◦ 4 OUT mono audio channels
• 8/8
◦ 8 IN mono audio channels
◦ 8 OUT audio channels
Refer to the technical reference manual for more information
about the number of mono channels provided with each
physical connector.

Default value None

Digital

Availability This parameter is always available even if the connectors

are not fitted on the EVS server.

Description Number of IN and OUT digital audio mono channels

available on the EVS server rear panel.

Values • None
• 8/8
◦ 8 IN mono audio channels
◦ 8 OUT audio channels
• 16/16
◦ 16 IN mono audio channels
◦ 16 OUT mono audio channels
Refer to the technical reference manual for more information
about the number of mono channels provided with each
physical connector.

Default value None

226 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Audio Settings

User Interface
The Audio settings allow users to specify some general audio settings. Other general
audio settings are available in the Audio I/Os settings and Audio Monitoring settings.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode.
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X).
The following screenshot displays the Audio settings defined on the Channels tab in the
web-based interface, in advanced mode:

Number of Tracks

WARNING
A change to this parameter requires an application reboot (ALT+Q from the
operational windows) to be taken into account.

Description Number of mono audio tracks associated to each video

channel.
See section "Number of Audio Tracks" on page 229

Values 4 Monos (default), 8 Monos, 16 Monos or 32 Monos

Audio Full Scale

Description Maximum audio level for the analog outputs on the server (in
dB).
It allows indirectly defining the head room, as the audio full
scale is 4 dB higher than the head room. As the default value
for the audio full scale is 22 dB, the default value for the head
room is 18.

Values Range of values: [10…30] dB

Default value 22 dB

4. Multicam Configuration 227

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Ancillary Mode

Availability This setting is displayed in SD configurations.

Description Encoding method used for digital audio.

Values 20 Bits / 24 Bits (default)

Sample Rate Conv. (Conversion)

Availability This parameter is not available when the Digital parameter is

set to None in the Audio IOs settings. The parameter is
indeed only relevant with the digital AES/EBU audio format.

Description Specifies whether the input sample rate is converted.

If this parameter is set to No, the user has to make sure that
the signals are properly synchronized.

Values Yes (default) / No

Audio Monitoring Settings

User Interface
The Audio Monitoring settings allow users to specify which audio signals are monitored
on the 4 XLR audio monitoring outputs located on the right of the rear panel.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode.
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X).
The following screenshot displays the Audio settings and Audio Monitoring settings
defined on the Channels tab in the web-based interface:

228 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Audio Monitoring: Mon #1 - Mon #4

Description Specifies the source of the audio signal that will be sent to
each of the four audio monitoring connectors (numbered from
left to right on the backplane).

Value For each audio monitoring connector, the audio signal to be

monitored is specified by the video channel number and the
audio mono channel number.
Example: The value 'OUT2-04' for Mon #1 means that the
audio signal of the 4th audio mono channel of the PGM2 is
sent to the monitoring connector 1.

Default Values By default, the audio signal of the first play channel, and the
audio mono channels from 1 to 4 (OUT1-01 to OUT1-04) are
respectively assigned to the Mon #1 to Mon #4 connectors.

Number of Audio Tracks

Introduction
In the audio settings, the Number of Tracks parameter makes it possible to define how
many audio mono channels, called Tracks in Multicam, will be associated to each video
channel (play or record channel).
The number of tracks that can be assigned to each video channel varies based on the
following elements:
• Maximum number of audio mono channels supported on the EVS server;
• Number of play and record channels defined in the running Multicam configuration.
This topic provides an overview on the maximum number of tracks, and on limitations to
the configurations with 32 audio tracks.
You can also refer to the Technical Reference manual, Audio section, for more
information on the hardware possibilities on each EVS server.

4. Multicam Configuration 229

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

XT3 4U server
The following table provides the maximum number of mono audio channels per video
channel:

Embedded MADI
Configuration Mode
(A3X) (A3X)

4-channel configurations 4*32 audio mono 4*32 audio mono

(= 128 tracks) (= 128 tracks)

6-channel configurations 7*16 audio mono 7*16 audio mono

(former XRec) (= 112 tracks) (= 112 tracks)

ChannelMax 8*16 audio mono 8*16 audio mono

configurations (= 128 tracks) (= 128 tracks)

XT3 6U server
The following table provides the default and maximum number of mono audio channels
per video channel:

Embedded MADI
Configuration Mode
(A3X) (A3X)

6-channel configurations 6*32 audio mono 6*32 audio mono

(= 192 tracks) (= 192 tracks)

8-channel configurations 8*16 audio mono 8*16 audio mono

(former XRec) (= 128 tracks) (= 128 tracks)

ChannelMax 12*16 audio mono 12*16 mono

configurations (or (=192 tracks) (=192 tracks)
ChannelMax Spotbox) if # IN ≤ 8 + LoRes
12*8 mono
(= 96 tracks)
if # IN > 8 + LoRes

UHD-4K 3*16 audio mono 3*16 audio mono

(=48 tracks) (=48 tracks)

Limitations to 32 Audio Tracks

It is possible to work with 32 audio tracks per channel with XT3 servers fitted with H3XP
and A3X boards. The use of 32 audio tracks per channel is currently relevant for MADI
connectors and for embedded audio.
When 32 audio tracks is enabled on your XT3 server, the following limitations are
applicable:
• The Lo-Res recording shall support up to 16 audio tracks per channel.
If the EVS server is configured with 32 audio, the tracks 17-32 will be ignored in the
Lo-Res.

230 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

• The number of play channels is limited based on the audio tracks per channel:
A warning will inform you in case your configuration exceeds the limits.

Number of tracks Max. number of play channels

32 tracks per channel 5 play channels

• The Mix on one channel feature is not available with more play channels than
mentioned below. A warning will inform you in case your configuration exceeds the
limits.

Number of tracks Max. play channels with Mix on one channel

16 tracks per channel 5 play channels

32 tracks per channel 2 play channels

• The Audio slow motion is not supported when more than 96 audio tracks are used
for playout.
• The Timeline feature is not supported.
• The Swap Audio feature is not supported.
• The Replace function is not supported.

Overview on Advanced Audio Settings

Introduction
The Advanced Audio settings are defined in the Channels tab of the Multicam
Configuration window. In the server-based application, they are displayed from page 3
and are only available in the advanced mode. They allow audio channel routing, muting,
and adjusting the audio gain.
The Advanced Audio settings for the inputs allow users to specify how the audio
sources are routed to the audio mono channels of each record channel.
The Advanced Audio settings for the outputs allow users to specify how the audio mono
channels are routed to each play channel (for embedded audio) or to the various
physical audio connectors (MADI, digital or analog connectors).

4. Multicam Configuration 231

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

In the server-based application, the advanced audio settings are available on different
pages:
• audio inputs
• audio embedded outputs
• audio digital outputs (AES/EBU)
• audio analog outputs
• audio MADI outputs
In the web-based interface, the audio inputs and the various audio output types are
displayed in the Channels tab, Advanced Audio settings, as different tabs of a single
table.

NOTE
The settings for digital, analog or MADI outputs are only available when the
corresponding connectors are defined in the Audio Connectors field (Audio
settings section) that reflects the audio hardware configuration.

General Table Structure

The screenshot below presents part of the input settings:

232 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

In the table, the information is organized as follows, for input or output settings:
• The rows correspond to the audio mono channels of the A/V material stored on the
EVS server. The number of rows depends on the value assigned to the Number of
tracks setting defined in the Audio settings field group.
• The columns correspond to the record channels or play channels.
• The values in the cells show the rooting of the audio mono channels:
◦ from the source to the material stored on the EVS server (audio inputs)
◦ from the material stored on the EVS server to the play channels (audio outputs)

Audio Types and Channel Numbers

The screenshot below presents part of the input settings, where the audio input from the
record channels is routed by default to the embedded audio channels.

The values in the cells of the table refer to the audio channel assigned and are made up
as follows:
• The first letter refers to the audio type (E for embedded, D for digital, A for analog,
DY for Dolby Digital, EY for Dolby Embedded, M for MADI, MY for Dolby MADI).
For embedded audio or MADI (for example 1-01):
• The first number before the hyphen refers to the number of the play or record
channel.
• The figure after the hyphen refers to the audio mono channel.
For digital audio (for example D 05), analog audio (for example A 01),
• The number refers to the number of the digital/analog input or output.

4. Multicam Configuration 233

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Audio Input Settings

Introduction
The advanced audio input settings allow users to specify the following elements:
• Which type of audio source should be taken into account in the recording process.
• How the audio mono channels of the source material will be distributed to the
material recorded on the EVS server.
• Whether an audio gain or audio muting should be applied in the recording process.

234 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Example 1

The E2-03 value located in the intersection between row 3 and column IN2 means that
the 3rd audio mono channel of the embedded audio source plugged into the IN2 (CAMB)
connector will be recorded on the same position on the EVS server.

Example 2

The allocation of the source audio mono channels shown above means that:
• The embedded audio source of the 1st mono channel of the record channel (IN1 or
IN2) will be stored on mono channels 1 to 4 of the recorded material.
• The embedded audio source of the 5th mono channel of the record channel (IN1 or
IN2) will be stored on mono channels 5 to 8 of the recorded material.

4. Multicam Configuration 235

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Example 3

The allocation of the source audio mono channels shown above means that:
• The audio source from the digital connectors is used for the material recorded on the
EVS server.
• The audio source 1 from the digital connector will be mapped to the 1st mono
channel of the material recorded on the EVS server, and so on.

Example 4

You will allocate the source audio mono channels as shown above when you want to
send the audio mono channels from REC1 to all other record channels.
The command IN1 on all allows you doing this more rapidly in the web-based interface.

236 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Audio Output Settings

Introduction
The audio output settings for audio allow users to do the following:
• Map the audio mono channels of the material stored on the EVS server to an output
mono channel of a play channel.
• Specify the audio gain to be applied to each output mono channel.
• Mute an output mono channel.
This can be defined for the various audio types: embedded audio, digital audio and
analog audio, if the corresponding connectors are available on the hardware
configuration.

User Interface
The screenshots below show an abstract of the default audio channel assignment for
the various audio types in a configuration.
See section "Default Mapping for Audio Inputs and Outputs" on page 239 for a full
overview on the default mono channel assignment in the various supported
configurations.

Embedded outputs Digital outputs

4. Multicam Configuration 237

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

MADI outputs Analog outputs

Example
In the screenshot below, the audio mono channels defined on the A/V material on the
EVS server are allocated to the play channels in the following way:
The audio outputs are in dolby embedded format.
By default, an audio mono channel of the A/V material stored the EVS server is sent to
the corresponding embedded channel of the play channel. In this example, this is the
case for mono channels from 3 to 8.
For mono channels 1 and 2, the default mapping has been changed as follows:
• The audio mono channel 1 of the A/V material is sent to the mono channel 2 of the
play channel, and this for all play channels.
• The audio mono channel 2 of the A/V material is sent to the mono channel 1 of the
play channel, and this for all play channels.

238 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Default Mapping for Audio Inputs and Outputs

Introduction
The tables below present the channel mapping for audio inputs and outputs in the
following configuration:
• XT3 6U chassis
• 64recorders or players (see section "About Supported Configurations" on page 52) .
• Audio hardware configuration: BNC MADI + 16 BNC Digital + 4 DB15 Analog
In configurations with less recorders or players, the irrelevant rows or columns should be
disregarded.

4. Multicam Configuration 239

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Audio (Embedded) Inputs

By default, the audio embedded mono channels from the source material are mapped
as shown in the table below onto the A/V material stored on the EVS server.
The table shows 6 recorders, and an audio configuration with 16 tracks (mono
channels):

IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6

Mono1 E E E E E E
1-01 2-01 3-01 4-01 5-01 6-01

Mono2 E E E E E E
1-02 2-02 3-02 4-02 5-02 6-02

Mono3 E E E E E E
1-03 2-03 3-03 4-03 5-03 6-03

Mono4 E E E E E E
1-04 2-04 3-04 4-04 5-04 6-04

Mono5 E E E E E E
1-05 2-05 3-05 4-05 5-05 6-05

Mono6 E E E E E E
1-06 2-06 3-06 4-06 5-06 6-06

Mono7 E E E E E E
1-07 2-07 3-07 4-07 5-07 6-07

Mono8 E E E E E E
1-08 2-08 3-08 4-08 5-08 6-08

Mono9 E E E E E E
1-09 2-09 3-09 4-09 5-09 6-09

Mono10 E E E E E E
1-10 2-10 3-10 4-10 5-10 6-10

Mono11 E E E E E E
1-11 2-11 3-11 4-11 5-11 6-11

Mono12 E E E E E E
1-12 2-12 3-12 4-12 5-12 6-12

Mono13 E E E E E E
1-13 2-13 3-13 4-13 5-13 6-13

Mono14 E E E E E E
1-14 2-14 3-14 4-14 5-14 6-14

Mono15 E E E E E E
1-15 2-15 3-15 4-15 5-15 6-15

Mono16 E E E E E E
1-16 2-16 3-16 4-16 5-16 6-16

240 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Audio Embedded Outputs

By default, the audio mono channels from the A/V material stored on the EVS server are
mapped to the embedded mono channels on the play channels as presented in the table
below.
The table shows 6 players, and an audio configuration with 16 tracks (mono channels):

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6

Mono1 E E E E E E
1-01 2-01 3-01 4-01 5-01 6-01

Mono2 E E E E E E
1-02 2-02 3-02 4-02 5-02 6-02

Mono3 E E E E E E
1-03 2-03 3-03 4-03 5-03 6-03

Mono4 E E E E E E
1-04 2-04 3-04 4-04 5-04 6-04

Mono5 E E E E E E
1-05 2-05 3-05 4-05 5-05 6-05

Mono6 E E E E E E
1-06 2-06 3-06 4-06 5-06 6-06

Mono7 E E E E E E
1-07 2-07 3-07 4-07 5-07 6-07

Mono8 E E E E E E
1-08 2-08 3-08 4-08 5-08 6-08

Mono9 E E E E E E
1-09 2-09 3-09 4-09 5-09 6-09

Mono10 E E E E E E
1-10 2-10 3-10 4-10 5-10 6-10

Mono11 E E E E E E
1-11 2-11 3-11 4-11 5-11 6-11

Mono12 E E E E E E
1-12 2-12 3-12 4-12 5-12 6-12

Mono13 E E E E E E
1-13 2-13 3-13 4-13 5-13 6-13

Mono14 E E E E E E
1-14 2-14 3-14 4-14 5-14 6-14

Mono15 E E E E E E
1-15 2-15 3-15 4-15 5-15 6-15

Mono16 E E E E E E
1-16 2-16 3-16 4-16 5-16 6-16

4. Multicam Configuration 241

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Audio Digital Outputs

The default mapping to audio digital output connectors differ depending on the number
of tracks (mono channels) defined.

16 Audio Tracks
With audio configurations with 16 tracks (mono channels), the audio mono channels of
the A/V material stored on the EVS server are sent to the digital audio output connectors
of the play channels as presented in the table below.
The table shows 6 players, and the audio configuration with 16 tracks (mono channels):

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6

Mono1 D 01 D 09 None None None None

Mono2 D 02 D 10 None None None None

Mono3 D 03 D 11 None None None None

Mono4 D 04 D 12 None None None None

Mono5 D 05 D 13 None None None None

Mono6 D 06 D 14 None None None None

Mono7 D 07 D 15 None None None None

Mono8 D 08 D 16 None None None None

8 Audio Tracks
With audio configurations with 8 tracks (mono channels), the audio mono channels of
the A/V material stored on the EVS server are sent to the digital audio output connectors
of the play channels as presented in the table below.
The table shows 6 players, and an audio configuration with 8 tracks (mono channels):

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6

Mono1 D 01 D 05 None None None None

Mono2 D 02 D 06 None None None None

Mono3 D 03 D 07 None None None None

Mono4 D 04 D 08 None None None None

Mono5 None None None None None None

Mono6 None None None None None None

Mono7 None None None None None None

Mono8 None None None None None None

242 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Audio Analog
By default, the audio mono channels of the A/V material stored on the EVS server are
sent to the analog audio output connectors of the play channels as presented in the
table below.
The table shows 62 players, and an audio configuration with 8 tracks (mono channels):

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6

Mono1 A 01 A 05 None None None None

Mono2 A 02 A 06 None None None None

Mono3 A 03 A 07 None None None None

Mono4 A 04 A 08 None None None None

Mono5 None None None None None None

Mono6 None None None None None None

Mono7 None None None None None None

Mono8 None None None None None None

4. Multicam Configuration 243

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Audio MADI Outputs

By default, the audio mono channels from the A/V material stored on the EVS server are
mapped to the MADI mono channels on the play channels as presented in the table
below.
The table shows 6 players, and an audio configuration with 16 tracks (mono channels):

OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6

Mono1 M1-01 M1-17 M1-33 M1-49 M2-01 M2-17

Mono2 M1-02 M1-18 M1-34 M1-50 M2-02 M2-18

Mono3 M1-03 M1-19 M1-35 M1-51 M2-03 M2-19

Mono4 M1-04 M1-20 M1-36 M1-52 M2-04 M2-20

Mono5 M1-05 M1-21 M1-37 M1-53 M2-05 M2-21

Mono6 M1-06 M1-22 M1-38 M1-54 M2-06 M2-22

Mono7 M1-07 M1-23 M1-39 M1-55 M2-07 M2-23

Mono8 M1-08 M1-24 M1-40 M1-56 M2-08 M2-24

Mono9 M1-09 M1-25 M1-41 M1-57 M2-09 M2-25

Mono10 M1-10 M1-26 M1-42 M1-58 M2-10 M2-26

Mono11 M1-11 M1-27 M1-43 M1-59 M2-11 M2-27

Mono12 M1-12 M1-28 M1-44 M1-60 M2-12 M2-28

Mono13 M1-13 M1-29 M1-45 M1-61 M2-13 M2-29

Mono14 M1-14 M1-30 M1-46 M1-62 M2-14 M2-30

Mono15 M1-15 M1-31 M1-47 M1-63 M2-15 M2-31

Mono16 M1-16 M1-32 M1-48 M1-64 M2-16 M2-32

244 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Modifying the Audio Routing or Type

Introduction
Audio routing settings can be modified in the Channels tab, in the Advanced Audio
Settings. It is possible to change:
• the audio type of all displayed audio channels at the same time by means of:
◦ the shortcut keys described below in the server-based application
◦ the buttons at the bottom of the table in the web-based interface
• the audio type of individual channels by manually editing the audio type value.
• the routing of an individual audio channel by editing the cell value in the advanced
audio settings tables.

Collective Editing Actions in Server- and Web-Based

Interfaces
You can apply the following editing actions to all audio channels of a page using the
following shortcuts, when available on your EVS server, and on the current page:

Command key
Command button
Command description (Server-based
(Web-based interface)
app.)

Set all audio channels to Embedded CTRL+E all E

Set all audio channels to Digital CTRL+D all D

Set all audio channels to Analog CTRL+A all A

Set all audio channels to MADI CTRL+M all M

Toggle all audio channels to Dolby CTRL+Y Tgl Dolby

Audio

Set all audio channels to None CTRL+N all None applicable to all
E,D or A outputs at a time

Reset all the audio configuration (also F5 -

on other pages) to default values

Route all audio input channels of CTRL+0 Rec 1 on all

REC1 to the other record channels
(only audio inputs)

Validating the changes ALT+A Apply

4. Multicam Configuration 245

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Individual Editing Actions in the Server-Based

Application
In the server-based application, you can use the following editing commands for
modifying individual field/cell values (audio type or audio routing), when available on
your EVS server, and on the current page:

Command description Command key

Selecting a field value TAB

Scrolling down in the list of the possible values for the SPACEBAR
selected field

Scrolling up in the list of the possible values for the selected SHIFT + SPACEBAR
field

Increasing the audio channel number by 8 audio mono CTRL + RIGHT

channels (valid when the audio channel is selected) ARROW

Decreasing the audio channel number by 8 audio mono CTRL + LEFT ARROW
channels.
This is valid when the audio channel is selected.

Increasing by 1 the ID of the audio source channel. CTRL + ARROW UP

This is valid with audio channels with ID - embedded or
MADI - when the channel number is selected.

Decreasing by 1 the ID of the audio source channel. CTRL + ARROW

This is valid with audio channels with ID - embedded or DOWN
MADI - when the channel number is selected.

246 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Individual Editing Actions in the Web-Based Interface

In the web-based application, click on the values you want to edit in the requested cell
(s). The available values are displayed in drop-down fields, which allow you to select the
requested value individually:

Modifying the Audio Gain and Mute Settings

Introduction
From the Advanced Audio Settings pages of the Channels tab, you can not only modify
the default routing of audio channels, but also do the following:
• Adjust the audio gain for each audio mono channel individually;
• Mute individual audio channels.
In the server-based application, the audio gain and audio mute information can be
displayed via the CTRL+G command, which allows you to toggle the display in the
tables to show the audio gain and mute information.
In the web-based interface, the audio gains can be displayed by selecting the Show
gain command below the advanced audio settings.
The audio gain can be adjusted by steps of 0.75dB, 3dB or 6dB, in the range from
-77.25dB to +23.25dB of the current audio level.

WARNING
When an audio input is used for multiple tracks, the value of the gain shall be
the same for all tracks.
When editing the gain of 1 of the replicated tracks, the gain of all the tracks
shall also be modified. Otherwise, the following error message will be
displayed "Incoherent input audio gains".

4. Multicam Configuration 247

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

The following screenshot shows the display of mute and audio gain settings:

In the Server-Based Application

The following table shows the various commands available to adjust the audio gain, and
mute an audio channel in the server-based application.

248 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

One of the following command can be applied on an individual channel when it is

selected and when the audio gain display is on.

Command description Command key

Hiding and Showing the audio gain display CTRL+G

Muting the selected audio channel CTRL+M

Un-muting the selected audio channel CTRL+U

Increasing by 0.75dB the audio level of the selected SPACEBAR

audio channel

Lowering by 0.75dB the audio level of the selected audio SHIFT + SPACEBAR
channel

Increasing by 3dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL+ARROW RIGHT
channel

Lowering by 3dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL+ARROW LEFT
channel

Increasing by 6dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL+ARROW UP

channel

Lowering by 6dB the audio level of the selected audio CTRL+ARROW DOWN
channel

In the Web-Based Interface

To modify the audio gain of an audio channel or mute it, proceed as follows:
1. In the Channels tab, select the Inputs tab or Outputs tab of the Advanced Audio
Settings depending on whether you want to work on audio input or output channels.
2. Click the Show gain button.
The audio gain applied to each mono channel is displayed, instead of the audio type
and routing data.
3. In the requested cell, click the value you want to modify, and select the requested
audio gain or mute value from the list.

4. Multicam Configuration 249

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Dolby Audio Management

Concepts
• Dolby Digital or Dolby 5.1 or AC-3, is an audio coding system containing up to 6
discrete channels of sound, with 5 channels for normal-range speakers (20 Hz -
20,000 Hz) (Right front, Center, Left Front, Right Rear and Left Rear) and one
channel (20 Hz - 120 Hz) for the LFE, or subwoofer.
• Dolby E is a professional coding system optimized for the distribution of surround
and multichannel audio through two-channel postproduction and broadcasting
infrastructures, or for recording surround audio on two audio tracks of conventional
digital video tapes, video servers, communication links, switchers, and routers.

NOTE
Dolby E is not supported in Proxy essence. If audio channels are configured in
Dolby E in a multi-essence configuration with Proxy, the Proxy output will
have no associated audio.

Available Dolby Configurations

Case 1: The 5.1 audio signal is carried on 6 discrete PCM audio

channels
• It is available on an XT3 server in all configurations.
• The audio can be analog, digital or embedded depending on the configuration.
• In AES audio, if the audio is correctly genlocked to the video, the sample rate
converter can be switched off.

Case 2: The 5.1 audio signal is coded in the two-channel Dolby E

standard
• Dolby E over AES/EBU links
◦ Set the configuration of the pair of channels carrying the Dolby E signal to “DY”
in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab. This has two effects :
• It disables the sample rate converter on the input channels.
• It forces all transitions to a hard cut.

250 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

If the sample rate converter is activated and the audio configuration is a mix between
PCM audio over AES and Dolby E over AES, the sample rate converter will only be
applied to the PCM over AES signal.
• Dolby E Embedded in the SD/HD SDI stream
◦ Set the configuration of the pair of channels carrying the Dolby E signal to “EY”
in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab. This will force the transition
to a hard cut.
◦ The sample rate converter parameter does not apply to embedded audio.
The Dolby E transitions will be correct as long as:
• the configuration is correct
• the AES stream containing Dolby E is correctly synchronized with the video
Dolby E transitions will not be correct (2 frames of mute at the transitions) if the audio
type is set to E instead of EY or D instead of DY.
Audio effects (scrub, slow motion) are not possible in Dolby E. If they are used anyway,
the audio will be muted.

4.3.3. Timecode and Data Insertion

Timecode Settings

User Interface
The Timecode settings allow specifying which type of timecode the users want to use as
the reference to work on a given recorder of an EVS server.
The selection of a timecode type, using the timecode settings, rely on the management
of two timecode jump tables.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode
on the server- and web-based interfaces;
• partly in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X)

4. Multicam Configuration 251

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

The following screenshot displays the Timecode settings defined on the Channels tab in
the web-based application:

LTC

Description Longitudinal timecode (timecode defined on or plugged into

the EVS server) automatically stored in the first timecode
jump table (LTC table).
This is not possible to modify the timecode type stored in the
first timecode jump table.

Values LTC (non-editable)

User

Description Timecode type stored in the second timecode jump table

(User TC table).

Values In SD:
• LTC
• VITC
In HD and UHD-4K:
• LTC
• ATC-LTC (Ancillary LTC Timecode)
• ATC-VITC (Ancillary VITC Timecode)

252 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Primary TC

Description Timecode type that is displayed at the bottom the VGA and is
used to work with the video material stored on the given
recorder.
Usually, an LTC timecode is used to perform operations on
live events. A VITC timecode is used for video material
ingested from tapes as it is the timecode embedded in the
video signal.

Values • LTC: LTC timecode, which is automatically stored in the

LTC table. It is specified in the LTC field.
• User: User-defined timecode, which is stored in the
USER TC table and specified in the User field.

OSD Display Depending on the value selected for this setting, the timecode
displayed at the bottom of the user’s OSD will have a different
color:
• If the LTC timecode is selected, the timecode color will be
white.
• If the USER timecode is selected, the timecode color will
be yellow.

Timecode Insertion Settings

User Interface
The Timecode Insertion settings allow the management of VITC or ancillary timecodes
channel by channel.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode
on the server- and web-based interfaces.

4. Multicam Configuration 253

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

The following screenshot shows the Timecode Insertion settings in SD on the Channels
tab in the web-based application:

The screenshot below shows the Timecode Insertion settings in HD on the Channels tab
in the web-based application:

254 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Input Tab

In Loop: D-VITC
The D-VITC (Digital Vertical Interval Timecode) and userbits are always written on the
monitoring SD outputs of the record codec and are the same as on the source video.

In Loop: Lines

Description Lines on which the VITC must be written on the output

connectors of the record codec.

Values From 06-08 to 20-22

Default Values 14-16 in NTSC

19-21 in PAL

Output Tab

HD OUT (in HD): ATC-LTC / ATC-VITC

Description Enables/disables the insertion of the embedded timecode

(ATC-LTC or ATC-VITC) in the HD output.

Values The values specified for the ATC-LTC and ATC-VITC fields
have to be the same. The values can be as follows:
• No No new timecode inserted in the output.
• In Same timecode as in the input inserted in
the output.
• LTC Timecode from the LTC table inserted in the
output.
• USER User-defined timecode inserted in the
output.
• TC 0 All ATC-LTC/ATC-VITC timecodes
generated in the video signal coming out of
the given PGM will remain static and fixed to
00:00:00:00.

Default value No

4. Multicam Configuration 255

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

HD OUT (in HD): UserBits

Description Enables/disables the insertion of the user bits in the HD

output.
The values specified for the ATC-LTC and ATC-VITC fields
have to be the same.
When TC0 is selected in the ATC-LTC and ATC-VITC field,
the user bits values will also remain static and fixed to
00:00:00:00 whatever the selected value.

Values Yes (default) / No

SD OUT (in HD/SD): D-VITC

Description Enables/disables the insertion of the embedded timecode (D-

VITC) in the SD output.

Values The values specified for the D-VITC field can be as follows:
• No No new timecode inserted in the output.
Same timecode as in the input inserted in
• In
the output.
Timecode from the LTC table inserted in the
• LTC
output.
User-defined timecode inserted in the
• USER
output.
All D-VITC timecodes generated in the
• TC 0 video signal coming out of the given PGM
will remain static and fixed to 00:00:00:00.

Default value No

SD OUT (in HD/SD): Lines

Description Lines on which the specified timecode must be written on the

loop of the input.

Values From 06-08 to 20-22

Default values • 14-16 in NTSC

• 19-21 in PAL

SD OUT (in SD only): UserBits

Description Enables/disables the insertion of the user bits in the SD

output.
When TC0 is selected for the D-VITC field, the user bits
values will also remain static and fixed to 00:00:00:00
whatever the selected value.

Values Yes (default) / No

256 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SD OUT (in SD only): CleanVBI

Description Specifies whether the VBI (Vertical Blanking Interface)

information needs to be cleaned on the output.
The VITC being recorded in the active video lines, it can be
disrupted in play var because of interpolation or parity
violation on some fields. Moreover, if the server inserts VITC
on the output while there is already VITC on another line, it
can create problems.

Values • No (default) The VBI is not cleaned in the output.

• Always The VBI is always cleaned in the output.
The VBI is cleaned in the output if it is not
• If not OK correct (play var mode, vertical split
screen, etc).

SMPTE 334M Packet Management Settings

User Interface
The SMPTE 334M Packet Management settings specify how ancillary data packets
stored in the vertical ancillary data space in HD and SD signals are handled.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Channels tab, in the advanced display mode
on the server- and web-based interfaces;
• partly in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T2.X).
The following screenshot shows the SMPTE Package settings defined on the Channels
tab in the web-based application:

4. Multicam Configuration 257

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Supported Packets
The supported ancillary data packets must comply with the SMPTE standards 334M,
291M (type 2 ANC packet).
Up to now, SMPTE 334M data packets carried on the chrominance (C) data stream
within the SMPTE 292M signal are not decoded (HD).
All DIDs mentioned in the SMPTE 334M standards are supported:
• 61 => 62
• 40 => 5F
• C0 => DF
Those DIDs are saved and restored on the output channels on their original lines. The
other DIDs are not saved.
The maximum number of bytes saved per field (frame for 720p) is 2014. One saved
SMPTE 334M packet is composed of user data word (UDW) plus 7 configuration bytes.
It has to be taken into account to compute the number of bytes saved.
Please refer to the SMPTE RP 291-2006 standard for the assignment of DIDs to specific
applications.

Decoding Tab

Decoding

Description Enables/disables the decoding of SMPTE 334M data packets

on each record channel.

Values Yes (default) / No

Custom 1/2

Description Enables/disables a customized decoding of the SMPTE 334M

data packets. See section "Customizing the Decoding of
SMPTE Data" on page 259 for more information.

Values Yes / No (default)

Encoding Tab

Encoding

Description Enables/disables the encoding of the SMPTE 334M data onto

each play channel in HD.

Values Yes / No (default)

258 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SD OUT Encoding

Description Enables/disables the encoding of the SMPTE334M data

present on the HD output on the SD downconverted output on
each play channel. See section "SMPTE 334 Data Encoding
on Downconverted Output" on page 259 for more information.

Values Yes / No (default)

Customizing the Decoding of SMPTE Data

Upon request, it is possible to customize the decoding of the SMPTE 334M data.
If you wish to keep uncompressed 8-bit data in the VANC data space, you can select two
lines - La and Lb - on which Na and Nb bytes can be saved per field (frame for 720p).
The saved data are left aligned after SAV (Start of Active Video) and the maximum
number of data saved (Na + Nb + regular SMPTE 334M packet) must not exceed 2014.
If you require this customization, please contact your EVS representative to specify the
number of bytes you want to keep and on which lines. EVS will provide you with a
specific customization file.
This customization file will be activated using the Custom 1, Custom 2 settings.

SMPTE 334 Data Encoding on Downconverted Output

For the downconverted output, one SMPTE 334M packet is encoded per line starting
from the second line after the line specified for the switching line. In other words, the
maximum number of packets per field is as follows:
• 8 packets per field in 525i (lines 12-19 and 275-282)
• 15 packets per field in 625i (lines 8-22 and 321-335)
The limitations are:
• The data are re-encoded in the same order as they were in HD, but not necessarily
on the same lines.
• If VITC is inserted in the downconverted output, no SMPTE 334M data will be
inserted on the lines carrying the VITC.

4. Multicam Configuration 259

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.4. Network Tab

4.4.1. Overview
The Network tab includes the settings on theXNet network and Gigabit Ethernet
network, both networks used for the backup and transfer of video and audio data.
The table below presents the settings of the Network tab. It specifies whether the setting
is available:
• in the basic or advanced display mode in the server-based and web-based
interfaces
• in the Technical Setup menu (T3.X) of the Remote Panel

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

XNet settings

Operation Mode X X X

Net name X X –

Net number X X X

Type X X X

Gigabit Connection settings

Physical interface X X X

Link aggregation X X X

Gigabit IP Configuration settings

IP address X X X

Subnet mask X X X

Default gateway X X X

Gigabit Prioritization settings

Configuration mode X X X

Connections X X X
(Lo-Res/Unreserved)

260 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.4.2. XNet Settings

Introduction
The XNet settings allow specifying the settings related to the XNet network. This
network allows the content between EVS servers to be visible across the network, and
easily transferable.

WARNING
Changes to the XNet parameters require an application reboot (ALT+Q from
the operational windows) to be applied.

User Interface
The XNet settings, also dealt with in this section, are available:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Network tab, in the basic and advanced
display mode in the server-based application (page 1) and web-based interfaces
• partly in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T3.X)

NOTE
The XNet settings will only be displayed if the SDTI license code (117) is valid.

The following screenshot display the XNet settings on the Network tab in the web-based
interface:

4. Multicam Configuration 261

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Operation Mode

Description Enables the selection of the 3G-SDTI option and the

bandwidth for the XNet network.
The XNet circuit is closed only when the Multicam software is
started.

Values The following values are available:

• 3G-SDTI (formerly No Relay 2970 Mbps)
• Off

Default value Off

Net Name

Description Machine name on the XNet network.

It is not mandatory because a network number is assigned to
the EVS server. It is however recommended as it helps to
easily identify the servers connected to the XNet network.
The Net Name will be displayed even if the SDTI code is not
valid.

Values The Net Name is user-defined and cannot exceed 8

characters.

Default value By default, no Net Name is assigned.

Net Number

Description The Net Number parameter defines the machine number on

the network. This number is user-defined and must be unique
for each system on the network. An error message appears if
the number is already assigned to another machine.

Values Range between 1 and 29

Default value 1

262 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Visibility

Description Defines the privileges of the EVS server on the XNet network.

Values The following values are possible:

• Local: It cannot access the content on other EVS servers.
• XNet: It can access all content on other EVS servers.

Whatever the type of visibility defined, the content of an

EVS server can be accessed without restrictions by the other
EVS servers on the XNet network.

Default value XNet

XNet Server

Description Defines if the EVS server may or may not become the XNet
server.

Values The following values are possible:

• Preferred: Can be selected as XNet server.
• Allowed: Can only be selected as XNet server if none of
the other EVS servers in the XNet network have been set
to 'Preferred'.
• Forbidden: It cannot be selected as XNet server.

The XNet server is selected automatically.

Default value Preferred

When upgrading from Multicam 16.1 or earlier to Multicam 16.2 or later, the following
parameter conversion shall be applied.

Before Multicam 16.2 Multicam 16.2 or higher

Type Visibility XNet Server

Server XNet Preferred

Master XNet Allowed

Client Local Allowed

4. Multicam Configuration 263

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.4.3. Gigabit Connection

Introduction
The Gigabit connection allows the backup and transfer of the audio and video data
without going through the XNet network. The Gigabit Connection settings specify which
interface provides the gigabit connection on the EVS server.
The Gigabit connection can be available via the following interface, having the following
characteristics:
• The internal GbE (Gigabit Ethernet) board is equipped with two 1GbE ports and two
10GbE ports.
The 1GbE or10GbE ports can be used to provide the internal Gigabit connection.

WARNING
Changes to the Gigabit Connection settings require an application reboot
(ALT+Q from the operational windows) to be applied.

User Interface
The Gigabit connection settings are available:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Network tab, in the basic and advanced
display modes in the server-based application (page 1), and web-based interface.
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T3.X).

WARNING
When you use the GbE board, you can use the 1GbE or the 10 GbE
connections, but not both simultaneously.

Teaming
Teaming is available with the GbE board, on both its 1GbE or 10GbE interfaces.
Teaming can be enabled using the Link Aggregation setting.
When teaming is active, and one of the GbE link fails, the other will seamlessly take over
all ongoing and pending tasks.

264 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Physical Interface

Availability This section is only available if the server is equipped with a

GbE board.

Description Specifies the physical interface that provides the Gigabit

Ethernet connection.

Values The following values are available:

• None
No gigabit interface is present.
• 1 GbE (on 10GbE board)
One or two of the 1GbE connections on the GbE board
is/are used.
• 10 GbE
One or two of the 10GbE connections of the GbE board
is/are used.

Default Value The default value corresponds to the most efficient physical
interface installed on the EVS server.

Link aggregation

Description Specifies the teaming method when using the 1GbE or the
10GbE ports of the GbE board.

Values The following values are available:

• None
No link aggregation method is applied, and no teaming is
provided.
• LACP
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol is used to provide
teaming.
• Adapter Fault Tolerance
The Adapter Fault Tolerance (AFT) method is used to
provide teaming.
• Switch Fault Tolerance
The Switch Fault Tolerance (SFT) method is used to
provide teaming.

Default Value None

4. Multicam Configuration 265

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.4.4. Gigabit IP Configuration

Introduction
The Gigabit IP Configuration settings specify the IP addresses for the Gigabit
connections on the GbE board, depending on which GbE connections are specified in
the Physical Interface parameter in the Gigabit Connection settings.

WARNING
Changes to the Gigabit settings require an application reboot (ALT+Q from
the operational windows) to be applied.

User Interface
The Gigabit IP Configuration settings are available:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Network tab, in the basic and advanced
display modes in the server-based application (page 1), and web-based interface.
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T3.X).
The following screenshot displays the Gigabit IP Configuration settings on the Network
tab in the web-based interface:

Gigabit Connection Problems

When no Gigabit module is present or when the Gigabit connection has been lost, the
first line of the Gigabit IP Configuration settings displays the message !Not
detected!.
When the Gigabit connection of the GbE board has been lost, the last line of the Gigabit
IP Configuration settings will display the message Connection problem.
When the teaming is active, and only one of the connection is lost, the Gigabit transfers
will continue as the second connection will take over. No warning message is displayed
in the Multicam configuration module, but this information is however available in XNet
Monitor or XNet Web Monitor.

266 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IP Address (Port 1/Port 2)

Description IP address to connect to the port1/port2 of the Gigabit

Ethernet connection on the EVS server.

Values The IP addresses [Link] and [Link] are not

allowed.

Subnet Mask (Port 1/Port 2)

Description Range of logical addresses within the address space

assigned to the Gigabit Ethernet connection.
The IP addresses of both GbE ports must belong to different
subnet masks. Otherwise, Multicam will return an error
message.

Default Gateway (Port 1/Port 2)

Description IP address of the router on the Gigabit Ethernet network that

serves as an access point to external networks.

4.4.5. Gigabit Prioritization Settings

Introduction
The Gigabit connection is used for several tasks (browsing, streaming, transfer, etc.).
For this reason, prioritization parameters can be defined to make sure the EVS server
will have a sufficient bandwidth to smoothly perform tasks seen as critical within a given
workflow.
The Gigabit prioritization settings allow users to prioritize the transfer from/to the Gigabit
FTP server.

WARNING
• Changes to the Gigabit Prioritization settings require an application reboot
(ALT+Q from the operational windows) to be applied.
• When the Truck Manager is used in a given workflow, it automatically
configures the Gigabit Prioritization settings to take into account the
connection needs of all EVS products in the workflow.

4. Multicam Configuration 267

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

User Interface
The Gigabit Prioritization settings are available:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Network tab, in the advanced display modes
on page 2 in the server-based interface, and in the web-based interface.
The following screenshot highlights the Gigabit prioritization settings on the Network tab
in the web-based interface:

General Description
The prioritization settings consists in giving priority to a number of Lo-Res (Proxy)
connections on the Gigabit network.
Based on the effective bandwidth on the Gigabit interfaces of the EVS server, Multicam
calculates the maximum number of Lo-Res connections that can be granted with
priority.
Knowing the maximum number of connections which can have priority, the administrator
can set the requested number of reserved connections for critical jobs (Lo-Res
browsing, for example). The unreserved connections will be available for less prioritary
jobs (backup of clips to be archived, for example).
When processing jobs, Multicam always makes use of the full available Gigabit
bandwidth: If the bandwidth is not fully allocated, the remaining bandwidth is
automatically distributed among the connections.

268 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Configuration mode

Description Specifies whether and how you want to configure the priorities
for the Gigabit connections.

Values Two configuration modes are available:

• Disabled:
◦ The parameters for setting prioritization are hidden:
you cannot reserve connections.
◦ The number of unreserved connections is set to 6 by
default. This value can be raised up to 25.
• Enabled:
◦ You can set the number of Lo-Res connections.
◦ The number of unreserved connections is computed
and set automatically (never lower than 6).

Default value Disabled

Connections (Lo-Res)

Availability The setting is only available in Enabled configuration mode,

and if the Lo-Res codec essence is active on the EVS server.

Description Allows configuring the number of Lo-Res connections allowed

to the bandwidth of the EVS server.
Each Lo-Res connection has a priority profile optimized for a
smooth browsing of Lo-Res media, without impacting other
transfers.

Values The values is set in the Reserved column.

The number of remaining and maximum Lo-Res connections
for the given server configuration is specified in the
Remain./Max. column.

Default value 0

Connections (Unreserved)

Availability The setting is only displayed in Enabled configuration mode.

Description Specifies the number of unreserved connections allowed to

the Gigabit interface of the EVS server.

Values 6-25
A minimum of six unreserved connections is necessary to
provide the same number of connections as in earlier versions
of Multicam.

Default value 6

4. Multicam Configuration 269

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.5. Monitoring Tab

4.5.1. Overview
The Monitoring tab includes the settings of the Multiviewer output, the OSD information
to be displayed, and the downconverted outputs configuration.
The table below presents the settings of the Monitoring tab. It specifies where the setting
groups are available (page) and whether each setting is available:
• in the basic and advanced display mode in the server-based and web-based
interfaces
• in the Technical Setup menu (T4.X) of the Remote Panel

Setting Name Basic & Advanced Technical Setup

Multiviewer Settings

Layout X –

Display X –

Audio Monitoring from video X –

Audio Monitoring left-right tracks X –

DB15 output X –

HD output format X –

OSD Settings

Genlock Error X X

Disk Error X X

Network error X X

Clip name X X

Tally X –

Monitoring Settings

J3 Player (Char OUT) X X

J3 Recorder (Char OUT) X X

Char OUT J4 X X

Char OUT J1 X X

SD aspect ratio X X

SD edge enhancement X X

270 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.5.2. Multiviewer Settings

Introduction
The EVS servers equipped with the MV4 multiviewer on the MTPC board and with the
internal LAN provide the following ports on the rear panels:
• four output ports to allow the connection of four independent HD-SDI multiviewers;
• two intput ports to allow external feeds to be displayed on the multiviewer.
The EVS servers equipped with the Quad-MTPC multiviewer, provide the following ports
on the rear panels:
• two output ports to allow the connection of two independent HD-SDI multiviewers.
The output ports allow the following uses with the newest hardware configuration:
• four operators working independently on the same EVS server.
• two operators working with one multiviewer displaying recorders, and a second
multiviewer displaying players.
• operators to have a recorder display of an UHD-4K channel on one multiviewer, and
a player display of the UHD-4K channel on a second multiviewer, for example.
• operators to have an OSD output of PGM 3 and PGM 4 in Dual LSM mode.
The Multiviewer settings make it possible to specify the settings for each multiviewer,
such as the number of channels to combine and display, the audio and output video
configuration.

NOTE
On EVS servers with the latest rear panels, the Multiviewer OUT connectors
are labeled O1 to O2 (4U) or O4 (6U).
On EVS servers with former rear panels, the O1 connector is labeled HD-SDI,
and the O2 is labeled SD-SDI.

OSD with MV4 Multiviewers

The monitoring outputs of the MV4 multiviewer provide the following main modifications
or improvements on the OSD information compared to the discrete OSD through the
SDI Char OUT monitoring outputs (J3/J4):
• The OSD is displayed over the full screen.
• Tally information is integrated into the OSD.
• Channel names can be assigned by UMD/Tally protocol.
• Audio meters are displayed on the right margin.
• Clip ID and name (up to 24 characters) are displayed on the upper right corner.

4. Multicam Configuration 271

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

User Interface
The Multiviewer settings are available in the Multicam Configuration window, Monitoring
tab.
The Multiviewer settings will only be displayed if a Multiviewer board is present on the
EVS server.
When the EVS server is equipped with an MV4 multiviewer and internal LAN, four
Multiviewer sections are displayed.
The following screenshot displays the Multiviewer section on the Monitoring tab.

272 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Multiviewer 1-4

Maximum Number of Sources

With the MV4 multiviewer, the overall number of sources displayed in the multiviewers is
not limited.
With the Quad-MTPC multiviewer, the cumulated number of sources displayed in the
two multiviewers may not exceed 12 channels. If the requested layouts are not
supported, Multicam will display an error message.
For this reason, the following layout combinations are not supported on the Quad-MTPC
multiviewer:
• 8 (Multiviewer 1) + 8 (Multiviewer 2)
• 8 (Multiviewer 1) + 6 (Multiviewer 2)
• 6 (Multiviewer 1) + 8 (Multiviewer 2)

Layout

Description Specifies how the sources are displayed on the Multiviewer 1

to Multiviewer 4, one section being dedicated to each
Multiviewer.
The number of Multiviewer sections displayed depends on
what the hardware configuration supports.

Values The following layouts are available:

• 1
• 4 (2+2)
• 6 (3+3)
• 6 (4+2)
• 8 (3+3+2) (not useful on all servers)
• 8 (4+2+2)
The layout 8 (3+3+2) is not available on the multiviewer 2 with
the Quad-MTPC multiviewer

Default value • 4 (2+2) with ≤ 4 channels

• 6 (4+2) with 6-channel configurations 4IN-2OUT or 4OUT-
2IN
• 6 (3+3) with other 6-channel configurations
• 8 (3+3+2) with 8-channel configurations
• 6 (3+3) with more extended configurations
• 1 in UHD-4K

Available Layouts
The available layouts are:

4. Multicam Configuration 273

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

• 4 (2+2): 4 identical size images, 2 at the top, 2 at the bottom.

• 6 (4+2): 4 small size images at the top, 2 larger images at the bottom.

• 6 (3+3): 6 identical size images, 3 at the top, 3 at the bottom.

• 8 (3+3+2): 6 small size images in the first 2 rows, 2 larger images at the bottom. This
layout is not useful on all servers.

• 1: It is available with a UHD-4K configuration, and it allows users to monitor the four
quadrants of one PGM as shown below. This is relevant with an MV3.

• 1: It is available (with an MV4 multiviewer) with any configuration.

This can be useful in Dual LSM configurations, for example, to provide an OSD
output of a player channel when the OSD output of the given channel on the codec
module is not available:

274 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Source Display

Description Specifies the source linked to the corresponding display in the

selected layout.
You can select:
• no image (none).
• play channels (PGM)
• record channels (REC)
• direct input into the Multiviewer I1 and I2 connectors on
the back panel for external feeds.
The direct input values are only available with:
• the MV4 and MV4X multiviewer
• a resolution other than UHD-4K

Values The values available for recorder or player channels

correspond to the names the channels have been assigned in
the Channels tab, Channel and control settings, which are
the following by default:
• none
• PGM1 to PGM6
• REC1 to REC12
• EXT1 and EXT2 (EXT2 only on 6U servers)

Audio Monitoring from Video

Description Specifies the channel for which the audio will be monitored via
the SDI outputs.
This is selectable individually for each multiviewer.

Values The list of values includes the channels selected above for
multiviewer display.

Default value None

Audio Monitoring Left-Right Tracks

Description Specifies the pair of stereo audio tracks of the selected

channel to monitor.
This is selectable individually for each multiviewer.

Values From 1/2 up to 15/16, depending on the value defined for the
Number of tracks setting in the Channels tab, Audio
settings.

Default value 1/2: By default, the first stereo pair of the source is selected.

4. Multicam Configuration 275

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Multiviewer Format

DB15 Output

Description Specifies the color model to be applied to the multi-pin

multiviewer output on the rear panel of the EVS server.
The multi-pin multiviewer output corresponds to the HD-SDI
output 1.

Values • RGB HD
• YUV HD

Default value RGB HD

HD Output Format

Description Specifies the format for the HD output of the multiviewer.

Both multiviewers use the same HD output format.

Values The following values are available on an EVS server equipped

with a Quad-MTPC multiviewer or an MV4 multiviewer without
LAN:
• 720p
• 1080i
The following values are available on an EVS server equipped
with an MV4 multiviewer with internal LAN:
• 1080i
• 1080p

Default value • 720p (if the EVS Server is configured in 720p)

• 1080i (in other cases)

4.5.3. OSD Settings

User Interface
The OSD settings allow specifying the settings related to the OSD and information to
be displayed on the monitoring screen.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Monitoring tab
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T4.X)

276 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following screenshot displays the OSD settings on the Monitoring tab in the web-
based interface:

Genlock Error

Description Enables or disables the Genlock information display on the

monitoring output.
If the Genlock reference is not correct, the !GkV message
appears on the monitoring output.

Values Yes (default) / No

Disk Error

Description Enables or disables the disk error information display on the

monitoring output.
As the server is equipped with a RAID disk array, the
operation can continue seamlessly even with 1 faulty disk. If 1
disk is disconnected during operation, the !RAID message
appears on all monitoring outputs, and another message
appears when the operator shuts down the application, to
invite him to replace the disk and rebuild the RAID array.
Please, refer to the Technical Reference manual for details on
the RAID system and its maintenance.

Values Yes (default) / No

Network Error

Description Enables or disables the network error information display on

the monitoring output.
If there is an problem with the network connection, the !Net
message appears on the monitoring output. When the
network is available again, the system will try to reconnect
and the →Net message appears on the monitoring output.

Values Yes (default) / No

4. Multicam Configuration 277

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Clip Name

Description Specifies how the clip name is displayed.

Values VarID / Name

Default Name

Tally

Description Defines on which monitoring outputs the Tally signal will be

displayed.

Values The following values are available:

• Char OUT:
The tally signal will be displayed on the discrete OSD of
the Char OUT monitoring outputs.
• Multiviewer:
The tally signal will be displayed on the OSD of the
Multiviewer monitoring outputs.
• Char OUT + MVW:
The tally signal will be displayed both on the OSD of the
Multiviewer and of the Chart OUT monitoring outputs.

Default value Char OUT + MVW

4.5.4. Monitoring Settings

User Interface
The Monitoring settings allow specifying the settings related to the monitoring output
lines and the parameters linked to HD/SD down-conversion.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Monitoring tab
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T4.X)

278 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following screenshot displays the Monitoring settings on the Monitoring tab, in the
web-based interface:

J3 Player (Char OUT + Format)

Description Allows modifying the behavior of the J3 connector on V3X

codec modules used as player channels.
One of the following behaviors is possible:
• Clean (downconverted) output (initial behavior)
• Monitoring output (same behavior as J4)

Values The following values are available for the Char OUT setting:
• No: J3 is used with its initial behavior, and provides a
clean output.
• Yes: J3 is used as a monitoring output (same as J4), with
OSD displayed.
The value is forced if only a single behavior is possible.
The values for the Format setting is read-only and
corresponds to the current output format.

Default value No

4. Multicam Configuration 279

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

J3 Recorder (Char OUT + Format)

Description Allows modifying the behavior of the J3 connector on V3X

codec modules used as recorder channels.
One of the following behaviors is possible:
• Loop of input (initial behavior)
• Monitoring output (same behavior as J4)
This is especially useful in extended configurations.

Values The following values are available for the Char OUT setting:
• No: J3 is used with its initial behavior, and provides a
clean loop of input.
• Yes: J3 is used as a monitoring output (same as J4), with
OSD displayed.
The value is forced if only a single behavior is possible.
The values for the Format setting is read-only and
corresponds to the current output format.

Default value No

NOTE
See section "Configuring OSD Display" on page 281 for more information on
how the OSD-related settings can be configured with an XT3 server equipped
with V4X boards.

Char OUT J4

Description Specifies the monitoring output format generated on the J4

connector.

Values • SD
• HD (not supported in 1080p 3G Level A)
• 3G

Default value System dependent

Char OUT J1

Description Specifies the monitoring output type generated on the J1

connector.

Value • CVBS

280 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

SD Aspect Ratio

Availability This parameter is available when the EVS server is

configured in HD.

Description Specifies how the aspect ratio of HD video is converted in SD.

Values • 4:3 Letterbox: Black stripes are placed above and below
the active video to compensate for the full width.
• 4:3 Crop: Left and right ends of the active video are
cropped to compensate for the full height.
• 16:9: Corresponds to the HD aspect ratio. It is also called
anamorphic.

Default value 4:3 Letterbox

SD Edge Enhanc.

Description Defines the edge enhancer strength used when generating

the SD downconverted output video.

Values 0 to 100

Default value 66

4.5.5. Configuring OSD Display

Overview
This section explains how you configure the OSD-related settings to get the requested
OSD display on an EVS server equipped with V4X boards and an MV4 multiviewer.
Below the overview table, you will find details on how to configure the settings in the
various possible cases.

OSD OSD OSD OSD

Char. OUT Char. OUT MV4 MV4
REC PGM REC PGM

Monit. OSD on Outputs

Char. OUT = YES Yes Yes
=
YES OSD on Outputs
= NO No No

OSD on Inputs
= YES Yes Yes

OSD on Inputs
= NO No No

4. Multicam Configuration 281

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

OSD OSD OSD OSD

Char. OUT Char. OUT MV4 MV4
REC PGM REC PGM

Monit. OSD on Outputs

Char. OUT = YES No No Yes
=
NO OSD on Outputs
= NO No No No

OSD on Inputs
= YES No No Yes

OSD on Inputs
= NO No No No

Case 1: OSD on Char OUT and Multiviewer

If you want OSD display on both video connectors and multiviewer connectors:
• set the Monit. Char. OUT setting(s) to YES (see "Monitoring Settings"
AND
• set the OSD on outputs and/or OSD on inputs setting(s) to YES (see "OSD
Settings") depending on whether you want OSD on inputs, outputs or both.

Case 2: Clean Outputs on Char OUT and Multiviewer

If you do not want OSD display on both video connectors and multiviewer connectors:
• set the OSD on outputs and OSD on inputs setting(s) to NO (see "OSD Settings").

Case 3: OSD on Multiviewer + Clean Outputs on Char

OUT
• set the Monit. Char. OUT setting(s) to NO (see "Monitoring Settings"
AND
• set the OSD on outputs and/or OSD on inputs setting(s) to YES (see "OSD
Settings") depending on whether you want OSD on inputs, outputs or both on the
multiviewer.

282 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.6. Protocol Tab

4.6.1. Overview
The Protocol tab includes the settings that will be used with the Sony BVW75 protocol
and the EditRec feature.
The table below presents the settings of the Protocol tab. It specifies whether the setting
is available:
• in the basic or advanced display mode in the server-based and web-based
interfaces
• in the Technical Setup menu (T5.X) of the Remote Panel.

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

RS422 Protocols Settings

Id Type X X X

Sony BVW Settings

FFW/REW speed X X X

Use guardband X X X

List Remote CAM X X X

SONY Parallel Status X X X

Edit Rec 1 / 2

Port # read only read only

Playlist Settings

Default PL X X X

Time Code Settings

Serial Sony LTC X X –

Serial Sony VITC X X X

Insert TC in SDI – X X

User TC of created clips – X X

OSD Settings

OSD on Output X X X

Display sel – X X

TC H-Pos – X X

TC V-Pos – X X

4. Multicam Configuration 283

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Technical
Setting Name Basic Advanced
Setup

Name H-Pos – X X

Name V-Pos – X X

Audio Settings

Edit audio Fade X X X

Channel Settings

EE X X X

Stop Behavior X X X

Full EE command 'value' X X X

Tally/UMD Settings

Protocol X X –

UMD O/W X X –

Display Index X X –

RS422 VarID Settings

Uniqueness – read only –

Length – read only –

Format – read only –

VDCP visibility Settings

Port #1...6 – read only –

284 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.6.2. RS422 Protocols Settings

User Interface
The RS422 Protocols settings allow specifying the settings related to the clip
identification used to access the video clips.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Protocol tab, on page 1 in the basic and
advanced display mode in the server- and web-based interfaces
The following screenshot displays the RS422 Protocol settings on the Protocols tab in
the web-based interface:

ID Type

Description Specifies the clip ID used by the protocols to access and

identify the clips.
Please note that at any time, the VDCP protocol can decide to
use either the default value or the VarID (see RS422 VarID
Settings).
See section "Clip Identifiers" on page 286 for more
information on clip identifiers.

Values • ID LSM
• UmID

Default value ID LSM

4. Multicam Configuration 285

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.6.3. Clip Identifiers

LSM ID
The LSM ID is a clip identifier based on the EVS video server structure.
The LSM ID is made up of 3 digits and 1 letter, for example 112B, where the digits and
letter represent the following elements in the server structure:

The digits after the LSM ID correspond to the Net Number of the server on which the clip
is stored, i.e. the EVS video server ID on the XNet network. They are not part of the LSM
ID.

UmID
The UmID is an 8-bytes ID with fixed length.
It is used for the unique clip identification on the XNet network.

VarID
The VarID is a 32-bytes ID with variable length and format.
The following VarID parameters need to be set up:
• Length (8 bytes, 32 bytes)
• Format (ASCII, binary)
• Uniqueness level (local = server level, global = network level)
• Protocol visibility (list of Net Numbers of the servers)

NOTE
The VarID allows a redundant architecture where the VarID can be identical
on two different servers. All servers can stay on the same XNet network.
Consequently, this does not require a full replication of the XNet network. With
the UmID, the full replication was necessary as this clip ID has to be unique on
the XNet network.

286 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.6.4. Sony BVW Settings

User Interface
The Sony BVW settings allow specifying the settings that will be used with the Sony
BVW75 protocol.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Protocol tab, on page 1 in the basic and
advanced display mode in the server- and web-based interfaces
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T5.X)

WARNING
The Sony BVW settings are only available if the license code 118, required to
work with the Sony protocol, is valid.

The following screenshot displays the Sony BVW settings on the Protocol tab in the
web-based interface:

FFW/REW Speed

Description Specifies the speed used by the protocol for forward and
rewind operations.

Values 2 to 50 times the normal speed

Default value 50

Use Guardband

Description Makes the OUT guardband available to the protocol.

Values • Yes, meaning that the protocol has access to the IN and
OUT guardbands.
• No, meaning that the protocol has only access to the IN
guardband.

Default value No

4. Multicam Configuration 287

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

List Remote CAM

Description Allows access to the CAM recorders of the remote server

specified in the field next to the check box.

Values • Yes, meaning that the recorders of the local server and
the remote server are available.
When the setting is set to Yes, type the net numbers of the
distant servers you want to allow access to as follows:
<2;3;4>
• No, meaning that only the recorders of the local server are
available.

Default value No

SONY Parallel Status

Description Activates the Sony serial connection status reporting when

several controllers are used in parallel mode.

Values Yes / No

Default value Yes

4.6.5. EditRec

Introduction to Edit Rec

Edit Rec Protocol

The Edit Rec is a linear editing engine associated to a play channel and a record
channel on the EVS server. Its role is to emulate a VTR. The Edit Rec engine relies on
the Edit Rec protocol. In addition, both the play and the record channels of the Edit Rec
engine are associated to the same RS422 port.
For more information on the Edit Rec feature, refer to the Edit Rec manual.

288 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Overview on Edit Rec Settings

The Edit Rec settings allow specifying the settings that will be used by the Edit Rec
feature.
The Edit Rec settings are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Protocol tab, on page 2 for Edit Rec 1 and on
page 3 for Edit Rec 2, in the basic and advanced display mode in the server- and
web-based interfaces
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel, pages T5.X for Edit Rec 1 and
Edit Rec 2
The following screenshot displays the Edit Rec 1 settings on the Protocols tab in the
web-based interface:

Edit Rec 1/2 Setting

As two Edit Rec engines can be defined on a server, two pairs of play and record
channels can be assigned to this Edit Rec.
When an Edit Rec engine is set up on a server, the Port # parameter on the
corresponding Edit Rec settings page specifies the port number of the associated play
and record channels. If no Edit Rec engine has been configured, Port #-- is displayed.

NOTE
You can only edit the settings when the corresponding Edit Rec play channel
is stopped.

4. Multicam Configuration 289

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Playlist Settings for Edit Rec

User Interface
The Playlist settings allow specifying the playlist that will be loaded by default when the
Edit Rec starts.
The following screenshot displays the playlist settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab
in the web-based interface:

Default PL

Description Specifies the playlist loaded by default when the Edit Rec is
started.

Values 10 to 99

Default value 60

Audio Settings for Edit Rec

User Interface
The Audio settings allow specifying the settings related to the fading applied at the clip
boundaries.
The following screenshot displays the Audio settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in
the web-based interface:

Edit Audio Fade

Description Defines the audio effect to be applied to the clip boundaries

and included in the clip material.

Values • No
• V-Fade
• µMix

Default value No

290 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Time Code Settings for Edit Rec

User Interface
The Time Code settings allow specifying the timecode (TC) types used in various
communication protocols.
The following screenshot displays the Timecode settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols
tab in the web-based interface:

Serial Sony LTC

Description Specifies the type of timecode used in communications

between the Sony controller and the Edit Rec engine when
the controller works with the LTC.

Values This field is not editable.

The value is always Edit TC, meaning the timecode of the
playlist based on the Start TC.

Serial Sony VITC

Description Specifies the type of timecode used in communications

between the Sony controller and the Edit Rec engine when
the controller works with the VITC.

Values • Edit TC, the playlist timecode based on the defined Start
TC.
• User TC, the clip timecode from the USER TC table.

Default value Edit TC

4. Multicam Configuration 291

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Insert TC in SDI (1 or 2 fields)

Description Activates or deactivates the timecode insertion in the VITC in

SD or in the HANC in HD when the playlist is played out on the
Edit Rec play channel.

Values • No, no timecode is inserted.

• Yes, the following timecode is inserted:
◦ Edit TC, the playlist timecode based on the defined
Start TC.
◦ Default, the timecode selected in the D-VITC field in
SD, or in the HANC VITC / LTC fields in HD defined in
Timecode Insertion Settings.

Default value Yes - Edit TC

User TC of Created Clips

Description Specifies the TC type inserted into the User TC for the created
clips.

Values • Edit TC
• User

Default value Edit TC

Channel Settings for Edit Rec

User Interface
The Channel settings allow specifying the settings related to the channel behavior.
The following screenshot displays the Channel settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab
in the web-based interface:

292 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

EE

Description Activates the EE (Electronic to Electronic) mode, the signal

being recorded is played on the output channel without any
delay.

Values Yes / No

Default Value Yes

Stop Behavior

Description Defines the channel behavior when it is in stop mode.

Values • PB (playback): The EditRec playlist is displayed on the

EditRec output.
• EE: The EditRec input passes through the server and is
displayed on the EditRec output.

Default Value PB

Full EE Command 'Value'

Description Allows to specify whether the Full EE command is applied on

the audio and/or to the video.
The Full EE command makes it possible to view the source
connected to the EditRec through the EditRec outputs without
any audio or video delay.
From a practical point of view, this command allows the
operator to select the IN and OUT points of the sources and of
the recorder from a single monitoring window (EditRec
output).

Values The following values are available:

• Video+Audio: When the EVS server receives the Full EE
command, it is applied to the video and audio feeds.
• Audio: When the EVS server receives the Full EE
command, it is applied to the audio feeds only. This is
relevant with the Sony plugin Editor.

Default Value Video + Audio

4. Multicam Configuration 293

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

OSD Settings for Edit Rec

User Interface
The OSD settings allow specifying the settings related to the OSD and information to
be displayed on the monitoring screen.
The following screenshot displays the OSD settings for Edit Rec on the Protocols tab in
the web-based interface:

OSD on Output

Description Activates or deactivates the OSD feature.

Values Yes / No

Default value Yes

Display Sel

Description Specifies the field or combination of fields to be displayed on

the screen.
• The TC is the Edit TC or the User TC in case the controller
uses the VITC and User TC has been selected for the
Serial Sony VITC field.
• The Name is the number of the edited playlist.

Values • Name
• TC
• TC Status
• TC Status Name
• TC Name
• Status
• Status Name

Default value TC Status Name

294 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

TC H-Pos

Description Defines the horizontal position of the TC on the screens.

Values 0 to 9

Default value 4

Name H-Pos

Description Defines the horizontal position of the edit name on the screen.

Values 0 to 15

Default value 0

TC V-Pos

Description Defines the vertical position of the TC on the screen.

Values 0 to 11

Default value 10

Name V-Pos

Description Defines the vertical position of the edit name on the screen.

Values 0 to 11

Default value 0

4. Multicam Configuration 295

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.6.6. Tally Feature

Introduction
The Tally feature allows a protocol to send tally information on the monitoring outputs of
the EVS server.
The Tally feature relies on the following technical characteristics:
• Tally protocol: TSL 5.0 (defined in the Tally settings).
• Listening port (on EVS server): 9800
• Transport protocol: UDP inbound
Tally information is available:
• with the MV4 multiviewer and internal LAN.
• with the former Quad-MTPC multiviewer, but more limited.
• via the SDI Char Out monitoring outputs.
The tally information consists in red, green or amber color applied to different OSD
elements.

Displayed Tally Information

The tally information displayed on the monitoring outputs depends on the following
elements:
• Configuration of the hardware
• Selection of the monitoring outputs (Char OUT and/or MVW)
with the Tally setting in Monitoring tab, OSD section
• Selection of the channels (Rec and/or Play, or no display)
with the Tally setting in Operation tab, OSD section

296 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following table summarizes which Tally information is displayed depending on the
hardware and the Tally setting in the Monitoring tab.

Hardware > SDI Char Out Quad-MTPC MV4 Multiviewer

Tally value V outputs Multiviewer (and Internal LAN)

Char OUT Channel name Nothing displayed Nothing displayed

highlighted (upper left)

Multiviewer Nothing displayed Colored frame around Colored frame around

channel thumbnail channel thumbnail
+
Colored rectangles
(lower left and right)

Char OUT + Channel name Colored frame around Colored frame around
MVW highlighted (upper left) channel thumbnail channel thumbnail
+ +
Channel name Colored rectangles
highlighted (upper left) (lower left and right)
+
Channel name
highlighted (upper left)

In addition, the value for the Tally setting in the Operation tab will determine whether the
tally information is displayed for record channels, play channels, for both record and play
channels, or not displayed at all.

NOTE
The tally information on a Quad-MTPC multiviewer can only be applied to one
channel of the layout at a time.

Protocol Tally versus GPI Tally

The GPI tally is independent of the protocol tally (over PC LAN) and cannot be used at
the same time as the protocol tally.
A tally command sent via GPI will be represented as a red rectangle around the
monitoring output of the channel on which the GPI is defined.

4. Multicam Configuration 297

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.6.7. Tally/UMD Settings

User Interface
The Tally/UMD settings allow specifying some settings related to the Tally and UMD
information that can be displayed on the monitoring outputs (multiviewer or discrete
OSD).
The Tally/UMD settings are available in the Multicam Configuration window, Protocol
tab, in the basic and advanced display mode in the server- and web-based interfaces.
The following screenshot displays the Tally/UMD settings on the Protocols tab in the
web-based interface:

Protocol

Description Specifies the UMD protocol used to communicate with the

control system that provides the UMD and Tally information.

Values • Off:
No communication protocol is defined, and the Tally/UMD
features over PC LAN are disabled.
• TSL 5.0:
The TSL protocol is used to communicate with the control
system to provide the Tally/UMD information.

Default value Off

298 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

UMD O/W

Description Allows the UMD protocol to overwrite the name of the

corresponding external MVW input or REC/PGM (Channels
tab, Channel and Control settings, Name field) with the name
defined in the control system.
Once the channel names have been overwritten, the original
channel names defined on the EVS server can not be
restored. You have to retype them when you disable the UMD
O/W field.

Values • Yes: The channel names are overwritten.

• No: The channel names are preserved.

Default value No

Display Index

Description Display number assigned to each EVS server output

(REC/PGM or external MVW inputs).
It should logically correspond to the display number defined in
the control system.
Only the first number is defined manually.

Values 0 to 65,495 (maximum value with TSL 5.0 protocol)

Default value 10 (1st number)

The display number values for the IN, OUT and MVW channels are calculated and
assigned as follows:
• The display number value of the first IN channel (REC) has to be set manually. The
display number value of all subsequent IN channels is automatically calculated from
that first value and incremented sequentially.
Display number values are reserved for 24 IN channels.
• The display number value of the first OUT channel (PGM) is based on the display
number value of the first IN channel + 24. The display number value of all
subsequent OUT channels is sequentially and automatically incremented.
Display number values are reserved for 12 OUT channels.
• The display number value of the first external multiviewer input (EXT) is based on
the display number value of the first IN channel + 36 (24 + 12). The display number
value of all subsequent external multiviewer input channels is sequentially and
automatically incremented.
Display number values are reserverd for 4 external multiviewer inputs.
The following example (8 IN and 4 OUT) clarifies the rules above:

CHANNEL Display Index

IN1 (manually set by the user) 22

IN2 23

4. Multicam Configuration 299

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

CHANNEL Display Index

IN3 24

IN4 25

IN5 26

IN6 27

IN7 28

IN8 29

IN9 <not visible>

IN10 <not visible>

IN11 <not visible>

IN12 <not visible>

Multicam currently only supports up to 12 REC

OUT1 46

OUT2 47

OUT3 48

OUT4 49

OUT5 <not visible>

OUT6 <not visible>

Multicam currently only supports up to 6 PGM

EXT1 58

EXT2 59

Collective Commands
The following table presents the name and description of the collective command, as
well as the keyboard shortcut available in the server-based interface:

Command Description Shortcut

Enable Enables the overwrite command for all channels CTRL + Y

(Rec/Play) and external inputs that can be displayed
in a monitoring output.

Disable Disables the overwrite command for all channels CTRL + N

(Rec/Play) and external inputs that can be displayed
in a monitoring output.

300 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.6.8. RS422 VarID Settings

User Interface
The RS422 VarID settings and the VDCP visibility settings display the read-only
VarID settings.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Protocol tab in the advanced display mode in
the server- and web-based interfaces.

WARNING
The VDCP visibility settings are only available if the license code 119,
required to work with the VDCP protocol, is valid.

The following screenshot displays the RS422 VarID and the VDCP visibility settings on
the Protocols tab in the web-based interface:

4. Multicam Configuration 301

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

VarID Definition and Parameters

WARNING
Please contact the EVS support should you need to change the VarID
definition or parameters.

The VarID is a 32-bytes ID with variable length and format. The VarID settings enable
VDCP protocol to use the VarID to access the clip IDs on a server or on the XNet
network.
This page in the Multicam Configuration menu only displays the parameter values.
These values are extracted from the ‘[Link]’ file and can only be changed by editing
this external file. In case of error or undefined values, the corresponding parameter
default value is used.
If any of the VarID settings does not correspond to the network defined values set on the
XNet, the server will be disconnected from the network and operate in local mode. In this
case:
• The Multicam Configuration window clearly displays the message !Not XNet
common value! next to the incorrect parameter.
• A message is displayed on the XNet network monitoring screen indicating the
incorrect parameter.

302 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

VarID Configuration File

The VarID parameters are defined in a configuration file. This file, named [Link],
is located in the /mnt/apps/data/user folder (/user folder when you connect to the
EVS server using an FTP client).
The file has the following syntax:
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
; VARID settings
;------------------------------
;Parameter values and [default]
;
; Uniqueness= [Local] or Global
; Length= [32] or 8
; Format= [ASCII] or Binary
; Visibility= [], 1..29,*
; default= empty is converted to local XT Net number
; * for all XNet
;
;------------------------------
Uniqueness=Local
Length=32
Format=ASCII
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;

Uniqueness

Description Specifies whether the VarID will be unique at the XNet

network level or at the EVS server level.
This parameter is valid with VDCP, AVSP and LinX protocols.

Values • Global, the VarID is unique at the XNet network level.

• Local, the VarID is unique at the EVS server level.

Default value Local

Length

Description Specifies whether the VarID has a fixed length of 8 bytes or a

variable length of 32 bytes.

Values • 8, fixed length.

• 32, variable length.

4. Multicam Configuration 303

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Default value 32

Format

Description Specifies whether the VarID has an ASCII or binary format.

Values • ASCII
• Binary

Default value ASCII

VDCP Visibility

Description Specifies the list of servers which will be visible on the various
communication ports that the VDCP protocol will use to
communicate with. This parameter is only relevant for the
VDCP protocol.
For a list of servers, use the corresponding servers XNet
numbers separated with a semi-colon (;). Please note that the
list order is taken into account in the visibility. This means that
the system first searches for the requested clips on the first
server of the list, then on the second, and so on.

Values • (empty), the local server is used (converted to the local

XNet number).
• 1 to 29, the servers available on XNet.
• *, for all XNet servers.

Default value 1

304 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.7. GPI Tab

4.7.1. Overview
The GPI tab includes the settings of the GPI inputs and outputs signals.
The table below presents the settings of the GPI tab. They specify where the setting
groups are available (page) and whether each setting is available:
• in the server-based and web-based interfaces
• in the Technical Setup menu (T6.X) of the Remote Panel.

Technical
Setting Name Basic & Advanced
Setup

GPI Settings

TTL GPIs set as GPIs X T6.1

GPIs IN

Channel/Device X T6.2 to T6.3

Port X T6.2 to T6.3

Function X T6.2 to T6.3

Delay X T6.4

GPIs OUT

Function X T6.5

Type X T6.5

Advance X T6.6

Pulse duration X T6.6

Tally Playlist Settings

Tally X X

Add Clip to PL X X

Clips guardbands X X

4.7.2. GPI Settings

User Interface
The GPI Settings allow specifying the settings related to the GPI inputs and outputs
features.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:

4. Multicam Configuration 305

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

• in the Multicam Configuration window, GPI tab

• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T6.X)
The following screenshot displays the GPI settings on the GPI tab in the web-based
interface:

NOTE
If the TTL GPIs set as GPIs parameter is set to In, then the display looks like
the illustration above with 8 GPIs IN and 4 GPIs OUT lines.
If it is set to Out, then the display is reorganized to expose 4 GPIs IN and 8
GPIs OUT lines.

GPI Types and Functions

There are 3 types of GPIs available to be used on the servers:
• The input lines 1 to 4 are opto-isolated inputs.
• The output lines 1 to 4 are relay outputs.
• The GPIs TTL lines can be configured as 4 TTL inputs or 4 TTL outputs, in both
cases numbered from 5 to 8.

306 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

According to the protocol you are using, the following functions are available and can be
assigned to the GPIs lines as described hereunder in the Function parameter.
• AVSP: Play, Stop, Still, Recue, GotoClipIN, GotoClipOUT, Next, Skip.
• Sony: Play, Pause, Recue, Previous, Next, Skip.
• DD35: Play, Pause, Recue, Previous, Next, Skip.
• Odetics: Play, Pause, Recue, Next.
• VDCP: Play, Pause, Recue, Previous, Next, Skip.

NOTE
For all protocols, except AVSP, use the channel assignment (PGM1 to PGMx)
instead of the device protocol type (Sony BVW75, Odetics).
The AVSP protocol does not require any GPI IN setting in this page as they
are defined through specific serial AVSP commands. For this reason, specific
AVSP commands will not be available via the Function parameter for the
GPIs IN.

TTL GPIs set as GPIs

Description Defines the 4 configurable GPIs as inputs or outputs.

Values In / Out

Default value In

GPIs IN - Channel/Device

Description Specifies the server channel or the external device connected

to the corresponding GPI input line, and therefore to which
channel or device the GPI will be sent to.

Values The following values are possible and correspond to one of

the channels or controllers assigned in the Channel and
Control settings (Channels tab, page 1):
• PGMx: The GPI is sent to the specified play channel.
• RECx: The GPI is sent to the specified record channel.
• RMT1: The GPI is sent to the remote controller.
• <Protocol Name>: The GPI is sent to the third-party
controlling device.

4. Multicam Configuration 307

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

GPIs IN - Port

Description Specifies the RS422 port on which the server will receive the
input signal. This setting is relevant when the device is an
EVS remote controller or third-party controller.

Values The possible values are from 1 to 6: it corresponds to the

RS422 port to which the controller specified in the
Channel/Device field is assigned in the Port settings
(Channels tab, page 1).

GPIs IN - Function

Description Specifies the function associated to the GPI input line.

According the configured protocol some or all of the functions
described below are available.

Values • Play: sends a play command at 100% speed on the

selected channel.
• Pause: sends a pause command on the selected channel.
• Recue: sends a jump to the IN point of the on air element
on the selected channel. (If this is a playlist, the jump is
performed to the IN point of the first clip of the playlist.)
• Previous: sends a command to go to the previous clip of
a playlist on the selected channel.
• Next: sends a command to go to the next clip of a playlist
on the selected channel.
• Skip: sends a command to skip the clip being played on
the selected channel.
• Tally: activates or deactivates the on-air flag on the
selected channel.
• Mark IN: sets an IN point on the corresponding record
channel.
• Mark OUT: sets an OUT point on the corresponding
record channel.
• Mark Tly: sets an IN and an OUT points on record trains
based on changes in camera angles of the director’s cut.
An IN point is set on the train to which the director
switches and an OUT point is set on the train that the
director leaves.
• Exit ASP: sends a command to exit the loop as soon as
possible without playing the current element until its end
then jump to the selected element. (This GPI is used with
playlists in IPDirector.)
• Exit OUT: sends a command to exit the loop as soon as
the OUT point of the current element is reached then jump
to the selected element. (This GPI is used with playlists in
IPDirector.)
• None: no value is defined.

Default value None

308 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

GPIs IN - Delay

Description Specifies the time (number of seconds and/or frames) that the
server will wait after receiving the input signal before
executing the input-related function.

Values • 00s00fr to 02s00fr

• Disable

Default value Disable

GPIs OUT - Function

Description Specifies the function that activates the output line.

Values The following function can trigger a GPI OUT:

• Replace

GPIs OUT - Type

Description Specifies the type of GPI output signal that will trigger the
specified function.

Values The following values are possible:

The level changes to high level at
• close
activation.
• close A rising edge pulse is generated at
pulse activation.
The level changes to low level at
• open
activation.
• open A falling edge pulse is generated at
pulse activation.

GPIs OUT - Advance

Description Defines the time (number of seconds and/or frames), at which

the output will be generated ahead of the timecode linked to
the output line.

Values • 00s00fr to 02s00fr

• Disable

Default value Disable

4. Multicam Configuration 309

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

GPIs OUT - Pulse duration

Description Defines the pulse duration (number of seconds and/or

frames) for pulse type output lines.

Values • 00s00fr to 02s00fr (2fr steps)

• Disable

Default value Disable

4.7.3. Tally Playlist Settings

Introduction
The Tally Playlist settings allow specifying the settings related to the tally feature. This
feature allows the user to automatically create a clip for each change of camera
performed with the Director’s Cut and to add these clips to a playlist. The clips are
created automatically by the server as it receives GPIs IN signals from a switcher when
the director changes the camera angle.

User Interface
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, GPI tab
• in the Technical menu of the Remote Control Panel (T6.X)
The following screenshot displays the Tally settings on the GPI tab in the web-based
interface:

How to Activate the Tally Playlist Function

To use the tally function, proceed as follows:
1. Activate it using the Tally parameter.
2. Go to the GPIs IN settings area and select the GPI IN used for the tally control.
3. Set the Channel/Device on the REC on which the Director’s Cut is performed.
4. Set the function as Mark Tly.

310 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The tally function is now active, and works as follows:

When the server receives a ‘Mark tally’ GPI IN, an IN point is marked on the
corresponding record train (for ex. cam a). When a second ‘Mark Tally’ GPI IN is
received on a different record train (for ex. cam b), the server marks an OUT point on the
first record train (cam a) and an IN point on the second record train (cam b). All the clips
created this way are added to the defined playlist.

Tally

Description Activate or deactivate the playlist tally function.

Values Yes/No

Default Value Yes

Add Clip to PL

Description Selects the LSM ID of the playlist to which the tally clips will be
added.

Values 10 to 99

Default Value 99

Clips Guardbands

Description Specifies the guardbands length of the tally clips, in seconds.

Values 0 to 250

Default Value 0

4. Multicam Configuration 311

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.8. Operation Tab

4.8.1. Overview

Operation Tab
The Operation tab is available as the default tab with operational settings. It consists of
several pages in the basic mode in the server-based application. No advanced mode is
available in this tab.
The table below presents the settings of the Operation tab. They specify whether the
various settings are available:
• in the basic or advanced display mode in the server-based and web-based
interfaces.
• in the Operational Setup menu of the Remote Panel.

NOTE
• Some operational settings and/or setting values may be displayed
although they are not relevant to the EVS server you are operating or to
the configuration you are running.
• When the IPD-VIA parameter is enabled in the VIA Controller settings,
certain parameters will be highlighted. This to make clear that these
parameters do not apply to the IPD-VIA controller.

Op-Shared Tab versus Op-1/2 Tab

In the Dual LSM mode, the standard Operation tab is not available as such as the
operational settings are split into two groups:
• Most operational settings remain common to both LSM operators working on the
EVS server. They are available:
◦ in the Op-Shared tab in the server-based and web-based interface.
◦ in the Operational Setup menu of the (first) LSM Remote Panel of the first
LSM operator.
• Some operational settings are duplicated so that each LSM operator can define its
own setting values. They are available:
◦ in the Op-1/2 tab (page 8) in the server-based and web-based interface.
◦ in the Operational Setup menu, in pages located after the standard sections, in
Operator 1 or Operator 2 sections of the (first) LSM Remote Panel of each
operator.
In the following tables, where this is relevant, the settings duplicated in Dual LSM
have a cross in the Duplicated in Dual LSM column.

312 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

OSD Settings

Duplicated
Setting Name Basic Operational Setup
in Dual LSM

OSD settings 1.x

Cue Number on OSD X X -

Keyword info X X -

OSD on outputs X X -

OSD on inputs X X -

Background X X -

Tally X X -

Audio meters OSD settings 1.x

Audio Meters X X -

DB Adjust X X -

Style X X -

Thickness X X -

Clips Settings

Duplicated
Setting Name Basic Operational Setup
in Dual LSM

Clips settings 2.x

Automake clip for cam X X X

A to L

Make clips rem. trains X X -

Guardbands X X X

Default clip duration X X X

Autoname clips X X X

Clip post-roll X X -

Mark cue points X X X

Preroll X X -

Record trains OUTs X X -

Freeze on cue points X X X

Network Copy/Push X X -

Protocol receive page X X -

4. Multicam Configuration 313

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Duplicated
Setting Name Basic Operational Setup
in Dual LSM

Playlist receive page X X -

Timeline receive page X X -

Playlist Settings

Operational Duplicated
Setting Name Basic
Setup in Dual LSM

Playlist settings 3.x

Video effect duration X X X

Audio locked to video X X X

Audio effect duration X X X

Wipe type X X -

Default playlist speed X X X

Insert SLSM native speed X X X

Insert in playlist X X X

Confirm Ins/Del clips X X -

Advanced audio editing X X X

Extend split transition X X X

Swap audio tracks X X -

Playlist loop X X X

Playlist auto fill X X -

Fade to/from color X X -

Load playlist X X X

Make local auto X X -

Miscellaneous Settings

Operational Duplicated
Setting Name Basic
Setup in Dual LSM

Timeline settings 4.x

Mono per group X X -

TL Operator X X -

Protection settings 5.x -

Protect pages X X -

314 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Operational Duplicated
Setting Name Basic
Setup in Dual LSM

Clip edit by network X X -

Confirm delete clips/playlists X X X

Keywords settings 6.x

Keyword files X X -

Keyword mode X X -

Push settings 7.x

Push target X X -

Push target 1/2 X X X

Push mode X X -

Push receive page X X -

Push receive slots X X -

Audio settings 8.x

Audio slow motion X X -

Lipsync value X X -

Aux track output X X -

EVS Controller Settings

Operational Duplicated
Setting Name Basic
Setup in Dual LSM

EVS Controller settings 9.x

Effect duration for take X X X

Fast jog X X -

PGM Speed/Var max X X -

Lever engage mode X X X

Second lever range X X X

Recall clip toggle X X X

Record key X X -

VGA & Remote sync X X

Call channel VGA X X -

PGM/PRV mode X X -

Internal loop mode X X -

4. Multicam Configuration 315

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Operational Duplicated
Setting Name Basic
Setup in Dual LSM

Loop button X X X

Browse button X X X

Hypermotion Settings

Operational
Setting Name Basic
Setup

Hypermotion settings 11.x

Hypermotion X X

Recorder X X

Remote mode X X

Port X X

Protocol X X

Dial Speed X X

Special Effects Settings

Operational
Setting Name Basic
Setup

Special Effects settings 12.x

Paint/target transition X X

Set colour for X X

Colour X X

Custom Y X X

Custom U X X

Custom V X X

Split screen tracking X X

Paint/target OSD mon. X X

Internal offside line X X

Epsio X X

IP address X X

Default tool X X

Auto mark X X

316 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.8.2. OSD Settings

User Interface
The OSD settings allow users to specify which and how the information will be displayed
on the OSD.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational menu of the Remote Control Panel (1.1)
The following screenshot displays the OSD settings on the Operation tab in the web-
based interface:

Cue Number on OSD

Description Enables / disables the display of the cue point number on the
OSD of the monitoring outputs when a cue point is recalled
inside a record train.

Values Yes (default) / No

Keyword Info

Description Shows / hides the defined keywords and ranking on the OSD
of the monitoring outputs when the clip is loaded on its Short
IN point.
As soon as the operator starts jogging into the clip or initiates
a playback, this information is removed from the OSD so that
the video content is clearly visible.

Values Yes / No (default)

4. Multicam Configuration 317

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

OSD on Outputs

Description Enables / disables the OSD on the play channels on the

Multiviewer (MV4) and discrete monitoring outputs.
See section "Configuring OSD Display" on page 281 for more
information on how to configure OSD-related settings on
an XT3 equipped with V4X boards.

Values Yes (default) / No

OSD on Inputs

Description Enables / disables the OSD on the record channels on the

Multiviewer (MV4) and discrete monitoring outputs.
See section "Configuring OSD Display" on page 281 for more
information on how to configure OSD-related settings on an
XT3 equipped with V4X boards.

Values Yes (default) / No

Background

Description Applies a dark gray background to the OSD display.

Values Yes / No (default)

Tally

Description Defines whether the Tally signal will be displayed on the

record and/or play channels.

Values The following values are available:

• No:
The Tally signal is not displayed at all on the monitoring
outputs.
• Rec only:
The Tally signal is displayed on the monitoring outputs of
the record channels.
• PGM only:
The Tally signal is displayed on the monitoring outputs of
the play channels.
• Rec + PGM:
The Tally signal is displayed on the monitoring outputs of
the record and play channels.

Default value PGM + REC

318 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.8.3. Audio Meters OSD Settings

User Interface
The Audio Meters OSD settings allow users to specify whether and how the audio
meters are to be displayed on the OSD.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational menu of the Remote Control Panel (1.2)
The following screenshot displays the Audio Meters OSD settings on the Operation tab
in the web-based interface:

Display On PGM

Description Shows/hides the audio meters on the OSD. The Audio Meters
parameter impacts the output channels of both discrete OSD
(Char OUT) and multiviewer, but not the input channels.

Values Yes / No

Default value Yes

DB Adjust

Description Adjusts the value of the displayed audio meters.

Values From - 83.2 to 0.0 dB, with a variable increments (larger in low
values, and smaller with increasing values).

Default value 0.0

4. Multicam Configuration 319

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Style

Description Specifies the style of the audio meters;

The Style parameter impacts the audio meters of the discrete
OSD (Char OUT), but not those of the multiviewer when the
XT3 server is equipped with a multiviewer and internal LAN.

Values Light Bars , Glowing Boxes , Dark Boxes , Light Boxes , Dark
Bars

Default value Light Bars

Thickness

Description Specifies the thickness of the audio meters;

The Thickness parameter impacts the audio meters of the
discrete OSD (Char OUT), but not those of the multiviewer
when the XT3 serveris equipped with a multiviewer and internal
LAN.

Values Thin, Medium, Thick

Default value Thin

4.8.4. Clips Settings

User Interface
The Clips settings relate to various aspects of the clip management: clip definition,
storage location, metadata, and cue points.
The Clips settings are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational menu of the Remote Control Panel (2.X).

320 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following screenshot displays the Clips settings on the Operation tab in the web-
based interface:

Automake Clip for CAM A to L

Availability This parameter is only displayed in Multicam LSM, Replay-

Only LSM and XSense configurations.

Introduction When creating clips, the clip corresponding to the camera on

which IN/OUT points have been marked are always saved. It
is possible to save automatically the same action on the other
cameras.
Only cameras letters applicable to the logical channels are
displayed.

Description Specifies that clips have to be created on the given cameras

(A to L) even if no IN or OUT point has been marked on that
camera.

Values Yes / No

Default value Yes

Make Clip Rem. Trains

Availability The setting Make clip remote trains is only available if the
license code 117 is valid.

Description Allows users to clip all cameras of a remote EVS server if at

least one record train of that server is controlled.

Values Ctrled Cams / All cams

Default value Ctrled Cams

4. Multicam Configuration 321

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Guardbands

Description Specifies the amount of A/V material that remains available

before and after a clip (called 'guardbands') when the clip is
created.

Values From 00s00fr to 60s00fr

Default value 05s00fr

Default Clip Duration

Description Specifies the duration of clips created with only one reference
point (IN or OUT point).

Values Disable, or from 00s01fr to 4h.

When set to 'Disable', both IN and OUT points are required to
be able to create a clip.
The duration can be set:
• With second granularity up to 1 minute
• With minute granularity from 1 minute up to 4 hours.

Default value 04s00fr

Autoname Clips

Description If this function is enabled, the value of the selected field will
automatically be used to name the clip upon creation.

Values The values from the following fields can be used to

automatically name clips:
• Disabled:
No name is assigned to a clip when it is created.
• TC IN:
The timecode of the IN point of the clip is automatically
assigned to a clip when it is created.
• CAM Name:
The name of the record channel is automatically assigned
to a clip when it is created.
• ID Louth:
The ID Louth of the clip, i.e. the unique identifier for the
clip on the XNet network, is assigned to a clip when it is
created.
• VarID 32:
The VarID of the clip is assigned to a clip when it is
created.
When this option is selected, the VarID used to assign a
name to the clip will be limited to the first 8 characters of
this field.

Default value Disabled

322 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Clip Post-Roll

Description When the post-roll function is enabled from the secondary clip
menu, the clip will play through its OUT point for the duration
defined by the Clip post-roll parameter.
This is also valid inside record trains if the Record Train OUTs
parameter is set to Freeze.

Values From 00s00fr to 600s00fr

Default value 02s00fr

Mark Cue Point

Description Specifies how the cue point timecode will be memorized.

Values Two values are possible for this parameter:

• Live:
Memorizes cue points based on the timecode of the LIVE
input.
• Playback:
Memorizes cue points based on the timecode of the field
loaded on the main play channel.

Default value Live

Preroll

Description Preroll duration used when recalling a cue point.

Values From 0s01fr to 5s00fr.

Default value 0s05fr

4. Multicam Configuration 323

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Record Trains OUTs

Description Specifies whether Multicam will freeze or play through when it

reaches an OUT point marked on the record train that is being
played back.

Values Two values are possible for this parameter:

• Play through:
Multicam will still countdown to the OUT point, but will
keep playing through this point.
• Freeze:
Multicam will countdown to the OUT point and will
automatically freeze:
◦ on that picture if the post-roll mode is disabled
◦ on that picture + the post-roll duration if the post-roll
mode is enabled.
When playing a clip, Multicam always freezes on the OUT
point (or OUT point + post-roll duration when post-roll mode is
enabled).

Default value Play through

Freeze on Cue Points

Description Specifies whether Multicam will freeze or not when it reaches

a cue point marked on the clip and/or the record train that is
being played back.
The post-roll parameter is not taken into account for this
functionality.

Values • No:
The playout plays through the cue points when playing
clips or record trains.
• Clips + Trains:
The playout freezes on the cue points when playing clips
or record trains where cue points have been defined.
• Clips:
The playout freezes on the cue points when playing clips
where cue points have been defined.
• Record Trains:
The playout freezes on the cue points when playing
record trains where cue points have been defined.

Default value No

324 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Network Copy/Push (Supersedes 'Default Copy/Move')

Description Allows you to select the prefered network for copying, pushing
and creating a clip on a distant server.
This setting is taken into account when the destination
machine is visible both on the XNet and GbE networks.

Values Two values are possible for this parameter:

• XNet:
The operations are executed through the XNet network.
There is no failover mechanism to the GbE interface.
• Gigabit (XNet failover):
The copy operations are first executed via the GbE
interface.
If the transfer is not possible (ports not connected, IP
address unknown, etc.) and the EVS server is in mono-
essence mode, the transfer is then tried through XNet.
Whatever the value defined for this setting, the following rules
are applied if both networks are available:
• Transfers to GbE targets are always performed via the
GbE interface.
• Metadata is always transferred via the XNet interface.
The value is forced to Gigabit if the code 117 (SDTI) is not
valid on the EVS server, or if the XNet network is not active.

Default value XNet

Protocol Receive Page

Description Specifies on which page the clips created by protocols are

stored. When a page is full, clips are stored on the next page.
Only clips created on this page (and the other protocol pages
if the first page is full) are visible for protocols.

Values 1 to 10 (=0)

Default value 6

4. Multicam Configuration 325

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Playlist Receive Page

Introduction This setting is linked to the copy function that allows users to
automatically create a local copy of all network clips when
copying a local or network playlist. For details, refer to the
description of the Playlist copy function in the Operations
manual.

Availability The setting is only available if the license code 111 or 112 is
valid.

Description Specifies on which page(s) of your EVS server the clips

received when using the PLST+CLIPS copy function must be
stored.
Clip pages can be assigned simultaneously as PUSH and
PLST Receive Pages.

Values 1 to 10 (=0)

Default value 0 (page 10)

Timeline Receive Page

Description Specifies on which page(s) the clips automatically created in

timeline mode as part of the timeline editing process are
stored.

Values 1 to 10 (=0)

Default value 0 (page 10)

4.8.5. Playlist Settings

User Interface
The Playlist settings relate to various aspects of playlist management and effects.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (3.X)

326 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

The following screenshot displays the Playlist settings on the Operation tab in the web-
based interface:

Availability
The Playlist settings are only available if the license code 111 or 112 is valid. Some
playlist settings are tied to the code 112, and will therefore not be available if the license
code is not valid.
You can also create and manage playlist exclusively via protocols. In this case, the
playlist settings will not be available, and all playlist-related parameters will be defined
by the controlling application or device.

NOTE
Some operational settings may be displayed although they are not relevant to
the EVS server you are operating or to the configuration you are running.

4. Multicam Configuration 327

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Video Effect Duration

Description Sets the duration of video transition effect. The specified

value is used as default value in the Playlist Edit mode.
Note that the duration of the video transition when using the
TAKE button in 1PGM+PRV mode has its own parameter,
Effect for take, defined in the EVS Controller section of the
Operation tab.

Values 0s00fr to 20s00fr

Default value 00s10fr

Audio Locked to Video

Availability This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid.

Description Specifies whether you will be able to define different durations

for the audio and video transitions inside a playlist when the
Advanced Audio Editing parameter is enabled.
This setting is irrelevant if the Advanced Audio Editing
parameter is disabled.

Values The possible values are:

• Yes: The duration of video and audio transitions in a
playlist cannot be different.
• No: The duration of the video and audio transitions in a
playlist can be different.
If the license code 112 for advanced audio editing is not valid,
the parameter value is forced to 'Yes'.

Default value Yes

Audio Effect Duration

Availability This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid.
This setting is only available when the Audio locked to
video setting is set to No.

Description Sets the duration of the audio transition effect when:

• the Advanced Audio Editing setting is enabled.
• the Audio locked to video setting is set to 'No'.
The specified value is used as default value in Playlist Edit
mode.
If the Advanced Audio Editing is disabled, this setting is not
relevant since the video and audio transitions will always have
the same duration, based on the Video Effect Duration.

Values 0s00fr to 20s00fr

Default value 0s00fr

328 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Wipe Type

Description Specifies the vertical wipe effects from Left to Right or from
Right to Left.

Values Vert. L>R / Vert. R>L

Default value Vert. L > R

Default Playlist Speed

Description Defines the default speed used to play clips in a playlist.

Values The following values are possible Unknown, and from 0% to

100%:
• Unknown means that the speed of the previous clip in the
playlist will be used as a reference for the current clip.
• 0% will force the playlist to pause at the end of each clip.
• 1% to 100% will apply the specified speed as default
speed for playlist elements.

Default value Unknown

Insert SLSM Native Speed

Description Defines whether an SLSM clip inserted into a playlist will

automatically be set to be played out at its native speed, or at
the value defined in the Default playlist speed parameter.

Values The following values are possible:

• No means that playout speed of the SLSM clips depends
on value defined in the Default playlist speed.
• Yes means that the speed of the playout SLSM clips is
automatically set to its native speed.

Default value No

Insert in Playlist

Description Specifies if the clips add to a playlist are insert before or after
the active clip in the playlist.

Values After / Before

Default value Before

4. Multicam Configuration 329

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Confirm Ins/Del Clips

Description Specifies whether a confirmation will be required each time

the operator wants to add a clip to the playlist or remove a clip
from the playlist.

Values • Enabled (Yes)

• Disabled (No)

Default value Disabled (No)

Advanced Audio Editing

Availability This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid.

Description Activates /deactivates the desynchrone (audio/video) editing

in a playlist edit mode.
Changing this parameter modifies the display on the
monitoring outputs and adds special function keys on the LCD
screen to define different transition points and durations on
the video and audio tracks.

Values • Enabled (Yes)

• Disabled (No)

Default value Disabled (No)

Extend Split Transition

Availability This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid.

Description Determines how the transition should be extended when the

transition duration on the audio or video track only is modified.
This parameter is only useful when performing split audio
editing.

Values The following values are possible:

• Center (on) Cut:
Extends equally on both sides of the transition.
• End (on) Cut:
Extends the beginning of the transition to the left so that
the end of the transition is unchanged.
• Start (on) Cut:
Extends the end of the transition to the right so that the
beginning of the transition is unchanged.
• Ask:
Allows the operator to select any of the above options
when editing the duration of the transition.

Default value Center Cut

330 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Swap Audio Tracks

Availability This setting is only available if the license code 112 is valid.

Description Defines whether the audio tracks to swap are automatically or

manually selected, when performing split audio editing with at
least 4 mono audio tracks per video.

Values The following values are possible:

• Auto:
The audio tracks to swap are automatically selected by
the application when inserting a swap point.
This is the default value in 4-audio configurations.
• Manual:
The operator can define which audio tracks he wants to
swap when inserting a swap point.
This is the only value available in 8- and 16-audio
configurations.

Default value Auto

Playlist Loop

Description Specifies whether the playlists in play mode will be looped

and played back continuously.

Values • Enabled (Yes)

• Disabled (No)

Default value Disabled (No)

4. Multicam Configuration 331

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Playlist Auto Fill

Description Specifies which camera angles will be added to the playlists

when using the Fill Playlist (F9) function from the main menu
of the Remote Panel.

Values The following values are possible:

• All Cams:
The clips for all camera angles will be added to the
playlist.
• Prim+Sec:
The clips corresponding to the primary and secondary
camera angles will be added to the playlist.
• Primary:
The clips corresponding to the primary camera angles will
be added to the playlist.
• Secondary:
The clips corresponding to the secondary camera angles
will be added to the playlist.
• Cam A, Cam B, Cam C, Cam D, Cam E or Cam F:
The clips corresponding to the defined camera angle will
be added to the playlist.

Default value All Cams

Fade To/From Color

Description Specifies the color that is used in the transition effects ‘fade to
color’, ‘fade from color’ and ‘fade to/from color’ (V fade).

Values Black / White

Default value Black

Load Playlist

Description This parameter is only used in 2PGM or 3PGM mode.

Values The following values are available:

• Always:
This always loads the selected playlist in PGM/PRV
mode.
• Conditional:
This loads the selected playlist on the selected PGM only
if only 1 channel is active when entering the Playlist Edit
mode. It allows loading and playing multiple playlists using
a single Remote Panel.

Default Value Always

332 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Make Local Auto

Description When this setting is enabled and a local playlist is loaded on a

play channel, local clips corresponding to distant elements of
that playlist are automatically created.
The local copy of the playlist elements are stored on the first
available locations on the Playlist Receive Page.

Values • Enabled (Yes)

• Disabled (No)

Default value Disabled (No)

4.8.6. Timeline Settings

User Interface
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (4.1)
The Timeline settings relate to the audio groups in timelines.
The following screenshot displays the Timeline settings on the Operation tab in the web-
based interface:

Mono per Group

Description Defines how many audio mono channels are associated to

each of both audio tracks of a timeline.

Values The following values are possible, depending on the value

defined for the Number of tracks setting in the Channels tab:
# tracks Possible values

4 2

8 4 (default) , 2+6, 6+2

16 8

NOTE
The 2+6 feature is particularly useful when working in Dolby audio to assign a
timeline track to the stereo pair and the other track to the Dolby 5.1 audio.

4. Multicam Configuration 333

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

TL Operator

Availability The parameter is only available in specific conditions, with the

license code 116 (Dual LSM option).

Description Defines, in Dual LSM mode, which operator can use the
timeline feature and therefore control the timeline engine.

Values 1 (Operator # 1) or 2 (Operator # 2)

4.8.7. Protection Settings

User Interface
The Protection settings aim at protecting clips stored on the EVS server from deletion.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (5.1)
The following screenshot displays the Protection settings on the Operation tab in the
web-based interface:

Protect Pages

Description Specifies the pages on which the clips stored are protected
from accidental deletion.
The clips stored on these pages are also protected when
using the Clear All Clips (F7) function from the main menu of
the Remote Panel.
See section "Navigating and Editing in the Multicam
Configuration Window" on page 162 for more information on
how to enable pages.

Values Page 1 to 10 (=0). Several pages can be selected.

WARNING
When the option Clear Video Disks is selected in the Multicam Setup
window of the server-based application, all clips are deleted, including the
protected ones.

334 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Clip Edit by Network

Availability This setting is only available if the license code 117 is valid.

Description Allows users to edit clips on the whole XNet network.

Values The following values are possible:

• Yes:
Other users on the network can trim, rename, delete, etc.
your clips, or modify the keywords and ranking assigned
to your clips.
• No:
Only the local operators can modify or delete clips on the
server and edit their metadata.

Default value No

Confirm Delete Clips/Playlists

Description Enables a confirmation request when users delete clips,

playlists or in both situations.

Values The following values are possible:

• Off:
Clips and playlists are immediately deleted.
• Clips:
A confirmation is required for a clip deletion, but not for a
playlist deletion.
• Playlists:
A confirmation is required for a playlist deletion, but not for
a clip deletion.
• Clips & Playlists:
A confirmation is required both for a playlist deletion, and
for a clip deletion.

Default Values Off

NOTE
This parameter does not apply to the Clear Video Disks command, available
in the Multicam Setup window of the server-based application, which already
has its own confirmation message.

4. Multicam Configuration 335

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.8.8. Keywords Settings

User Interface
The Keywords settings allow the management of keywords on the EVS server.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
◦ on page 1 on the web-based interface
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (6.1)

WARNING
The Keywords settings are only available if the license codes 124 and 125 are
valid.

The following screenshot displays the Keywords settings on the Operation tab in the
web-based interface:

336 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Keyword Files

Description Specifies the keywords file that can be used to assign

keywords to clips or to search the clips database.

Values The following values are possible:

• -------- :
No keywords file is selected, and the keyword assignment
and related search functions are not available.
• SERVER:
The keywords file sent by the active EVS server to all
systems on the XNet network will be used. This value is
only available if the XNet network is used.
• <Keywords file name>:
◦ Other file names will appear if keywords files (files
with a .KWD extension) have been loaded in the
/mnt/apps/data/kwd directory of the system
(/kwd via FTP).
◦ Keyword files can be imported using the Import/Export
Keyword Files function in the Multicam Setup window.
See section "Importing and Exporting Keyword Files"
on page 49 for details about keyword import/export
function,
◦ See the "Keyword Management" section in the
Multicam operational manual for details about the
keywords file format and keywords-related functions,

Default Values -------- (keywords file not selected)

Keyword Mode

Description Specifies the keyword assignment/search mode on the EVS

Remote Panel.

Values The following values are possible:

• List:
It will display the keywords by groups of 8 on the LCD of
the Remote Panel and the operator can select them with
the corresponding F_ key.
• Numeric:
It doesn’t display the keywords list on the LCD, but allows
the operator to enter directly the keyword ID using the F_
keys.
The Numeric mode is faster when the operator knows the
position of the keywords inside the keywords file, either
from memory, using the VGA keyword screens, or using a
print of the keywords list.

Default Values List

4. Multicam Configuration 337

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

4.8.9. Push Settings

User Interface
The Push settings relate to the management of the Push function on the EVS server.
The Push function allows users to easily send a copy of a clip to another machine on the
network via the GbE network or the XNet network.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (7.1)

WARNING
The values available in the Push settings depend on the presence of the XNet
hardware or GbE hardware.

The following screenshot displays the Push settings on the Operation tab in the web-
based interface:

338 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Push Target

Description Specifies which EVS servers will be listed as possible targets

for push actions when the user selects:
• the default Target 1 and Target 2 in the settings, or
• a target for a specific push action if no default target has
been configured.

Values The following values are possible:

• XNet:
Only XNet targets will be listed. The servers are listed by
their network system name and number.
• Gigabit:
Only EVS servers reachable via the GbE network and not
present on the same XNet network will be listed. The
servers are listed by their GbE server name, and IP
Address.
• XNet +Gigabit:
First the servers on the same XNet network connected
through XNet are listed, then the servers not on the same
XNet network but reachable via the GbE network are listed.
The Gigabit and XNet +Gigabit values are not available if the
EVS server does not have a GbE board.

Default Value XNet

Push Target 1 / 2

Availability These parameters are only available in the server-based

application, not in the web-based interface.

Description Specifies to which machine(s) on the network the clips must

automatically be sent when the operator uses the PUSH
function on the Remote Panel.
The machines defined in this setting are also used as default
target for clip copies.
The users can define two default targets: Target 1/ Target 2.
The clips will be pushed in sequential order.

Values A list of values will be displayed depending on the value

assigned to the Target setting:
• --------:
When no target is defined in these parameters, the user
will be able to define the requested target when (s)he calls
the PUSH function.
• <network system name and number>are listed and can
be assigned for targets belonging to the XNet network.
• <GbE server name and IP Address> are listed and can
be assigned for targets belonging on the GbE network.

Default Values -------- (No target machine specified)

4. Multicam Configuration 339

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Push Mode

Description Specifies how the clips should be sent using the PUSH
function, that is to say with or without the original guardbands.

Values The following values are possible:

• Short:
The clips are sent from the Short IN to the Short OUT
points, to which the guardbands of the destination
machine are added.
• Long:
The clips are sent from the Protect IN to the Protect OUT.

Default Values Short

Push Receive Page

Description Specifies the page of your machine where clips sent to you by
other network operators using the PUSH function must be
stored first.
When the preferred slots on the first page are fulled, the clips
are stored on the preferred slots of the next page.
See section "Navigating and Editing in the Multicam
Configuration Window" on page 162 for more information on
how to enable pages.

Values Page 1 to 10 (=0). A single page can be selected.

Default Values (Page) 5

Push Receive Slots

Description Specifies the clip position(s) (A to L) where the pushed clips

will be stored in priority, starting on the page specified in the
Push Receive Page setting.
See section "Navigating and Editing in the Multicam
Configuration Window" on page 162 for more information on
how to enable slots.

Values Slot A to L. Several slots can be selected.

Default Values (CAM) A,B,C,D

340 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.8.10. Audio Settings

User Interface
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (8.1)
The following screenshot displays the Audio settings on the Operation tab in the web-
based interface:

Audio Slow Motion

Description Allows users to play back or mute the audio track when the
playing speed is different than 100%.

Values The following values are possible:

• No: The audio track is muted during the playback.
• Yes: The audio track is not muted during the playback. It
will be faded in, then muted above a given threshold
(400%).

Default value No

Lipsync Value (ms)

Description Specifies the delay (in ms) between video and audio signals:
• A positive value means video is ahead of audio.
• A negative value means audio ahead of video.

Values The following values are possible:

• Range for PAL: from -41,458 ms to 14,708 ms → 848 to
3544 samples, 0 ms → 2838 samples
• Range for NTSC: from -34,625 to 12,125 ms → 688 to
2932 (samples), 0 ms → 2350 samples

Default value 0 ms

NOTE
This adjustment is done during the record process. A new Lipsync value will
apply for the next recorded pictures only.

4. Multicam Configuration 341

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Aux Track Output

Description Specifies to which audio outputs the auxiliary track of the

playlist will be played out.

Values The following values are possible:

• PRV:
The auxiliary track will use the audio outputs normally
assigned to the PRV channel. If no PRV channel is
available, the Aux Track will not be assigned to any audio
output.
• PRV&7-8/15-16:
The auxiliary track will use the audio outputs normally
assigned to the PRV channel if there is one, plus all the
audio outputs from 7-8/15-16 that have not yet been
assigned to another channel. Use this option if you need
an auxiliary track without PRV channel available.
• PGM:
The auxiliary track will use the audio outputs normally
assigned to the PGM channel.

Default value PRV

4.8.11. EVS Controller Settings

Introduction
The EVS Controller settings gather:
◦ Settings related to the behavior of the keys, lever or jog of the Remote Panel.
◦ Settings associated to the EVS server itself.

WARNING
Most of the settings are only available or applicable with base configurations
associated to the use of an EVS Remote Panel (LSM Remote , XSense
Remote ).

342 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

User Interface
These fields are available in the following interface:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab.
The following screenshot displays the EVS Controller settings on the Operation tab in
the web-based interface:

Effect Duration for Take

Description Defines the duration of the transition when using the TAKE
key to chain 2 sequences in PGM+PRV mode.

Values Range of values: 00s00fr to 20s00fr.

Default value 00s05fr

Fast Jog

Description Sets the increment of the jump when the Remote Panel is
used in Fast Jog mode.

Values The values from 1 to 20 times are possible.

Default value 20x

4. Multicam Configuration 343

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

PGM Speed / Var Max

Availability The Var Max option is not available with XSense

configurations.

Context During playback, if PGM Speed or Var Max has been enabled
in the secondary menu of the Remote Panel, the lever range
will be adapted so that:
• the only playback value for any position of the lever other
than 0, is the one specified by this parameter in the setup
(PGM Spd mode ON)
OR
• the speed range defined by the lever is limited to the value
specified by this parameter (VarMax mode ON).

Description Specifies the playback speed assigned to the lever when the
PGM Speed or Var Max command is used.

Values Range of values from 1 to 400 %

Default value 50%

Lever Engage Mode

Description Specifies how the playback speed varies depending on the

position of the lever.
This parameter is not relevant in XSense configurations.

Values The following values are possible:

• Direct mode:
The lever will engage directly when moved, resulting in a
speed jump to the desired speed determined by the lever
arm position.
• Current speed mode:
The lever will only engage when it reaches the current
playback speed, whereas a move of the lever arm in the
opposite direction of the current speed will result in a
direct speed change.

Default value Direct

344 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Second Lever Range

Context The lever can be used in normal mode to play back clips at
slow motion speed from 0 to 100%. A secondary range is
available to playback material at other speed ranges.
To gain access to the secondary speed from the remote
controller, press SHIFT + LEVER/TAKE.
The second lever range is also available when editing the
speed of playlist clips.

Description Specifies the secondary speed range on the Remote Panel.

Values The following values are possible:

• -100% → +100%
• 0 → +200%
• -200% → +200%
• 0 → +300%
• 0 → +400%
• -400% → +400%

Default value -100% → +100%

Recall Clip Toggle

Description Enables/disables the selection of the camera of a clip through

the Function keys: Pressing several times the F_ key browses
to CAM A, CAM B, CAM C, CAM D, CAM E and CAM F.

Values Yes / No

Default value Yes

Record Key

Description Changes the function of the RECORD key on the Remote

Panel, as described below.

Values The following values are possible:

• Start REC+Live:
Pressing the RECORD key starts the record process and
switches to LIVE mode.
• Live:
Pressing the RECORD key only switches to last recorded
picture, but the record is not restarted if it has been
previously stopped by the operator.

Default value Start REC+Live

4. Multicam Configuration 345

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

VGA & Remote Sync

Description Specifies whether and how the current clips machine, page
and bank of VGA screens and Remote Panel must be
synchronized.

Values The following values are possible:

• No:
Clip machine, page and bank can be selected
independently on the VGA screen and on the Remote
Panel.
• Yes:
Clip machine, page and bank are synchronized between
VGA screen and Remote Panel. Connecting to the clips of
a network machine or coming back to the clips of the local
machine, or selecting a new page or bank on one side will
be automatically reflected on the other.
• Server:
Clip pages and banks can be selected independently on
VGA and Remote Panel, but connecting to the clips of a
network machine or coming back to the clips of the local
machine on the VGA or Remote Panel will be
automatically reflected on the other.

Default value No

Call Channel VGA

Description Enables or disables the Call Channel function on the VGA

Clip screen. This function allows the operator to select on
which PGM channel the clips called from the keyboard and
VGA should be loaded.

Values Yes / No

Default value Yes

346 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

PGM/PRV Mode

Description Allows the user to select the PGM/PRV mode on the LCD
display as a function accessible from the A button on the
Remote Panel’s main menu.
Otherwise, the PGM/PRV mode selection is not accessible
from the A button.

Values The following values are possible:

• Yes: The PGM/PRV mode is available from the A key on
the Remote Panel.
• No: The PGM/PRV mode is not available from the A key
on the Remote Panel.

Default value Yes

Internal Loop Mode

Description Defines which components of PGM1 output must be recorded

back into the server when the Loop mode is engaged.

Values The following values are possible:

• Video + Audio:
Both video and audio signals of PGM1 are recorded back
into CAM A input.
• Video only:
Only the video signal of PGM1 is recorded back into CAM
A input. This allows the operator to continue the record of
live audio tracks during the Loop process. This can be
useful to add music, voice or live sound to an edit for
example.

Default value Video + Audio

NOTE
In audio embedded, the audio is always looped, whether the loop mode is set
to Video + Audio or Video only.

4. Multicam Configuration 347

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Loop Button

Description Defines the behavior of the loop function enabled with the
SHIFT + Loop.

Values The following values are possible:

• Internal loop:
Pressing the loop button enables the internal loop where
the main output PGM1 is recorded back into the CAM A
input.
The internal loop is not available when at least one SLSM
recorder is defined in the Multicam configuration.
• Loop clip:
Pressing the loop button loops the loaded clip between its
Short IN and Short OUT points, when you are located
between these two points.
• Loop clip bounce:
Pressing the loop button loops bounce the loaded clip
between its Short IN and Short OUT points, when you are
located between these two points.
• Disable:
Pressing the loop button has no effect.

Default value Internal loop

Browse Button

Description Allows users to convert the function of the BROWSE key.

Values The following values are possible:

• Browse:
◦ Without cue points:
This will directly activate the playlist browse function,
which is the default function assigned to this key.
◦ When cue points are defined:
This activates the browsing through the cue points
defined on the clip or on the record train.
• Sort TC:
The system will perform a Sort TC directly. The system
will not prompt the user with a select menu, and it will use
the current TC on the channel to search with the last
selected criteria.
If the user wants to perform a search with different criteria
(Search Net or Local, StartDate, EndDate, CAM/CLIP,
etc… ), the user should use the normal Sort-TC selection
in the upper menu.

Default value Browse

348 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

4.8.12. Hypermotion Management

Principles
The hypermotion cameras can be controlled by the LSM Remote Panel. The camera is
linked via a RS422 or LAN PC connector to the same XT3 server as the controlling
Remote Panel.
In setups including a hypermotion camera, the following principles apply:
• An XT3 server cannot control more than one hypermotion camera.
• The hypermotion camera is used with the classical channel configurations.
• Not all Multicam LSM configurations with several PGMs and several Remotes are
supported within the current RS422 and channel configuration constraints.
• If the Remote Mode setting in the Hypermotion Controller settings is set to
‘Hypermotion only’, an additional menu is made available in the main menu of the
LSM Remote Panel.

Remote Panel Assignment

In setups where several LSM Remote Panels and a hypermotion camera are defined,
the assignment of the various PGMs and hypermotion camera to the LSM Remote
Panels is automatically performed as shown in the table below depending on:
• the number of PGMs in the selected channel configuration
• the selected Remote Mode (Hypermotion only or Hypermotion + LSM)
• the number of Remote Panels available
The following table presents the possible configurations:

# of
1 2 3 4
Remotes

Hyper Hyper Hyper Hyper

Hypermoti Hyper Hyper Hyper Hyper
m. + m. + m. + m. +
on Mode m. Only m. Only m. Only m. Only
LSM LSM LSM LSM

1 OUT NA R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 NA NA NA NA NA

+hyperm. R2:
hyperm.

2 OUT NA R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 NA NA NA

+PGM2 +PGM2 R2: PGM2 R2: PGM2
+hyperm. R2: +hyperm. R3:
hyperm. hyperm.

4. Multicam Configuration 349

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

# of
1 2 3 4
Remotes

Hyper Hyper Hyper Hyper

Hypermoti Hyper Hyper Hyper Hyper
m. + m. + m. + m. +
on Mode m. Only m. Only m. Only m. Only
LSM LSM LSM LSM

3 OUT NA R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 NA
+PGM2 +PGM2 +PGM2 +PGM2 R2: PGM2 R2: PGM2
+PGM3 +PGM3 R2: PGM3 R2: PGM3 R3: PGM3 R3: PGM3
+hyperm. R2: +hyperm. R3: +hyperm. R4:
hyperm. hyperm. hyperm.

4 OUT NA R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1 R1: PGM1
+PGM2 +PGM2 +PGM2 +PGM2 +PGM2 +PGM2 R2: PGM2
+PGM3 +PGM3 +PGM3 R2: PGM3 R2: PGM3 R2: PGM3 R3: PGM3
+hyperm. R2: R2: PGM4 +PGM4 R3: PGM4 R3: PGM4 R4: PGM4
hyperm. +hyperm. R3: +hyperm. R4: +hyperm.
OR hyperm. hyperm.
R1: PGM1
+PGM2
R2: PGM3
+PGM4
+hyperm.

‘PGM1+PGM2’ can represent the 2PGMs mode as well as the PGM/PRV mode.

WARNING
The cells with ‘NA’ correspond to impossible configurations taking into
account the existing constraints. In this case, the Hypermotion option is not
available in the operational menu even if the Hypermotion setting is set to
‘Yes’.

Dual LSM Mode and Hypermotion Cameras

An hypermotion camera can be used in Dual LSM mode taking the following information
into account:
• The hypermotion camera is associated to the LSM operator #2.
• Only the LSM operator #2 can control the hypermotion camera.
The operator can use a dedicated LSM Remote Panel to control solely the
hypermotion camera, or use SHIFT+ D to control both the hypermotion camera and
the EVS servers with one (of his) LSM Remote Panel(s).

4.8.13. Hypermotion Controller Settings

User Interface
The Hypermotion controller settings allow specifying the settings related to the control of
a hypermotion camera from an LSM Remote Panel.

350 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

These fields are available in the following interfaces:

• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (pages 11.X)

WARNING
The hypermotion feature and settings are only available with a valid license
code 20. This license code allows controlling a hypermotion camera from the
remote panel.

The following screenshot displays the Hypermotion Controller settings on the Operation
tab in the web-based interface:

Hypermotion

Description Enables or disables the hypermotion camera control feature.

When this setting is enabled, you can access and use the
hypermotion menu on the LSM Remote Panel via the
SHIFT+D key combination in the operational menu.

Values Yes / No

Default value No

Recorder

Description Selects the record channel to which the A/V material from the
hypermotion camera will be sent.

Values CAM A to CAM L

Default value The default value is the last CAM defined in the channel
configuration (for ex. CAM C in a 3 IN 3 OUT configuration).

4. Multicam Configuration 351

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Remote Mode

Description Specifies the camera elements controlled by the server.

Values • Hypermotion only:

The server controls only the hypermotion camera. An
additional remote is made available in the main menu of
the remote panel, since the hypermotion camera is
considered as an additional external camera.
• Hypermotion + LSM:
The server controls the hypermotion camera and one
PGM in exclusive mode.

Default value Hypermotion only

Port

Description Specifies on which port (RS422 or Lan PC) the commands

must be sent to the hypermotion camera, and possibly to the
PGM if you have selected ‘Hypermotion + LSM” in the
Remote Mode parameter.

Values The following values are possible:

• RS422 #2 to RS422 #6
• Lan PC
The port value is specific to the camera. See the camera-
specific section in the operational manual.

Default value RS422 #6

Protocol

Description Specifies the protocol type used for data transfer on the
selected port.

Values The following values are possible:

• TCP / UDP (when Port is set to Lan PC).
• ASCII / Sony 9-pin (when Port is set to one of the RS422).
The protocol value is specific to the camera. See the camera-
specific section in the operational manual.

Default values • TCP (when Port is set to Lan PC).

• Sony 9-pin (when Port is set to one of the RS422).

352 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

IP Address

Availability This setting is only available if the Port setting is set to Lan
PC.

Description Specifies the IP address of the PC LA N.

Values [Link]

Default value [Link]

Dial Speed

Description Defines the multiplication factor applied to the jog value.

Values Range of values: 10x to 1000x (multiple of 10x)

Default value 10x

4.8.14. Special Effects Settings

User Interface
The Special effects settings allow specifying special effects to be applied to such as
effect duration, color or tool used for the wipe and split effects, for the offside line
feature, etc.
These fields are available in the following interfaces:
• in the Multicam Configuration window, Operation tab
• in the Operational setup menu of the Remote Control Panel (pages 12.X)

4. Multicam Configuration 353

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

The following screenshot displays the Special Effects settings on the Operation tab in
the web-based interface:

Paint/Target Transition

Availability This setting is available with a valid license code 114 or 115, a
8-bit codec, and a compatible base configuration.

Description Defines the duration (and so the speed) of the apparition of an

incrustation in Painting and Target Tracking modes.

Values 00s01fr to 05s00fr

Default value 00s05fr

Set Colour for

Availability This setting is available with a valid license code 113, and a
compatible base configuration.

Description Applies the default color to a specific tool, either to the cursor,
or to the border of the wipe effect or to the delimiter of the split
screen.

Values • Wipe Split

• Cursor

Default value Wipe Split

354 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Colour

Availability This setting, and the three related custom settings below, are
available with a valid license code 113.

Description Defines the default color applied to the cursor or to the wipe or
split effect according to the Set colour for parameter value.

Values • White
• Black
• Custom (defines with the Custom Y, U , and V
parameters)

Default Values White

Custom Y

Description Defines the Y value of the custom color that can be used with
the Colour parameter.

Values 0 to 255

Default value 240

Custom U

Description Defines the U value of the custom color that can be used with
the Colour parameter.

Values 0 to 255

Default value 128

Custom V

Description Defines the V value of the custom color that can be used with
the Colour parameter.

Values 0 to 255

Default value 128

4. Multicam Configuration 355

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Split Screen Tracking

Availability This setting is available with a valid license code 113 and a
compatible base configuration.

Description Enables or disables the auto-tracking in the split screen

mode.

Values Yes / No

Default value No

Paint/Target OSD Mon.

Availability This setting is available with a valid license code 114 or 115, a
8-bit codec, and in Multicam LSM or Replay Only base
configurations.

Description Specifies the format for monitoring the paint and target
functions.

Values SD / HD

Default value HD

NOTE
This setting is also available without a valid license code 114 or 115 when
Epsio Live is used. The setting has to be set to HD to allow OSD management
with Epsio Live.

Internal Offside Line

Availability The internal offside line and related settings below are
available with a valid license code 114, a 8-bit codec, and a
compatible base configuration.

Description Activates or deactivates the internal offside line feature and

the access to the internal offside line menu with the SHIFT+D
key in the operational menu.

Values • Yes:
The SHIFT+D key gives access to the internal offside
menu.
• No:
The SHIFT+D key gives access to the secondary
controller, as usual.

Default value No

356 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Epsio

Description Activates or deactivates the control of the Epsio application.

Values • None:
No Epsio interactivity.
• Live (offside line):
This enables the Epsio Live application (including the
offside line). The SHIFT+D key gives access to the Epsio
Live menu.
• Zoom:
This enables the connection to Epsio Zoom to create
zoom sequences using Epsio Zoom external tool. This is
not available in SD resolutions. The SHIFT+D key gives
access to the Epsio Zoom menu.
• Protocol
This enables the connection of a generic Epsio Service to
the LSM Remote Panel. This allows Epsio to define the
interactivity on the LSM Remote Panel, and access the
jog and lever controls.

Default value None

IP Address

Availability This setting is not available with Protocol set for the Epsio
field.

Description Defines the IP address of the Epsio workstation on the

network when the Epsio connection is enabled via the Epsio
parameter.

Values [Link]

Default value [Link]

Default Tool

Availability This setting is not available with Zoom or Protocol set for the
Epsio field.

Description Selects the tool used by default in the Epsio Live menu on the
remote when the Epsio Live connection is enabled via the
Epsio parameter.

Values • Offside
• Arrow
• Circle
• Graphics

Default value Offside

4. Multicam Configuration 357

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Auto Mark

Availability This setting is not available with Protocol set for the Epsio
field.

Description Activates / deactivates the automatic insertion of a cue point

on the record train every time the Epsio operator enters the
Epsio menu on the remote.

Values Yes / No

Default value No

4.8.15. Split Screen Feature

Description
The Split Screen mode is a software option that allows a simple split screen effect on
PGM 1. This mode operates very similarly to the 2PGM mode, except that the two
outputs are left and right parts of the screen (vertical split screen) or top and bottom
parts of the screen (horizontal split screen) or mixed together on the entire screen
(split mix mode).
The Split Screen feature is available on XT3 with the license code 113.

Limitations
On an XT3 server, the split screen is supported with the following limitations:
• The split screen is available in HD (720p, 1080i, 1080p).
• The horizontal split screen mode is not available in HD Supermotion in DVCPro HD ,
MPEG 2 i-frame, AVC-Intra and XAVC-Intra.
• The split screen is not available in UHD-4K configurations.

358 4. Multicam Configuration

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

5. Monitoring

5.1. Server Monitoring

5.1.1. Overview on Server Monitoring Windows

The Server Monitoring section is available by pressing SHIFT+F5 from the operational
windows on the VGA.

NOTE
This section is only available in the server-based application. It is not available
from the web-based interface.

It contains the pages shortly presented in the following table. The page name in this
table allows you to directly jump to the corresponding page:

Page Page Name Description

#1 General Provides general system information and maintenance

Information commands on the EVS server.
window

#2 RAID and Disk Gives information on the disks or raids from internal
Status window and/or external storage.

#3 Timecode Status Gives information on the genlock, analog LTC and

window timecode statuses from the EVS server. This page is
also used to set up how the timecodes are managed in
the timecode jump tables.

#4 Timecode Displays timecode information from recorders (SD or

Monitoring HD).
window

#5 Log Management Allows a user-friendly and easy management of the logs.

window

5. Monitoring 359
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

5.1.2. General Information Window

Introduction
The page 1 in the Server Monitoring section, General Information window, provides
system information on the EVS server, as well as some maintenance commands.

System Information

Field Name Description

Multicam version Version of Multicam running on the EVS server

Chassis type Type of server chassis (with server height when relevant)

Serial number Serial number of the EVS server

Hardware edition Hardware version of the EVS server

Facility name Name assigned to the EVS server for internal maintenance
via the Tools menu, Assign server facility name option, in
the Multicam setup window.

Net name Machine name on the XNet network.

It is not mandatory. It can however be useful to easily
identify the servers running a given configuration, as it is
tied to the running configuration.
The Net Name will be displayed even if the SDTI code is not
valid.
It is defined in the Multicam Configuration window, Network
tab, XNet section, Net name parameter.

360 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Field Name Description

Net number Machine number (from 1 to 29) on the network. This number
is user-defined and must be unique for each system on the
network.

XNet server Role and privileges of the EVS server on the XNet network.

Local clips Number of clips (out of the max. clip numbers) stored locally
on the EVS server.

Network clips Number of clips (out of the max. clip numbers) stored on the
XNet network.

Date and Time

This section specifies the date and time of the EVS server.

Maintenance
This section provides some commands to perform the following maintenance actions:

Command Description

Reset archive status Resets the flag of all clips whose archive status has been
enabled with the Archive fonction on the Remote panel.

Resync to TC ref Resynchronizes the server timecode to the timecode

reference.

Delete keyword file Deletes the selected keyword file. Press SPACEBAR until
you select the keyword file to remove, and press ENTER.

Record train reset Resets the record trains before their field counter overflows.
Users are requested to confirm the action before performing
the reset. See section "Record Train Maintenance" on page
46

Reconnect PC LAN Reinitiates the PC LAN connexion. This option is only

available on EVS servers fitted with an HS870 MTPC board.
It prevents users from having to reboot the EVS server when
the PC LAN has been disconnected and connected again,
but the PC LAN connection status does not update properly.

5. Monitoring 361
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

5.1.3. RAID and Disk Status Window

Introduction
The second page gives information on the disks or RAIDs from internal and/or external
storage.

RAID Type
The RAID type section displays the number of RAIDs, the type of RAID (4+1 or 5+1) and
the number of spare disks. This information cannot be modified.

RAID Status
This section displays each RAID by its number and uses a color code to display its
status. See section "Disk Status" on page 363 for more information on the disk statuses.
When a raid is rebuilding, the percentage rebuild is displayed instead of the raid number.
This value shows the progress of the rebuild process. See section "Rebuild Process" on
page 42 for more information on the rebuild process.

362 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

External Array Status

This section displays the status of the internal array and each external array, including
potential alerts:

Status Meaning

OK No alert

PSU1!, PSU2! Problem with a power supply unit

FAN1!, FAN2! or FAN3! Problem with a fan

Disk Status
This section provides a representation of the disks contained in the external and/or
internal arrays, as well as their status as described below:

Color Code RAID Status

Light gray OK: The disk is connected in a RAID.

Red Disconnected: The disk is physically present but disconnected by

the software.

Orange Rebuilding: The disk is being rebuilt.

Green Spare: The disk is connected but is not included in a RAID.

gray dashes Not present: The disk is not physically connected to the hardware.

How to Highlight the Disks of a RAID

In the Disk Status area, the Highlight RAID field allows you to highlight, with a light gray
background, the disks belonging to the raid number specified on the right of the field.
To change highlight a given disk raid:
1. Press TAB until you select the Highlight RAID field
2. Press the + or - keys or up and down arrow keys to change the raid you want to
highlight.

How to Change the Disk Status Display

In the Disk Status area, two types of representations are available depending on the
selection made in the Display field, : by disk number or by RAID number.
To change the Disk Status display:
1. Press TAB until you select the Display field
2. Press the Spacebar,+ and - keys or up and down arrow keys to toggle the value
from disks to raids or vice versa.

5. Monitoring 363
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Disk Display
The Disk display represents each disk by its number in the array, or gray dashes if not
present, and uses a color code to display its status.

The external arrays can contain up to 24 disks, with a minimum of 5 disks.

The internal arrays can be organized as one or two arrays of 6 disks.
See section "RAID Status" on page 362 for more information on the raid status.

RAID Display
The RAID display represents each disk by the raid number it is included in, or gray
dashes if not present, and uses a color code to display the disk status. Spare disks are
represented by the letters sp.

Disk Numbering
No specific disk numbering has to be followed or preserved with SAS disks.
By default, however, the disks will be numbered as described in this section.
In the external array, the disks are numbered from 1 up to 24, from left to right:

364 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

In an internal array of fixed disks, the disks are numbered as follows from 1 to 6 or 12:

In an internal array of hot-swappable disks, the disks are numbered as follows from 1 to
6 or 12:

The disk within a raid are organized independently of the physical disk numbering, for
example:

5.1.4. Timecode Status Window

Introduction
This page of the Server Monitoring section provides information on the genlock, analog
LTC and timecode statuses from the EVS server. This page is also used to set up how
the timecodes are managed in the timecode jump tables.

5. Monitoring 365
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Genlock Status
The Genlock Status section provides the following information:
• Genlock status: OK, bad
• Date and time when the genlock has been correctly set or restored.

Analog LTC Status

The Analog LTC Status section specifies the current status of the analog LTC timecode,
as well as the number of drifts detected compared to the genlock.
The possible status values are the following depending on the MTPC board used:

Status Description

OK The timecode is incremented in a normal way.

Drift The timecode received and the genlock are not synchronous.

Bad The timecode received is not correct.

For example when an NTSC timecode is received instead of a PAL
timecode (freq. error), when there are disturbances in the timecode
reception (bad signal).

Lost No timecode is available.

Timecode Status

Introduction
The Timecode Status section displays the settings for managing and monitoring the
timecode jump tables. Records are created in these tables when a break, or jump, in the
timecodes occurs in the recorded material. The records in the timecode jump tables are
then used to search for and manipulate the video material on the XT3 server.
There are two timecode jump tables:
• Timecode jump table for the LTC timecodes
• Timecode jump table for the timecodes specified by the user in the Multicam
Configuration module, Channels tab, Timecode Settings area, User field.
See section "Timecode Settings" on page 251 for more information on this setting.

366 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

LTC Timecode

Default
LTC Description
Values

LTC jumps Number of timecode jumps calculated in the LTC 1

timecode jump table for the given recorder since the last
start of the server.

LTC Number of continuous timecodes to be received, after a 50

threshold break in LTC timecodes in the recorded material, in order
to create a new record in the LTC timecode jump table.

Peak alerts Number of peak alerts generated for the recorder since 0
the last start of the server.
A peak alert is generated each time the peak limit
specified in the Peak Limit field is reached.
In this case, this field is automatically incremented by
one.

Peak limits Period of time (in seconds) of continuous timecodes after 10

(sec) which a break in timecodes in the recorded material will
generate a peak alert. When a peak alert is generated,
the value in Peak Alerts field is incremented by one.

Frequency Number of frequency alerts generated for the recorder 0

alert since the last start of the server.
A frequency alert is generated when X timecode jumps
have been detected in Y seconds.
The X value is defined in the Frequency Number field.
The Y value is defined in the Frequency Time field.
In this case, this field is automatically incremented by
one.

Frequency Number of timecode jumps detected for the recorder 10

number after which a frequency alert can be generated.

Frequency Period of time (in seconds) after which a frequency alert 50

time can be generated.

User Timecode

Default
VITC Description
Values

VITC jumps Number of timecode jumps calculated in the VITC 1

timecode jump table for the given recorder since the last
start of the server.

VITC Number of continuous timecodes to be received, after a 50

threshold break in VITC timecodes in the recorded material, in
order to create a new record in the VITC timecode jump
table.

5. Monitoring 367
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

How to Make Changes to Threshold Values Persistent

When you modify threshold values in this monitoring page, they are saved for the
current session, but the changes are lost when you restart the EVS server.
To make the changes to threshold values persistent, press ALT + S after you have
updated the values.

5.1.5. Timecode Monitoring Window

Introduction
The Timecode Monitoring Window displays the various timecodes used in the running
configuration. It varies somewhat depending on whether you work in SD or HD.

Timecodes on SD Recorders
When the server runs an SD codec, the following timecode information is displayed:
• LTC timecode
• VITC timecode on the various recorders

368 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Timecodes on HD Recorders
When the server runs an HD codec, the following timecode information is displayed:
• LTC timecode
• ATC timecodes on the various recorders

5.1.6. Log Management

Introduction
The Log Management window allows a user-friendly and easy management of the logs
as log files can be accessed from a remote computer while the Multicam is still in use.

5. Monitoring 369
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Log File Types

The left column displays items related to microcode. The right column displays those of
the Multicam.
Each item has two associated log files:
• a regular log file
• a log file logging only errors

Criticality Levels
Each item has a criticality level that can be modified:
• The lowest and default level of criticality is Critical, where the log is limited to
recording critical and important commands. This is the default value for all items.
• An intermediate level is Normal.
• The highest level is Debug which basically records every command.
This highest level should never be chosen without advice of qualified EVS staff.
You can press SHIFT+F1 to access a help screen that provides information on all
commands available in this window.

WARNING
When you have to switch to Debug mode, first reproduce the problem, then
extract the logs, and finally switch back to the default Critical mode.

Extracting Log Files

This window also offers the ability to extract log files when the Multicam is running.
When the Log Management window is open, press E to extracts the log files instantly so
that a user can access them through a common FTP client application from a remote
computer.
The extracted files are located in /mnt/apps/data (root folder when you connect to
the EVS server using an FTP client). Their name starts with an underS-CORE: The
regular log file Multicam_Database.log is renamed _Multicam_Database.log
once extracted when the application is running.

NOTE
You can extract logs from the XNetMonitor for any server running on the XNet
network. For more information, refer to the XNetMonitor manual.

370 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

5.2. XNet Network Monitoring

5.2.1. Overview on XNet Network Monitoring

Windows
The XNet Network monitoring windows can be accessed via the server-based
application when the EVS server is running in a given configuration. To access the XNet
Network Monitoring section, press SHIFT+F4.
It consists in the following pages:
• The XNet Network Schema (page 1) shows a schematic representation of the XNet
network.
• The Hardware Error Counters (page 2) provides a list of the hardware for which an
XNet-related error has been returned.

5.2.2. XNet Network Schema

Overview
This page shows a schematic representation of the XNet network. This allows you to
check the XNet network status, and to see how hardware devices are interconnected on
the XNet network.

5. Monitoring 371
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Data Displayed
All machines are displayed in the logical connection order, i.e. the way they are
effectively connected on the network.
For each machine, the following information is displayed:
• net number + name
• serial number
• main network configuration setting (Preferred, Allowed or Forbidden) (XNet or Local)
as defined in the EVS application.
• number of clips in the database

Background Color
The background color of the data related to a given machine means:
• dark blue: selected server
• turquoise: all machines that may become server (server type = preferred or
allowed)
• grey: all machines that cannot become server (server type = forbidden)

Text Color
The color of the text indicates the video network overload, based on how many XNet
network mailboxes are used:
• white: (OK)
Less than 90% of the network capacity is used.
• red: (warning)
Over 90% of the network capacity is used, and the network risks to be overloaded.

Link Color
The color of the link indicates the physical link status between two machines:
• green: OK
• red: errors

372 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Possible Actions
• Pressing S changes the presentation of the XNet network, and shows alternately a
representation based on the serial number, or on the topology.
• Pressing ENTER resets the status information.
• Pressing SPACEBAR to pause or restart the monitoring
• Pressing F5 to refresh the XNet network schema
• Pressing RIGHT ARROW to display the second XNet network monitoring window.
From this window, you can also disconnect the Xhub branch on which the EVS server is
located from the network. See section "Disconnecting a Machine from the XNet
Network" on page 374 for more information.

5.2.3. Hardware Error Counters

Overview
The second page of the XNet monitoring section provides a list of the hardware devices
present on the XNet network, sorted by serial number, with error counters information.

Data Displayed
The following data is displayed:

5. Monitoring 373
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Column Description

XNet • XNet server (Preferred, Allowed or Forbidden)

• Net number
• Local machine

Sn Serial number

PrvSn Serial number of the previous machine in the network

Name Name of the machine

CpLk Electrical quality of the network

Frm Checksum of the packets

Mb Mailbox

TimeOut Number of timeout commands

In operating conditions, when all machines are connected, the CpLk (electrical quality of
the network) and Frm (checksum on the packets) counters should not increase at all.
At the contrary, the counters will increase during disconnection/connection of/to the
network.

5.2.4. Disconnecting a Machine from the XNet

Network

Introduction
From the Monitoring section, page 2, you can disconnect from the XNet network the
XHub branch the EVS server your are working on is connected to. This can be useful
when setting up an XNet network or troubleshooting an XNet network issue.
This feature is only possible when using a XHub from version 3.03.

How to Disconnect a Machine from the XNet Network

To disconnect a machine from the server, proceed as follows:
1. Press SHIFT- F4 to access the XNet Network Monitoring window.
2. Press CTRL-ALT-L to disconnect the XHub branch from the network.
The following warning is displayed: 'The network branch you are
connected on will be disconnected from the network. All
network actions will be disabled.'
3. Click ENTER to confirm that you want to disconnect the XHub branch from the
network.
On the XNet Network Monitoring window, the following message in red font informs that
the machine is disconnected and how it can be connected again:
'XHub branch disconnected from the network. Press CTRL-ALT-L to
reconnect.'

374 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

5.3. Protocols

5.3.1. Introduction
The EVS servers can be controlled by several protocols. This section will describe
briefly the supported protocols. The purpose of this description is not to be exhaustive
but to give a quick overview of the protocols capabilities and the function supported.

5.3.2. Sony BVW75

Protocol Capabilities
This Sony protocol is able to:
• use the transport command
• get the channel status
• get the channel TC

Characteristics

Bitrates
38.4 kilobits/s

Command Construction

where:
• CMD-1 : Command category
• DataCount : number of byte in the command
• CMD-2 : number of the command
• Data-x : Command parameters
• CheckSum : validity check

5. Monitoring 375
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Replies
Ack: command received and executed

Name CMD-1 Data Count CMD-2 CheckSum

Command 1 1 01 XX

Nack: Error

Name CMD-1 Data Count CMD-2 Data-1 CheckSum

Command 1 1 12 ZZ XX

Supported Commands
This table summarizes the supported commands:

Command Return

00.0C Local Disable 10.01:Ack

00.11 Device Type Request [Link] for PAL

[Link] for NTSC

00.0D Local Enable 10.01:Ack

20.00 Stop 10.01:Ack

20.01 Play 10.01:Ack

20.02 Record 10.01:Ack (customized)

20.04 StandByOff 10.01:Ack

20.05 StandByOn 10.01:Ack

20.0F Eject 10.01:Ack (customized)

20.10 Forward 10.01:Ack

2X.11 Jog Fwd 10.01:Ack

2X.12 Var Fwd 10.01:Ack

2X.13 Shuttle Fwd 10.01:Ack

20.20 Rewind 10.01:Ack

2X.21 Jog Rew 10.01:Ack

2X.22 Var Rew 10.01:Ack

2X.23 Shuttle Rew 10.01:Ack

20.30 Preroll 10.01:Ack

24.31 CueUp With Data 10.01:Ack

20.54 Anti-Clog Timer Disable 10.01:Ack (No action)

376 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Command Return

20.55 Anti-Clog Timer Enable 10.01:Ack (No action)

20.60 Full EE OFF 10.01:Ack (No action)

20.61 Full EE ON 10.01:Ack (No action)

20.64 Edit OFF 10.01:Ack (No action)

20.65 Edit ON 10.01:Ack (No action)

40.00 Timer-1 Preset 10.01:Ack

40.08 Timer-1 Reset 10.01:Ack

40.10 Set In 10.01:Ack

40.11 Set Out 10.01:Ack

44.14 IN Preset 10.01:Ack

44.15 OUT Preset 10.01:Ack

40.20 Reset In 10.01:Ack

40.21 Reset Out 10.01:Ack

40.30 Edit Preset 10.01:Ack

44.31 Preroll Preset 10.01:Ack

40.35 Color Frame Select 10.01:Ack (No action)

41.36 Set Timer Mode 10.01:Ack

40.40 Set Auto Mode OFF 10.01:Ack

40.41 Set Auto Mode ON 10.01:Ack

40.9E Superimpose 10.01:Ack (No action)

61.0A Request TCGen 74.08 : GEN TIME DATA

74.09 : GEN UB DATA
78.08 : GEN TC & UB DATA

61.0C Request TimeCode 74.00 TIMER-1 DATA

74.04 LTC TIME DATA
74.05 LTC UB DATA
78.04 LTC TIME & UB DATA
74.06 VITC TIME DATA
74.07 VITC UB DATA
78.06 VITC TIME & UB DATA

60.10 Request IN 74.10 IN DATA

60.11 Request OUT 74.11 OUT DATA

61.20 Request Status 7X.20 STATUS DATA

60.2E Request Speed 7X.2E COMMAND SPEED DATA

60.31 Request Preroll 74.31 PREROLL TIME DATA

60.36 Request Timer Mode 71.36 TIME MODE DATA

5. Monitoring 377
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

5.3.3. XTENDD35

Protocol Capabilities
The XTendDD35 protocol is a Sony Protocol extension
This protocol is able to:
• preload clips without chaining
• create clips
• get the server database

Characteristics
Same characteristics as the Sony Protocol.

Supported Commands
This protocol supports the same commands as the Sony protocol, as well as the
following ones:

Command Return

60.81: Request current ID 7X.81

60.82: Get First ID 7X.82

60.83: Get Next ID 7X.82

60.84: Get First Delete ID 7X.84

60.85: Get Next Delete ID 7X.84

60.86: Get First ID Added ID 7X.86

60.87: Get Next ID Added ID 7X.86

67.91: Request ID duration 7X.91

27.82: Open File 10.01

EVS adds some custom commands to the protocol in order to take advantage of the
server potential. Please contact EVS to know more about these commands.

378 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

5.3.4. Odetics

Protocol Capabilities
The Odetics protocol is a Sony Protocol extension.
This protocol is able to:
• preload clips without chaining
• create clips
• get the server database

Characteristics
Same characteristics as the Sony Protocol.

Supported Commands
This protocol supports the same commands as the Sony protocol, as well as the
following ones:

Command Return

00.11 : Device Type Request 12.11 : Device Type

2X.31 CueUp With Data (Odetics extention) 10.01:Ack

44.14 Preset IN (Odetics extention) 10.01:Ack

44.15 Preset OUT (Odetics extention) 10.01:Ack

40.40 Auto Mode Off 10.01:Ack

40.41 Auto Mode ON (Odetics extention) 10.01:Ack

A0.01 Auto Skip 10.01:Ack

AX.02 Record Cue Up With Data. 10.01:Ack

AX.04 Preview In Preset 10.01:Ack

AX.05 Preview Out Preset 10.01:Ack

A0.06 Preview In Reset 10.01:Ack

A0.07 Preview OUT Reset 10.01:Ack

Ax.10 Erase ID 10.01:Ack

A0.14 List First ID 8X.14 ID Listing

A0.15 List Next ID 8X.14 ID Listing

A8.18 ID Status Request 81.18 ID Status

5. Monitoring 379
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Command Return

A0.1c Longuest Contiguous Available Storage. 84.1C Longest Contiguous

Available Storage

A0.21 Device ID Request 88.21 Device ID

A8.20 Set Device ID 10.01:Ack

EVS adds some custom commands to the protocol in order to take advantage of the
server potential. Please contact EVS to know more about these commands.

5.3.5. VDCP

Protocol Capabilities
The Video Disk Control Protocol (VDCP) is a protocol dedicated to the video server and
design for the automation.
This protocol is able to:
• control several channels with one serial connection
• preload and chain clips
• create clips
• get the server database

Characteristics

Bitrates
38.4 kilobits/s

Command Construction

where:
• STX : 02
• BC : number of byte in the command
• CMD-1 : Command type
• CMD-2 : Command number
• Data : Command parameter (max 255 Datas)
• CheckSum : validity check

380 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Replies
• Ack (0x04) or Nack (0x05)
• Replies with data

Supported Commands
This table summarizes the supported commands:

Command
Return
VarID mode 8-bytes ID mode

80.15 00.15 Delete Protect 04 Ack

80.16 00.16 Undelete Protect 04 Ack

- 10.00 Stop 04 Ack

- 10.01 Play 04 Ack

- 10.02 Record 04 Ack

- 10.04 Still 04 Ack

- 10.05 Step 04 Ack

- 10.06 Continue 04 Ack

- 10.07 Jog 04 Ack

- 10.08 Var Play 04 Ack

A0.1D 20.1D Rename ID 04 Ack

- 20.1E Preset Standard Time 04 Ack

A0.1F 20.1F New Copy 04 Ack

- 20.20 Sort Mode 04 Ack

- 20.21 Close Port 04 Ack

- 20.22 Select Port 04 Ack

A0.23 20.23 Record Init 04 Ack

A0.24 20.24 Play Cue 04 Ack

A0.25 20.25 Cue With Data 04 Ack

A0.26 20.26 Delete ID 04 Ack

- 20.29 Clear 04 Ack

A0.2C 20.2C Record Init With Data 04 Ack

- 20.43 Disk Preroll 04 Ack

- 30.01 Open Port 30.81 Port Opened

5. Monitoring 381
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Command
Return
VarID mode 8-bytes ID mode

B0.02 30.02 Next B0/30.82 Next ID

B0.03 30.03 Last B0/30.83 Last ID

- 30.05 Port Status 30.85 Status

- 30.06 Position Request 30.86 Position

B0.07 30.07 Active ID Request B0/30.87 Active ID

- 30.08 Device Type Request 30.88 Device Type

- 30.10 System Status Request 30.90 System Status

B0.11 30.11 ID List B0/30.91 ID

B0.14 30.14 ID Size Request B0/30.94 ID Size

B0.16 30.16 ID Request B0/30.96 ID Characteristic

B0.18 30.18 ID’s Added List B0/30.98 Added ID

B0.19 30.19 ID’s Deleted List B0/30.99 Deleted ID

EVS adds some custom commands to the protocol in order to take advantage of the
server potential. Please contact EVS to know more about these commands.

382 5. Monitoring
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

6. Truck Manager Plugin

6.1. Introduction

Plugin Integration into Truck Manager

This chapter describes the Multicam plugin for the Truck Manager application.
The Multicam plugin consists of a list of operational settings relevant for Multicam.
These settings are displayed in a specific area in the Truck Manager application, in the
lower part of the Configuration pane.
The Multicam plugin allows users to define and apply remotely the settings required for
the Multicam application to be operational.

Plugin Delivery
The plugin is delivered with the Multicam application.
The Truck Manager application automatically downloads the right plugin version when it
connects to an EVS server for the first time on a given setup.
For this reason, the version of the Truck Manager is not tied to a given plugin version of
the Multicam application.

6. Truck Manager Plugin 383

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

6.2. Plugin Overview

384 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Introduction
The Multicam plugin contains the elements highlighted on the screenshot below:

6. Truck Manager Plugin 385

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Description
The table below describes the various elements of the Multicam plugin:

Part Name Description

1. Plugin name Field to expand or collapse the plugin area.

2. Apply button Button to apply the parameter values to Multicam.

3. Menu icon Icon to open the contextual menu, which provides

general commands, or commands specific to
Multicam.
See section "Contextual Menu" on page 387.

4. Configuration Area Area that allows users to select the configuration line,
and access the advanced Multicam parameters.
See section "Configuration Area" on page 388.

5. Server Area Area that allows users to set the main server
parameters of Multicam.
See section "Server Area" on page 388.

6. Channels Area Area that allows users to set the main channels
parameters of Multicam.
See section "Channels Area" on page 391.

7. Network Area Area that allows users to set the main network
parameters of Multicam.
See section "Network Area" on page 396

386 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

6.3. Contextual Menu

Introduction
The following contextual menu is available when you click on the contextual menu icon
in the Multicam plugin in Truck Manager.
The contextual menu provides general commands, and commands specific to Multicam.

Command Description
The table below describes the various commands of the contextual menu:

Command Name Select that command to ...

Reset Reset the values defined in the plugin to the values

currently defined in the Multicamapplication.

Export Export all setting values associated to the Multicam

application to a .cnf file named according to the following
pattern <Name>-<ProductName>.cnf.

Import Import the setting values stored in a .cnf file into the
application plugin.

Copy Copy to the clipboard the parameters associated to the

Multicam application.

Paste Paste to another application the parameters previously

copied to the clipboard.

Clear video disks Delete all clips, playlists and record trains on the EVS
server when users launch a new configuration.

6. Truck Manager Plugin 387

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Command Name Select that command to ...

Clear only record trains Delete the record trains on the EVS server.

Cancel clear video Cancel the clear video disks command previously issued.
disks

6.4. Configuration Area

Introduction
This section describes the Configuration area located above the settings in the Multicam
plugin:

Field Description
The following table describes the fields in the Configuration area from left to right, and
form top to bottom:

Item Use this item to ...

Configuration Select the Multicam configuration you want to edit in the

Selection field Truck Manager.

Advanced button Access the web-based interface of the Multicam

Configuration window, and to access the advanced
parameters not available in the Truck Manager.

Configuration Name Change the name of the selected configuration.

field

6.5. Server Area

Introduction
This section describes the various settings available in the Server area.
Once you have specified the requested values for the various settings, click the Apply
button to apply the values remotely to Multicam.

388 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Video

Field Rate

Description Field frequency used (Hz).

Both field rate and resolution give the video standard.

Values 50.00 Hz (PAL) - default

59.94 Hz (NTSC)
59.94 Hz(J) (NTSC-J)

Resolution

Description Vertical resolution used (number of white-to-black and black-

to-white transitions that can be seen from the top to the
bottom of the picture) (pixel + type).
Both field rate and resolution correspond to the video
standard.
With an XT3 server, SD and HD video standards can be
available if the relevant license codes are activated.

Values In SD:
• 525i
• 625i
In HD:
• 720p
• 1080i
• 1080p (available with code 21 or 22)
In UHD-4K:
• UHDTV-4K (available with code 27)

6. Truck Manager Plugin 389

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Codec Intra

Codec

Description Algorithm used to compress the video signal.

With Intra codecs, the compression techniques are performed
exclusiverly relative to information contained within the
current frame.

Values In SD:
• Mjpeg (SD)
• IMX
• DVCPro 50
In HD:
• Mjpeg EVS (HD)
• Mjpeg Standard (HD)
• Mpeg2-Intra (HD)
• DVCPro HD
• Avid DNxHD 120,185 or 185x (only in 50 Hz)
• Avid DNxHD 145, 220 or 220x (only in 59.94 Hz)
• Apple ProRes 422, 422 LT, 422 HQ
• AVC-Intra 100
• XAVC-Intra 100
See section "Codec Availability" on page 178 for detailed
information on codec availability.

Bitrate

Description Number of megabits processed per second (Mbps).

The bitrate depends on the codec.

Values See section "Codec-Related Information" on page 179 for

detailed information on bitrates per codec.

Codec Proxy

Codec

Description Algorithm used to compress the video signal in low resolution.

It is used for remote browsing purposes.
It is not possible to run an EVS server with the Proxy essence
only.

Values • Mjpeg

Bitrate
See section "Bitrate" on page 390.

390 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

6.6. Channels Area

Introduction
This section describes the various settings available in the Channels area.
Once you have specify the requested values for the various settings, click the Apply
button to apply the values remotely to Multicam.

Base Settings

Inputs

Description Number of logical record channels in the given configuration,

including the SLSM recorders.
The partition of the disk storage between these channels, and
the advanced audio settings are automatically adapted to the
number of record channels.
One SLSM recorder accounts for one input whatever the
number of phases.

Values The number of supported channels depends on the chassis,

and the mode:
• on XT3 6U: 0-12 (Spotbox), 1-12 (LSM)
• on XT3 4U: 0-8 (Spotbox), 1-8 (LSM)
See section "About Supported Configurations" on page 52 for
more information on number of record channels and on
supported configurations.

Outputs

Description Number of logical play channels in the given configuration.

Values The number of supported channels depends on the chassis,

and the mode:
• on XT3 6U and XT3 4U: 0-6 (Spotbox), 1-6 (LSM/XSense)
See section "About Supported Configurations" on page 52 for
more information on number of record channels and on
supported configurations.

6. Truck Manager Plugin 391

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Base Config.
The default values are only applicable to the settings in the Multicam application, not to
the settings in the Truck Manager plugin.

Description Mode the EVS server is working in.

The base configurations available depend on the server type,
and on the valid license codes.

Values • Multicam LSM:

mode where the EVS server is controlled by the Remote
Control Panel or from the Multicam production screens.
License codes: 103 ...109 + 111 and/or 112

• Replay-Only LSM:
restricted Multicam LSM mode without playlist
management, split audio, nor support of hypermotion
cameras.
License codes: 103 ...109

• Video Delay:
mode where the server is used to play out the input with a
video delay.
License codes: 101 + 127

• Spotbox:
mode where the EVS server can be controlled by industry-
standard protocols: Sony BVW75, VDCP, Odetics, DD35,
EVS’ AVSP, IPDP, EditRec or LinX API, or from the
Multicam production screens.
License codes: 101 + 127

• XSense:
mode where the EVS server can be controlled by the
XSense Remote Panel or from the Multicam production
screens.
License codes: 96 + 101 and/or 103 ... 109 + 111 and/or
112

• Server:
mode where the EVS server can only be controlled by the
supported industry-standard protocols, but not from the
Multicam production screens.
License codes: 101 (without 127)

• F&K Dual Spotbox:

Specific mode in which the EVS server can be used as a
Fill & Key server. It requires the license code 97 (F&K
Dual) and the Dual (3D) value to be selected in the
Interface field in the Base settings.
In this base configuration, the EVS server can be
controlled by industry-standard protocols: Sony BVW75,
VDCP, Odetics, DD35, EVS’ AVSP, IPDP, EditRec or
LinX API, or from the Multicam production screens.
License codes: 97

392 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

• F&K Dual XSense:

Specific mode in which the EVS server can be used as a
Fill & Key server. It requires the license code 97 (F&K
Dual) and the Dual (3D) value to be selected in the
Interface field in the Base settings.
In this base configuration, the EVS server can be
controlled by the XSense Remote Panel or from the
Multicam production screens.
License codes: 97

Default value Multicam LSM

Interface

Availability The parameter is only available with one of the following

license code active:
• code 21 (Dual Link interface in 1080p)
• code 22 (3G-SDI interface in 1080p)
• code 23 (Dual Link interface in 3D)
• code 24 (3G-SDI interface in 3D)
• code 27 (UHD-4K resolution)
• code 97 (Dual Link interface in Fill&Key)

Description Defines the interface the EVS server will use in 3D, 1080p, or
with UHD-4K resolutions :
• The HD-SDI interface consists of a HD-SDI serial link
and provides a bitrate of 1.485 Gbit/s.
• The Dual Link interface consists of a pair of HD-SDI
serial links and provides a bitrate of 2.970 Gbit/s.
• The 3G-SDI interface consists of a single serial link that
provides 2.970 Gbit/s.

Values The following values are possible, but their availability

depends on several conditions:
• HD-SDI: HD-SDI connection for 720p/1080i.
• Dual: Dual Link for 1080p
• Dual (3D): Dual Link for 3D
◦ available with code 23 or 97 + 3D setting to Yes
• 3G Level-A: 3G-SDI for 1080p in one 3G stream (native
file interoperability)
◦ available with code 22 or 27 + 1080p resolution
• 3G Level-B: 3G-SDI for 1080p in two HD streams (native
file interoperability)
◦ available with code 22 or 27 + 1080p resolution
• 3G (3D): 3G-SDI for 3D
◦ available with code 24 + 3D setting to Yes

Default value HD-SDI

6. Truck Manager Plugin 393

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Dual LSM Mode

Availability The parameter is only available in specific conditions, with the

license code 116 (Dual LSM option).

Description Activates the Dual LSM feature. This feature makes it

possible for two LSM operators to work independently on the
same server on their LSM Remote Panel(s).

Values Yes / No (default).

SLSM Settings

Number of cameras

Description Number of SLSM cameras in the given configuration.

An SLSM camera corresponds to one logical record channel.

Values The maximum number of cameras depends on the SLSM

speed, and on the total number of record channels.
Range of values: 0-4

Default value 0

SLSM Speed

Description Field rate at which the SLSM camera records the incoming
feeds, expressed in multiples of the standard field rate of 50
fields/sec (50Hz) or 60 fields/sec (59.95 Hz).

Values 2x, 3x, 4x,6x, 8x, 10x, 16x

Default value 2x

On 3G-SDI

Availability This setting is only available with a 720p or 1080i resolution.

Description Specifies whether two SLSM phases are connected to the

EVS server using a 3G-SDI interface consisting of a single
serial link.

Values Yes / No (default)

394 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Parity

Availability This setting is displayed in SD configurations.

Description Specifies whether the identical or alternate parity is applied.

Values • Identical
• Alternate

Default value Alternate

Audio Settings

Description Number of mono audio tracks associated to each video

channel.
See section "Number of Audio Tracks" on page 229

Values 4 Monos (default), 8 Monos, 16 Monos or 32 Monos

Port Settings

Port #1 - #6
The default value is only applicable to the settings in the Multicam application, not to the
settings in the Truck Manager plugin.

Description Specifies what type of device/controller is connected to each

RS422 port of the EVS server.

Values The following values can be available if the required license

codes are active:
• EVS Remote for LSM Remote Panel (code between 103
and 109).
• EVS Remote for XSense Remote Panel (code between
103 and 109 or code 96)
• EVS IPDP (code 120 or 121)
• Sony BVW75 (code 118)
• XtenDD35 (code 118)
• Odetics (and 'Odetics FK') (code 119)
• VDCP (and 'VDCP FK') (code 119)
• EVS AVSP (code 120 or 121)
• Edit Rec (code 122)
• LinX (code 123)

6. Truck Manager Plugin 395

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Channel and Control Settings

Name

Description User-defined name for play or record channel. This name will
be used for the OSD, and in the IPDirector application suite.
The name can contain maximum 24 characters.

Main ctrl (Main Controller)

Description Name of the main device/controller allowed to control the

given play or record channel.

Values For a controller to be available in the list of values, it must first

be assigned to an RS422 port in the port settings.
In addition, rules specific to each controller apply to the
assignment of the controller (used alone or in combination
with other controllers) to play or/and record channels. See
section "Rules for Controller Assignment" on page 211 for
more information.
An error message will be displayed to warn you in case of a
wrong protocol selection or protocol combination, and the
fields that contain errors will be highlighted in red.

6.7. Network Area

Introduction
This section describes the various settings available in the Network area.
Once you have specify the requested values for the various settings, click the Apply
button to apply the values remotely to Multicam.

SDTI

Speed

Description Enables the selection of the 3G-SDTI option and the

bandwidth for the XNet network.
The XNet circuit is closed only when the Multicam software is
started.

Values The following values are available:

• 3G-SDTI (formerly No Relay 2970 Mbps)
• Off

396 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Net Name

Description Machine name on the XNet network.

It is not mandatory because a network number is assigned to
the EVS server. It is however recommended as it helps to
easily identify the servers connected to the XNet network.
The Net Name will be displayed even if the SDTI code is not
valid.

Values The Net Name is user-defined and cannot exceed 8

characters.

Type

Description Defines the privileges of the EVS server on the SDTI network.

Values The following values are possible:

• Client: It cannot access the content on other EVS
servers.
• Master: It can access all content on other EVS servers.
• Server: It manages the SDTI network, and it can access
all content on other EVS servers.
Only one EVS server on the network should be set to
Server type. If no Server type is defined on the network,
XNet will not be established. If more than one EVS server
is defined as Server type, only the first one to connect will
be the actual Server.
Whatever the server type defined, the content of an EVS
server can be accessed without restrictions by the other EVS
servers (with type Master or Server) on the SDTI network.

Net Number

Description The Net Number parameter defines the machine number on

the network. This number is user-defined and must be unique
for each system on the network. An error message appears if
the number is already assigned to another machine.

Values Range between 1 and 29

6. Truck Manager Plugin 397

EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Gigabit IP Configuration

IP Address (Port 1/Port 2)

Description IP address to connect to the port1/port2 of the Gigabit

Ethernet connection on the EVS server.

Values The IP addresses [Link] and [Link] are not

allowed.

Subnet Mask (Port 1/Port 2)

Description Range of logical addresses within the address space

assigned to the Gigabit Ethernet connection.
The IP addresses of both GbE ports must belong to different
subnet masks. Otherwise, Multicam will return an error
message.

Default Gateway (Port 1/Port 2)

Description IP address of the router on the Gigabit Ethernet network that

serves as an access point to external networks.

398 6. Truck Manager Plugin

CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

Glossary
3
3G-SDI
Interface to transfer digital video content. It consists of a single 2.970 Gbit/s serial link. It
is standardized in SMPTE 424M and replaces the dual link HD-SDI.

3G Level-A
3G-SDI interface in which the 3G digital video stream is transferred as a single 3G-SDI
stream.

3G Level-B
3G-SDI interface in which the 3G digital video stream is still transferred as 2 HD SDI
streams, and not as a single one.

C
Cable
Part of a cable that arrives from the camera and is plugged into a video BNC connector.

Channel
Video connection interface on the V3X codec module. It can be used and assigned as a
player or record channel in a given configuration. They are named with J8 for the
primary channel when the codec module is used as a recorder, J5 for the secondary
channel when the codec module is used as a recorder, J7 for the primary channel when
the codec module is used as a player, J3 for the secondary channel when the codec
module is used as a player. One channel 3G-SDI can handle a bandwidth equivalent to
2 x HD-SDI.

ChannelMax configuration
Configuration with more than 8 channels, in which the secondary link of a codec module
can be used as an independent channel. This can also be called a 12-channel
configuration.

Codec module
On the rear panel, it refers to a set of 6 BNC connectors labelled as "Codec 1" to "Codec
6". On the V3X board, it refers to the corresponding module board (COD A or COD B)
fitted on one of the codec base board. There are two codec modules per codec board.

Connector
Video connection interface (BNC) on the rear panel. The primary connector is named
with from 1 to 6, the secondary connector is named from 1B to 6B.

D
Decoder
Processing unit that actually decodes the video signal.

Glossary 399
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

Dual-Link
SDI interface in which the digital video stream is transferred as 2 HD SDI streams via
two physical links.

Dual LSM
Feature allowing two LSM operators to work independently with their own LSM Remote
Panel on the same EVS server, defining some operational settings independently from
each other. Available from Multicam 14.01 onwards.

Dual Play
Feature in which both OUT connectors on one codec module are used as two
independent player channels.

E
Encoder
Processing unit that actually encodes the video signal.

Extended Configurations
This feature allows using the secondary channel of the codec module as an independent
record channel. With an XT3 server, the possible extended modes are the 7-channel
mode with the 4U chassis, and the 8- and 12-channel mode with the 6U chassis.

G
GPI
Abbreviation for General Purpose Interface. This refers to a device used as an
communication interface with the EVS server. It has digital lines which may be used for
input, output, or both, depending on the function.

H
Hypermotion camera
These are cameras that record at a frame rate much higher than real time. The content
recorded at high frame rate on a memory block of the camera buffer is ingested into the
EVS server through a single record channel when the operator initiates a play command
on the camera. Hypermotion cameras can be controlled by an LSM Remote Panel.

I
Intra-frame codec
Codec type for which the compression techniques are performed relative to information
contained within the current frame, and not relative to any other frame in the video
sequence. It is shortened by 'intra' in the [Link] is opposed to long-GOP codecs.
(Source Wikipedia)

L
Logical channel
Logical player or recorder channel in a given configuration, independent from the
physical connections that have to be used to enable this logical channel.

400 Glossary
CONFIGURATION MANUAL XT3 Server 16.6

M
Mix on One Channel
Feature that allows using the secondary link of the codec module of a player channel on
the V3X board (J3) as the preview channel to provide the PGM/PRV mode with a single
codec module.

Multi-Essence configuration
EVS server configuration that allows multiple and simultaneous encoding of the video
materal into the server. The multi-essence Intra+ LoRes is supported on EVS servers.

Multicam Configuration window

Window in the server-based and web-based Multicam Setup application from where you
can define all configuration parameters.

Multicam Setup application

Term used to refer equally to the server-based or web-based user interface used to set
up and configure the EVS servers.

Multicam Setup window

Initial Window in the server-based and web-based Multicam Setup application, that is
displayed when the EVS server is not running a given configuration yet. It gives access
to the configuration lines defined on the EVS server and to the commonly used
maintenance tools.

O
Operational Setup menu
Menu accessible on the Remote Panel using the SHIFT+D keys form the main menu. It
allows users to define operational parameters.

OSD
Abbreviation for on-screen display.

P
Physical channel
See also Channel.

Play channel (or Player)

Codec module used as a player.

R
Record channel (or Recorder)
Codec module used as a recorder.

Glossary 401
EVS Broadcast Equipment SA Issue 16.6.A - June 2021

S
SDTI network
EVS proprietary network that allows users to view and share the content of
interconnected EVS video servers. 'XNet network' is used as synonym for 'SDTI
network'.

Server-Based Multicam Setup application

Server-Based application used to set up and configure the EVS servers. The short form
is 'Server-Based application' in this user manual. This is accessible from the EVS Server
itself when it has been started.

SLSM camera
Also called Supermotion cameras. These are cameras that record at a frame rate from 2
to 16 times higher than the normal frame rate of 25 frames/sec (PAL) or 29.97
frames/sec (NTSC).

T
Technical Setup menu
Menu accessible on the Remote Panel using the F0 key. It allows users to define
currently used configuration parameters.

TwinRec
Feature that allows using both record channels of each codec module. Therefore, you
can ingest two record channels per codec module, which means 12 record channels on
a 6U EVS server fitted with 3 codec boards.

W
Web-Based Multicam Setup interface
Web-Based interface used to set up and configure the EVS servers. The short form is
'web-based interface' in this manual. This is accessible from any machine (PC or server)
that is on the same network range as the EVS server. This can be accessed from a web
browser using the following URL pattern: [Link] where the
crosses correspond to the IP address of the PC LAN of the EVS server.

X
XREC configuration
Configuration with more than 6 channels and less than 9 channels, in which the
secondary link of a codec module can be used for an independent recorder. This can
also be called a 7-channel configuration (with 4U chassis) or a 8-channel configuration
(with 6U chassis).

402 Glossary
 Corporate
+32 4 361 7000

North & Latin America

+1 973 575 7811

EVS Headquarters Asia & Pacific

Liège Science Park +852 2914 2501
13, rue Bois St Jean
B-4102 Seraing Other regional offices
Belgium [Link]/contact

EVS Broadcast Equipment is continuously adapting and improving its products in accordance with the ever changing
requirements of the Broadcast Industry.
The data contained herein is therefore subject to change without prior notice. Companies and product names are
To learn more about EVS go to [Link] trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.